Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to numerical methods for simulating physical-chemical systems This book offers a systematic, highly accessible presentation of numerical methods used to simulate the behavior of physical-chemical systems. Unlike most books on the subject, it focuses on methodology rather than specific applications. Written for students and professionals across an array of scientific and engineering disciplines and with varying levels of experience with applied mathematics, it provides comprehensive descriptions of numerical methods without requiring an advanced mathematical background. Based on its author's more than forty years of experience teaching numerical methods to engineering students, Numerical Methods for Solving Partial Differential Equations presents the fundamentals of all of the commonly used numerical methods for solving differential equations at a level appropriate for advanced undergraduates and first-year graduate students in sciencTable of ContentsPreface vii 1 Interpolation 1 1.1 Purpose 1 1.2 Definitions 1 1.3 Example 2 1.4 Weirstraus Approximation Theorem 3 1.5 Lagrange Interpolation 3 1.5.1 Example 6 1.6 Compare P2 (θ) and f (θ) 8 1.7 Error of Approximation 9 1.8 Multiple Elements 14 1.8.1 Example 17 1.9 Hermite Polynomials 19 1.10 Error in Approximation by Hermites 22 1.11 ChapterSummary 23 1.12 Problems 24 2 Numerical Differentiation 31 2.1 General Theory 31 2.2 Two-Point Difference Formulae 32 2.2.1 Forward Difference Formula 33 2.2.2 Backward Difference Formula 33 2.2.3 Example 34 2.2.4 Error of the Approximation 34 2.3 Two-Point Formulae from Taylor Series 36 2.4 Three-point Difference Formulae 38 2.4.1 First-Order Derivative Difference Formulae 39 2.4.2 Second-Order Derivatives 40 2.5 Chapter Summary 44 2.6 Problems 44 3 Numerical Integration 53 3.1 Newton-Cotes Quadrature Formula 53 3.1.1 Lagrange Interpolation 53 3.1.2 Trapezoidal Rule 54 3.1.3 Simpson’s Rule 55 3.1.4 General Form 56 3.1.5 Example using Simpson’s Rule 56 3.1.6 Gauss Legendre Quadrature 57 3.2 Chapter Summary 60 3.3 Problems 61 4 Initial Value Problems 65 4.1 Euler Forward Integration Method Example 66 4.2 Convergence 67 4.3 Consistency 70 4.4 Stability 71 4.4.1 Example of Stability 72 4.5 Lax Equivalence Theorem 72 4.6 Runge−Kutta Type Formulae 72 4.6.1 GeneralForm 72 4.6.2 Runge−Kutta First-Order Form (Euler’s Method) 73 4.6.3 Runge−Kutta Second-Order Form 73 4.7 ChapterSummary 76 4.8 Problems 76 5 Weighted Residuals Methods 81 5.1 Finite Volume or Subdomain Method 82 5.1.1 Example 84 5.1.2 Finite Difference Interpretation of the Finite Volume Method 91 5.2 Galerkin Method for First Order Equations 92 5.2.1 Finite-Difference Interpretation of the Galerkin Approximation 99 5.3 Galerkin Method for Second-Order Equations 99 5.3.1 Finite Difference Interpretation of Second-Order Galerkin Method 107 5.4 Finite Volume Method for Second-Order Equations 108 5.4.1 Example of Finite Volume Solution of a Second-Order Equation 112 5.4.2 Finite Difference Representation of the Finite-Volume Method for Second-Order Equations 118 5.5 CollocationMethod 119 5.5.1 CollocationMethod forFirst-OrderEquations 119 5.5.2 Collocation Method for Second-Order Equations 122 5.6 ChapterSummary 128 5.7 Problems 128 6 Initial Boundary-Value Problems 133 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 Two Dimensional Polynomial Approximations 133 6.2.1 Example of a Two Dimensional Polynomial Approximation 134 6.3 Finite Difference Approximation 135 6.3.1 First-Order Accurate Finite Difference Calculation 137 6.3.2 Example of Second Order Accurate Finite Difference Approximation in Space 140 6.4 Stability of Finite Difference Approximations 143 6.4.1 Example of Stability 146 6.4.2 Example Simulation 149 6.5 Galerkin Finite Element Approximations in Time 151 6.5.1 Strategy One: Forward Difference Approximation 153 6.5.2 Strategy Two: Backward Difference Approximation 154 6.6 Chapter Summary 155 6.7 Problems 155 7 Finite Difference Methods in Two Space 161 7.1 Example Problem 166 7.2 Chapter Summary 168 7.3 Problems 168 8 Finite Element Methods in Two Space 173 8.1 Finite Element Approximations over Rectangles 173 8.2 Finite Element Approximations over Triangles 186 8.2.1 Formulation of Triangular Basis Functions 188 8.2.2 Example Problem of Finite Element Approximation over Triangles 191 8.2.3 Second Type or Neumann Boundary-Value Problem 198 8.3 Isoparametric Finite Element Approximation 202 8.3.1 Natural Coordinate Systems 202 8.3.2 Basis Functions 208 8.3.3 Calculation of the Jacobian 209 8.3.4 Example of Isoparametric Formulation 213 8.4 Chapter Summary 220 8.5 Problems 220 9 Finite Volume Approximation in Two Space 229 9.1 Finite Volume Formulation 229 9.2 Finite Volume Example Problem 1 235 9.2.1 Problem Definition 235 9.2.2 Weighted Residual Formulation 236 9.2.3 Element Coefficient Matrices 237 9.2.4 Evaluation of the Line Integral 238 9.2.5 Evaluation of the Area Integral 245 9.2.6 Global Matrix Assembly 249 9.3 Finite Volume Example Problem Two 250 9.3.1 Problem Definition 250 9.3.2 Weighted Residual Formulation 251 9.3.3 Element Coefficient Matrices 252 9.3.4 Evaluation of the Source Term 253 9.4 Chapter Summary 254 9.5 Problems 254 10 Initial Boundary-Value Problems 261 10.1 Mass Lumping 263 10.2 Chapter Summary 264 10.3 Problems 264 11 Boundary-Value Problems in Three Space 267 11.1 Finite Difference Approximations 267 11.2 Finite Element Approximations 268 11.3 Chapter Summary 273 12 Nomenclature 277 Index 281

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers the utilization of lignocellulosic biomass for biofuel production as well as other industrial applications such as in biotechnology, paper and pulp, chemical and bioplastics. Lignocellulosic materials such as agricultural residues (e.g., wheat straw, sugarcane bagasse, corn stover), forest products (hardwood and softwood), and crops such as switchgrass and salix, are becoming a potent source for generating valuable products. Lignocellulosic Biomass Production and Industrial Applications describes the utilization of lignocellulosic biomass for various applications. Although there have been numerous reports on lignocellulosic biomass for biofuel application, there have been very few other applications reported for lignocellulosic biomass-based biotechnology, chemicals and polymers. This book covers both application areas. Besides describing the various types of biofuel production, such as bioethanol, biobutanol, biodiesel and biogas from lignocellulosic biomass, itTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Valorization of Lignocellulosic Materials to Polyhydroxyalkanoates (PHAs) 1 Arpan Das 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Lignocellulose: An Abundant Carbon Source for PHA Production 5 1.3 Lignocellulosic Pretreatment Techniques 8 v vi Contents 1.4 Hydrolysis of Lingocellulose 14 1.5 Lignocellulose Biomass as Substrate for PHA Production 16 1.6 Conclusion 19 References 19 2 Biological Gaseous Energy Recovery from Lignocellulosic Biomass 27 Shantonu Roy 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Simple Sugars as Feedstock 28 2.3 Complex Substrates as Feedstock 32 2.4 Biomass Feedstock 32 2.5 Waste as Feedstock 36 2.6 Industrial Wastewater 38 2.7 Conclusion 40 References 41 3 Alkali Treatment to Improve Physical, Mechanical and Chemical Properties of Lignocellulosic Natural Fibers for Use in Various Applications 47 Suvendu Manna, Prosenjit Saha, Sukanya Chudhury and Sabu Thomas 3.1 Introduction 48 Contents vii 3.3 Application of the Alkali-Steam-Treated Fibers 55 3.4 Summary 59 References 60 4 Biodiesel Production from Lignocellulosic Biomass Using Oleaginous Microbes: A Review 65 S.P. Jeevan Kumar, Lohit K. Srinivas Gujjala, Archana Dash, Bitasta Talukdar and Rintu Banerjee 4.1 Introduction 66 4.2 Lignocellulosics Distribution, Availability and Diversity 67 4.3 Prospective Oleaginous Microbes for Lipid Production 70 LCB Utilization 73 Co-Utilization of Substrate 74 4.4 Technical Know-How for Biodiesel Production from LCBs 76 4.5 Fermentation 78 4.6 Transesterification for Biodiesel Production 80 viii Contents 4.7 Characteristics of Fatty Acid Methyl Esters 83 4.8 Conclusion 83 References 84 5 Biopulping of Lignocellulose 93 Arijit Jana, Debashish Ghosh, Diptarka Dasgupta, Pradeep Kumar Das Mohapatra and Keshab Chandra Mondal 5.1 Introduction 93 5.2 Composition of Lignocellulosic Biomass 95 5.3 Pulping and its Various Processes 97 5.4 Biopulping – Process Overview 98 5.5 Advantages and Disadvantages of Biopulping 104 5.6 Future Prospects 105 Acknowledgment 105 References 106 6 Second Generation Bioethanol Production from Residual Biomass of the Rice Processing Industry 111 Luciana Luft, Juliana R. F. da Silva, Raquel C. Kuhn and Marcio A. Mazutti 6.1 Introduction 112 6.2 Residual Biomass 112 6.3 Rice and Processing 113 6.4 Pretreatment Techniques 115 121 6.5 Hydrolysis 124 6.6 Fermentation 125 6.7 Bioethanol Production 127 6.8 Concluding Remarks 127 Acknowledgments 128 References 128 7 Microbial Enzymes and Lignocellulosic Fuel Production 135 Avanthi Althuri, Anjani Devi Chintagunta, Knawang Chhunji Sherpa, Rajiv Chandra Rajak, Debajyoti Kundu, Jagriti Singh, Akanksha Rastogi and Rintu Banerjee 7.1 Introduction 136 Biofuel Production 136 7.2 Lignocellulosic Biomass as Sustainable Alternative for Fuel Production 137 7.2.1 Constituents of Lignocelluloses: Cellulose, Hemicellulose, Lignin and Other Biomolecules 138 7.3 Enzymes and Their Sources for Biofuel Generation 139 7.4 Microbial Enzymes towards Lignocellulosic Biomass Degradation 142 x Contents 7.5 Applications in Biofuel Production 159 7.6 Conclusion 162 References 163 8 Sugarcane: A Potential Agricultural Crop for Bioeconomy through Biorefinery 171 Knawang Chhunji Sherpa, Rajiv Chandra Rajak and Rintu Banerjee 8.1 Introduction 171 8.2 Present Status of Sugarcane Production and its Availability 173 8.3 Morphology of Sugarcane 174 8.4 Factors Involved in Sugarcane Production 175 8.5 Major Limitations of Sugarcane Production 185 8.6 An Overview of Biotechnological Developments for Sugarcane Improvement 186 8.7 By-Products of Sugarcane Processing 188 8.7.1 Bagasse 188 8.7.2 Molasses 189 8.7.3 Vinasse 189 8.8 Applications of Sugarcane for Biorefinery Concept 189 Contents xi 8.9 Utilization of Sugarcane Residue for Bioethanol Production 190 8.10 Conclusions 192 References 192 9 Lignocellulosic Biomass Availability Map: A GIS-Based Approach for Assessing Production Statistics of Lignocellulosics and its Application in Biorefinery 197 Sanjeev Kumar, G. Lohit Kumar Srinivas and Rintu Banerjee 9.1 Introduction 198 9.2 Geographical Information System (GIS) 199 9.3 Application of GIS in Mapping Lignocellulosic Biomass 202 9.4 Biofuels from Lignocellulosics 209 9.5 Conclusion 211 References 212 10 Lignocellulosic Biomass Utilization for the Production of Sustainable Chemicals and Polymers 215 Mukherjee Gunjan, Dhiman Gourav and Akhtar Nadeem 10.1 Introduction 216 10.2 Lignocellulosic Biomass 216 10.3 Pretreatment Strategies 219 Pulsed Electric Field 219 10.4 Value-Added Chemicals from Lignocellulosic Biomass 224 xii Contents 10.5 Sustainable Polymers from Lignocellulosic Biomass 228 (HMF)- and 2,5-Furandicarboxylic Acid (FDCA)-Based Polymers 229 Platform-Based Polymers 229 Platform-Based Polymers 231 Derived Polymers 234 10.6 Potential Challenges for a Sustainable Biorefinery 234 10.7 Environmental Effects of Biorefineries 235 10.8 Future Perspectives of Biorefineries and Their Products 236 10.9 Conclusion 236 References 237 Contents xiii 11 Utilization of Lignocellulosic Biomass for Biobutanol Production: A Review 247 Anand Prakash, Vinay Sharma, Deepak Kumar, Arindam Kuila and Arun Kumar Sharma 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Bioconversion of Lignocellulosic Biomass to Biobutanol 248 11.3 Composition of Lignocellulosic Biomass 248 11.4 Structure of Lignocellulosic Biomass 248 11.5 Biobutanol Production from Lignocellulosic Biomass 249 11.6 Conclusion 258 References 258 12 Application of Lignocellulosic Biomass in the Paper Industry 265 Mainak Mukhopadhyay and Debalina Bhattacharya 12.1 Introduction 265 12.2 Major Raw Materials Used in the Paper Industry 266 12.6 Conclusion 275 References 276

Read more less

Book SynopsisFrom mobile, cable-free re-charging of electric vehicles, smart phones and laptops to collecting solar electricity from orbiting solar farms, wireless power transfer (WPT) technologies offer consumers and society enormous benefits.Table of ContentsPreface vii Part I Introduction 1 Introduction toMobile Power Electronics 3 2 Introduction toWireless Power Transfer (WPT) 19 3 Introduction to Electric Vehicles (EVs) 43 Part II Theories for Inductive Power Transfer (IPT) 4 Coupled Coil Model 53 5 Gyrator Circuit Model 67 6 MagneticMirror Model 99 7 General Unified Dynamic Phasor 129 Part III Dynamic Charging for Road-Powered Electric Vehicles (RPEVs) 8 Introduction to Dynamic Charging 155 9 History of RPEVs 161 10 Narrow-Width Single-Phase Power Rail (I-type) 209 11 Narrow-Width Dual-Phase Power Rail (I-type) 235 12 Ultra-Slim Power Rail (S-type) 251 13 Controller Design of Dynamic Chargers 273 14 Compensation Circuit 287 15 Electromagnetic Field (EMF) Cancel 313 16 Large Tolerance Design 337 17 Power Rail Segmentation and Deployment 357 Part IV Static Charging for Pure EVs and Plug-in Hybrid EVs 18 Introduction to Static Charging 379 19 Asymmetric Coils for Large Tolerance EV Chargers 399 20 DQ Coils for Large Tolerance EV Chargers 425 21 Capacitive Power Transfer for EV Chargers Coupler 435 22 Foreign Object Detection 457 Part V Mobile Applications for Phones and Robots 23 Review of Coupled Magnetic Resonance System(CMRS) 473 24 Mid-Range IPT by Dipole Coils 491 25 Long-Range IPT by Dipole Coils 513 26 Free-Space OmnidirectionalMobile Chargers 529 27 Two-Dimensional Omnidirectional IPT for Robots 563 Part VI Special Applications ofWireless Power 28 Magnetic Field Focusing 579 29 Wireless Nuclear Instrumentation 587 30 The Future ofWireless Power 607 Index 613

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffers a comprehensive overview of the recent advances in the area of computational electromagnetics Computational Method in Electromagnetic Compatibility offers a review of the most recent advances in computational electromagnetics. The authorsnoted experts in the fieldexamine similar problems by taking different approaches related to antenna theory models and transmission line methods. They discuss various solution methods related to boundary integral equation techniques and finite difference techniques. The topics covered are related to realistic antenna systems including antennas for air traffic control or ground penetrating radar antennas; grounding systems (such as grounding systems for wind turbines); biomedical applications of electromagnetic fields (such as transcranial magnetic stimulation); and much more. The text features a number of illustrative computational examples and a reference list at the end of each chapter. The book is grounded in a rigorous theoretical approacTable of ContentsPreface xiii Part I Electromagnetic Field Coupling to ThinWire Configurations of Arbitrary Shape 1 1 Computational Electromagnetics – Introductory Aspects 3 1.1 The Character of Physical Models Representing Natural Phenomena 3 1.1.1 Scientific Method, a Definition, History, Development ... ? 3 1.1.2 Physical Model and the MathematicalMethod to Solve the Problem –The Essence of Scientific Theories 4 1.1.3 Philosophical Aspects Behind Scientific Theories 7 1.1.4 On the Character of Physical Models 8 1.2 Maxwell’s Equations 9 1.2.1 Original Form of Maxwell’s Equations 9 1.2.2 Modern Form of Maxwell’s Equations 10 1.2.3 From the Corner of Philosophy of Science 12 1.2.4 FDTD Solution of Maxwell’s Equations 13 1.2.5 Computational Examples 16 1.3 The ElectromagneticWave Equations 19 1.4 Conservation Laws in the Electromagnetic Field 20 1.5 Density of Quantity of Movement in the Electromagnetic Field 22 1.6 Electromagnetic Potentials 25 1.7 Solution of theWave Equation and Radiation Arrow of Time 25 1.8 Complex Phasor Form of Equations in Electromagnetics 27 1.8.1 The Generalized Symmetric Form of Maxwell’s Equations 27 1.8.2 Complex Phasor Form of ElectromagneticWave Equations 29 1.8.3 Poynting Theorem for Complex Phasors 29 References 31 2 Antenna Theory versus Transmission Line Approximation – General Considerations 33 2.1 A Note on EMC ComputationalModels 33 2.1.1 Classification of EMC Models 34 2.1.2 Summary Remarks on EMC Modeling 34 2.2 Generalized Telegrapher’s Equations for the Field Coupling to Finite LengthWires 35 2.2.1 Frequency Domain Analysis for StraightWires above a Lossy Ground 36 2.2.1.1 Integral Equation for PECWire of Finite Length above a Lossy Ground 37 2.2.1.2 Integral Equation for a Lossy Conductor above a Lossy Ground 39 2.2.1.3 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for PECWires 39 2.2.1.4 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for Lossy Conductors 42 2.2.1.5 Numerical Solution of Integral Equations 43 2.2.1.6 Simulation Results 46 2.2.1.7 Simulation Results and Comparison with TLTheory 46 2.2.2 Frequency Domain Analysis for StraightWires Buried in a Lossy Ground 51 2.2.2.1 Integral Equation for Lossy Conductor Buried in a Lossy Ground 51 2.2.2.2 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for Buried LossyWires 54 2.2.2.3 Computational Examples 56 2.2.3 Time Domain Analysis for StraightWires above a Lossy Ground 61 2.2.3.1 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for PECWire above a Lossy Ground 61 2.2.3.2 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for Lossy Conductors 65 2.2.3.3 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for PECWires 66 2.2.3.4 Generalized Telegrapher’s Equations for Lossy Conductors 70 2.2.4 Time Domain Analysis for StraightWires Buried in a Lossy Ground 74 2.2.4.1 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for PECWire below a Lossy Ground 74 2.2.4.2 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for Lossy Conductors 79 2.2.4.3 Generalized Telegrapher’s Equations for BuriedWires 80 2.2.4.4 Computational Results: BuriedWire Scatterer 82 2.2.4.5 Computational Results: Horizontal Grounding Electrode 84 2.3 Single HorizontalWire in the Presence of a Lossy Half-Space: Comparison of Analytical Solution, Numerical Solution, and Transmission Line Approximation 86 2.3.1 Wire above a Perfect Ground 88 2.3.2 Wire above an Imperfect Ground 89 2.3.3 Wire Buried in a Lossy Ground 89 2.3.4 Analytical Solution 90 2.3.5 Boundary Element Procedure 92 2.3.6 The Transmission Line Model 93 2.3.7 Modified Transmission Line Model 94 2.3.8 Computational Examples 95 2.3.8.1 Wire above a PEC Ground 95 2.3.8.2 Wire above a Lossy Ground 95 2.3.8.3 Wire Buried in a Lossy Ground 103 2.3.9 Field Transmitted in a Lower Lossy Half-Space 103 2.3.10 Numerical Results 110 2.4 Single VerticalWire in the Presence of a Lossy Half-Space: Comparison of Analytical Solution, Numerical Solution, and Transmission Line Approximation 114 2.4.1 Numerical Solution 117 2.4.2 Analytical Solution 119 2.4.3 Computational Examples 121 2.4.3.1 Transmitting Antenna 122 2.4.3.2 Receiving Antenna 122 2.5 Magnetic Current Loop Excitation of ThinWires 132 2.5.1 Delta Gap and Magnetic Frill 134 2.5.2 Magnetic Current Loop 135 2.5.3 Numerical Solution 136 2.5.4 Numerical Results 139 References 146 3 Electromagnetic Field Coupling to OverheadWires 153 3.1 Frequency Domain Models and Methods 154 3.1.1 Antenna Theory Approach: Set of Coupled Pocklington’s Equations 154 3.1.2 Numerical Solution 160 3.1.3 Transmission Line Approximation: Telegrapher’s Equations in the Frequency Domain 162 3.1.4 Computational Examples 162 3.2 Time Domain Models and Methods 167 3.2.1 The Antenna Theory Model 167 3.2.2 The Numerical Solution 175 3.2.3 The Transmission Line Model 181 3.2.4 The Solution of Transmission Line Equations via FDTD 182 3.2.5 Numerical Results 184 3.3 Applications to Antenna Systems 187 3.3.1 Helix Antennas 187 3.3.2 Log-Periodic Dipole Arrays 190 3.3.3 GPR Dipole Antennas 198 References 202 4 Electromagnetic Field Coupling to BuriedWires 205 4.1 Frequency Domain Modeling 205 4.1.1 Antenna Theory Approach: Set of Coupled Pocklington’s Equations for ArbitraryWire Configurations 206 4.1.2 Antenna Theory Approach: Numerical Solution 210 4.1.3 Transmission Line Approximation: 212 4.1.4 Computational Examples 213 4.2 Time Domain Modeling 216 4.2.1 Antenna Theory Approach 216 4.2.2 Transmission Line Model 219 4.2.3 Computational Examples 223 References 223 5 Lightning Electromagnetics 225 5.1 AntennaModel of Lightning Channel 225 5.1.1 Integral Equation Formulation 226 5.1.2 Computational Examples 228 5.2 Vertical AntennaModel of a Lightning Rod 230 5.2.1 Integral Equation Formulation 234 5.2.2 Computational Examples 236 5.3 AntennaModel of aWind Turbine Exposed to Lightning Strike 237 5.3.1 Integral Equation Formulation for Multiple OverheadWires 240 5.3.2 Numerical Solution of Integral Equation Set for Overhead Wires 241 5.3.3 Computational Example: Transient Response of aWT Lightning Strike 242 References 247 6 Transient Analysis of Grounding Systems 253 6.1 Frequency Domain Analysis of Horizontal Grounding Electrode 254 6.1.1 Integral Equation Formulation/Reflection Coefficient Approach 254 6.1.2 Numerical Solution 257 6.1.3 Integral Equation Formulation/Sommerfeld Integral Approach 258 6.1.4 Analytical Solution 260 6.1.5 Modified Transmission Line Method (TLM) Approach 261 6.1.6 Computational Examples 261 6.1.7 Application of Magnetic Current Loop (MCL) Source model to Horizontal Grounding Electrode 284 6.2 Frequency Domain Analysis of Vertical Grounding Electrode 288 6.2.1 Integral Equation Formulation/Reflection Coefficient Approach 288 6.2.2 Numerical Solution 290 6.2.3 Analytical Solution 291 6.2.4 Examples 292 6.3 Frequency Domain Analysis of Complex Grounding Systems 297 6.3.1 Antenna Theory Approach: Set of Homogeneous Pocklington’s Integro-Differential Equations for Grounding Systems 298 6.3.2 Antenna Theory Approach: Numerical Solution 300 6.3.3 Modified Transmission Line Method Approach 301 6.3.4 Finite Difference Solution of the Potential Differential Equation for Transient Induced Voltage 301 6.3.5 Computational Examples: Grounding Grids and Rings 304 6.3.6 Computational Examples: Grounding Systems forWTs 311 6.4 Time Domain Analysis of Horizontal Grounding Electrodes 320 6.4.1 Homogeneous Integral Equation Formulation in the Time Domain 321 6.4.2 Numerical Solution Procedure for Pocklington’s Equation 322 6.4.3 Numerical Results for Grounding Electrode 323 6.4.4 Analytical Solution of Pocklington’s Equation 323 6.4.5 Transmission Line Model 324 6.4.6 FDTD Solution of Telegrapher’s Equations 325 6.4.7 The Leakage Current 326 6.4.8 Computational Examples for the Horizontal Grounding Electrode 328 References 331 Part II Advanced Models in Bioelectromagnetics 337 7 Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields – General Aspects 339 7.1 Dosimetry 340 7.1.1 Low Frequency Exposures 341 7.1.2 High Frequency Exposures 342 7.2 Coupling Mechanisms 342 7.2.1 Coupling to LF Electric Fields 343 7.2.2 Coupling to LF Magnetic Fields 343 7.2.3 Absorption of Energy from Electromagnetic Radiation 343 7.2.4 Indirect Coupling Mechanisms 344 7.3 Biological Effects 344 7.3.1 Effects of ELF Fields 345 7.3.2 Effects of HF Radiation 345 7.4 Safety Guidelines and Exposure Limits 348 7.5 Some Remarks 351 References 351 8 Modeling of Human Exposure to Static and Low Frequency Fields 353 8.1 Exposure to Static Fields 354 8.1.1 Finite Element Solution 356 8.1.2 Boundary Element Solution 357 8.1.3 Numerical Results 360 8.2 Exposure to Low Frequency (LF) Fields 361 8.2.1 Numerical Results 362 References 363 9 Modeling of Human Exposure to High Frequency (HF) Electromagnetic Fields 365 9.1 Internal Electromagnetic Field DosimetryMethods 366 9.1.1 Solution by the Hybrid Finite Element/Boundary Element Approach 366 9.1.2 Numerical Results for the Human Eye Exposure 368 9.1.3 Solution by the Method of Moments 372 9.1.4 Computational Example for the Brain Exposure 380 9.2 Thermal Dosimetry Procedures 381 9.2.1 Finite Element Solution of Bio-Heat Transfer Equation 381 9.2.2 Numerical Results 382 References 383 10 Biomedical Applications of Electromagnetic Fields 387 10.1 Modeling of Induced Fields due to Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation (TMS) Treatment 388 10.1.1 Numerical Results 391 10.2 Modeling of Nerve Fiber Excitation 392 10.2.1 Passive Nerve Fiber 396 10.2.2 Numerical Results for Passive Nerve Fiber 397 10.2.3 Active Nerve Fiber 397 10.2.4 Numerical Results for Active Nerve Fiber 401 References 403 Index 407

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplains the importance of Elastic Optical Networks (EONs) and how they can be implemented by the world's carriers This book discusses Elastic Optical Networks (EONs) from an operational perspective. It presents algorithms that are suitable for real-time operation and includes experimental results to further demonstrate the feasibility of the approaches discussed. It covers practical issues such as provisioning, protection, and defragmentation. It also presents provisioning and recovery in single layer elastic optical networks (EON). The authors review algorithms for provisioning point-to-point, anycast, and multicast connections, as well as transfer-based connections for datacenter interconnection. They also include algorithms for recovery connections from failures in the optical layer and in-operation planning algorithms for EONs. Provisioning, Recovery and In-operation Planning in Elastic Optical Network also examines multi-layer scenarios. It covers vTable of ContentsList of Contributors xiii 1 Motivation 1 1.1 Motivation 1 1.2 Book Outline 8 1.3 Book Itineraries 11 Acknowledgment 12 Part I Introduction 13 2 Background 15 2.1 Introduction to Graph Theory 16 2.2 Introduction to Optimization 20 2.3 ILP Models and Heuristics for Routing Problems 22 2.3.1 ILP Formulations 22 2.3.2 Heuristics 25 2.3.3 Meta]Heuristics 27 2.4 Introduction to the Optical Technology 30 2.4.1 From Opaque to Transparent Optical Networks 31 2.4.2 Single]Layer and Multilayer Networks 32 2.4.3 EON Key Technologies 33 2.5 Network Life Cycle 35 2.5.1 Connection Provisioning 36 2.5.2 Connection Recovery 37 2.6 Conclusions 40 3 The Routing and Spectrum Allocation Problem 43 3.1 Introduction 44 3.2 The RSA Problem 45 3.2.1 Basic Offline Problem Statement 45 3.2.2 Notation 46 3.3 ILP Formulations Based On Slice Assignment 47 3.3.1 Starting Slice Assignment RSA (SSA]RSA) Formulation 47 3.3.2 Slice Assignment RSA (SA]RSA) Formulation 48 3.4 ILP Formulations Based On Slot Assignment 49 3.4.1 Slot Precomputation 49 3.4.2 Slot Assignment RSA (CA]RSA) Formulation 50 3.5 Evaluation of the ILP Formulations 51 3.5.1 Model Size Analysis 51 3.5.2 Performance Comparison 52 3.5.3 Evaluation in Real Scenarios 54 3.6 The RMSA Problem 56 3.6.1 Notation Extensions 56 3.6.2 Basic Offline Problem 56 3.6.3 Topology Design Problem as an RMSA Problem 57 3.7 Conclusions 60 4 Architectures for Provisioning and In]operation Planning 61 4.1 Introduction 62 4.2 Architectures for Dynamic Network Operation 64 4.2.1 Static versus Dynamic Network Operation 64 4.2.2 Migration toward In]operation Network Planning 65 4.2.3 Required Functionalities 67 4.2.4 The Front]end/Back]end PCE Architecture 68 4.3 In]operation Planning: Use Cases 73 4.3.1 VNT Reconfiguration after a Failure 73 4.3.2 Reoptimization 76 4.4 Toward Cloud]Ready Transport Networks 78 4.5 Conclusions 84 Part II Provisioning in Single Layer Networks 85 5 Dynamic Provisioning of p2p Demands 87 5.1 Introduction 88 5.2 Provisioning in Transparent Networks 90 5.2.1 Problem Statement 90 5.2.2 Dynamic RSA Algorithm 90 5.2.3 Dynamic RMSA Algorithm 91 5.2.4 Bulk RSA Algorithm 92 5.2.5 Illustrative Results 93 5.3 Provisioning in Translucent Networks 99 5.4 Dynamic Spectrum Allocation Adaption 102 5.4.1 Spectrum Allocation Policies 103 5.4.2 Problem Statement 104 5.4.3 Spectrum Adaption Algorithms 105 5.4.4 Illustrative Results 106 5.5 Conclusions 110 6 Transfer]based Datacenter Interconnection 113 6.1 Introduction 114 6.2 Application Service Orchestrator 116 6.2.1 Models for Transfer]based Connections 117 6.2.2 Illustrative Results 121 6.3 Routing and Scheduled Spectrum Allocation 124 6.3.1 Managing Transfer]based Connections 124 6.3.2 The RSSA Problem 126 6.3.3 ILP Formulation 127 6.3.4 Algorithms to Manage Transfer]based Requests 130 6.3.5 Illustrative Results 132 6.4 Conclusions 138 7 Provisioning Multicast and Anycast Demands 141 7.1 Introduction 142 7.2 Multicast Provisioning 143 7.2.1 P2MP]RSA Problem Statement 145 7.2.2 ILP Formulation 145 7.2.3 Heuristic Algorithm 148 7.2.4 Illustrative Numerical Results 150 7.2.5 Proposed Workflows and Protocol Issues 152 7.2.6 Experimental Assessment 154 7.3 Anycast Provisioning 156 7.3.1 Optical Anycast (AC_RSA) Problem Statement 157 7.3.2 Exact Algorithm for the AC_RSA Problem 157 7.3.3 Illustrative Numerical Results 158 7.3.4 Proposed Workflow 159 7.3.5 Experimental Assessment 161 7.4 Conclusions 162 Part III Recovery and In]operation Planning in Single Layer Networks 163 8 Spectrum Defragmentation 165 8.1 Introduction 166 8.2 Spectrum Reallocation and Spectrum Shifting 168 8.3 Spectrum Reallocation: The SPRESSO Problem 170 8.3.1 Problem Statement 170 8.3.2 ILP Formulation 170 8.3.3 Heuristic Algorithm 172 8.4 Spectrum Shifting: The SPRING Problem 178 8.4.1 Problem Statement 178 8.4.2 ILP Formulation 178 8.4.3 Heuristic Algorithm 179 8.5 Performance Evaluation 180 8.5.1 SPRESSO Heuristics Tuning 180 8.5.2 Heuristics versus the ILP Model 182 8.5.3 Performance of the SPRESSO Algorithm 182 8.6 Experimental Assessment 184 8.6.1 Proposed Workflow and Algorithm 184 8.6.2 PCEP Issues 186 8.6.3 Experiments 188 8.7 Conclusions 191 9 Restoration in the Optical Layer 193 9.1 Introduction 194 9.2 Bitrate Squeezing and Multipath Restoration 195 9.2.1 The BATIDO Problem 197 9.2.2 ILP Formulation 197 9.2.3 Heuristic Algorithm 200 9.2.4 Numerical Results 202 9.3 Modulation Format]Aware Restoration 207 9.3.1 The MF]Restoration Problem 210 9.3.2 Algorithm for MF]Restoration 211 9.3.3 Protocol Extensions and Proposed Workflows 213 9.3.4 Experimental Assessment 216 9.4 Recovering Anycast Connections 216 9.4.1 ILP Formulations and Algorithm 217 9.4.2 Proposed Workflow 220 9.4.3 Validation 221 9.5 Conclusions 223 10 After]Failure]Repair Optimization 225 10.1 Introduction 226 10.2 The AFRO Problem 228 10.2.1 Problem Statement 230 10.2.2 Optimization Algorithm 230 10.2.3 ILP Formulation 231 10.2.4 Heuristic Algorithm 233 10.2.5 Disruption Considerations 234 10.2.6 Performance Evaluation 236 10.3 Restoration and AFRO with Multiple Paths 240 10.3.1 Problem Statement 242 10.3.2 MILP Formulation 242 10.3.3 Heuristic Algorithm 244 10.3.4 MP]AFRO Performance Evaluation 245 10.4 Experimental Validation 246 10.4.1 Proposed Reoptimization Workflow 246 10.4.2 Experimental Assessment 249 10.5 Conclusions 252 Part IV Multilayer Networks 255 11 Virtual Network Topology Design and Reconfiguration 257 11.1 Introduction 258 11.2 VNT Design and Reconfiguration Options 259 11.3 Static VNT Design 262 11.3.1 The VNT Design Problem 262 11.3.2 MILP Formulation 262 11.4 VNT Reconfiguration Based on Traffic Measures 264 11.4.1 The VENTURE Problem 264 11.4.2 ILP Formulation 265 11.4.3 Heuristic Algorithm 267 11.4.4 Proposed Workflow 272 11.5 Results 273 11.5.1 Simulation Results 273 11.5.2 Experimental Assessment 275 11.6 Conclusions 278 12 Recovery in Multilayer Networks 279 12.1 Introduction 280 12.2 Path Restoration in GMPLS]Controlled Networks 281 12.2.1 The DYNAMO Problem 285 12.2.2 MP Formulation 285 12.2.3 Heuristic Algorithm 290 12.2.4 DYNAMO Numerical Results 290 12.2.5 PCE Architecture 297 12.2.6 Experimental Results 299 12.3 Survivable VNT for DC Synchronization 302 12.3.1 Mathematical Formulations and Algorithms 304 12.3.2 Workflows and Protocol Extensions 309 12.3.3 Experimental Assessment 310 12.4 Conclusions 312 Part V Future Trends 313 13 High Capacity Optical Networks Based on Space Division Multiplexing 315 13.1 Introduction 316 13.2 SDM Fibers 319 13.2.1 Uncoupled/Weakly Coupled Spatial Dimensions 320 13.2.2 Strongly Coupled Spatial Dimensions 320 13.2.3 Subgroups of Strongly Coupled Spatial Dimensions 321 13.3 SDM Switching Paradigms 322 13.4 Resource Allocation in SDM Networks 325 13.5 Impact of Traffic Profile on the Performance of Spatial Sp]Ch Switching in SDM Networks 332 13.5.1 Illustrative Results 333 13.6 Impact of Spatial and Spectral Granularity on the Performance of SDM Networks Based on Spatial Sp]Ch Switching 336 13.6.1 Illustrative Results 338 13.7 Conclusions 342 14 Dynamic Connectivity Services in Support of Future Mobile Networks 345 14.1 Introduction 346 14.2 C]RAN Requirements and CVN Support 348 14.2.1 C]RAN Architecture Model 349 14.2.2 Backhaul Requirements in C]RAN 349 14.2.3 CVN Reconfiguration 351 14.3 The CUVINET Problem 354 14.3.1 Problem Statement 354 14.3.2 MILP Formulation 355 14.3.3 Heuristic Algorithm 359 14.4 Illustrative Numerical Results 361 14.4.1 Network Scenario 361 14.4.2 Heuristic Algorithm Validation 362 14.4.3 Approaches to Support CVNs 362 14.4.4 Performance Evaluation 363 14.5 Conclusions 367 15 Toward Cognitive In]operation Planning 369 15.1 Introduction 370 15.2 Data Analytics for Failure Localization 371 15.2.1 Algorithm for Failure Identification/Localization 372 15.2.2 Experiments and Results 375 15.2.3 Generic Modules to Implement the OAA Loop 377 15.3 Data Analytics to Model Origin–Destination Traffic 378 15.3.1 Generic Modules for VNT Reconfiguration Based on Traffic Modeling 378 15.3.2 Machine Learning Procedure for Traffic Estimation 380 15.3.3 Use Case I: Anomaly Detection 383 15.3.4 Use Case II: VNT Reconfiguration Triggered by Anomaly Detection 390 15.4 Adding Cognition to the ABNO Architecture 393 15.5 Conclusions 395 List of Acronyms 397 References 403 Index 419

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book addresses coding, a new solution to the major challenge of communicating more bits of information in the same radio spectrum.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Electrical Communication, 2 1.2 Modulation, 4 1.3 Time and Bandwidth, 9 1.4 Coding Versus Modulation, 13 1.5 A Tour of the Book, 14 1.6 Conclusions, 15 2 Communication Theory Foundation 17 2.1 Signal Space, 18 2.2 Optimal Detection, 24 2.3 Pulse Aliasing, 35 2.4 Signal Phases and Channel Models, 37 2.5 Error Events, 43 2.6 Conclusions, 50 3 Gaussian Channel Capacity 58 3.1 Classical Channel Capacity, 59 3.2 Capacity for an Error Rate and Spectrum, 64 3.3 Linear Modulation Capacity, 68 3.4 Conclusions, 72 4 Faster than Nyquist Signaling 79 4.1 Classical FTN, 80 4.2 Reduced ISI-BCJR Algorithms, 87 4.3 Good Convolutional Codes, 101 4.4 Iterative Decoding Results, 110 4.5 Conclusions, 114 5 Multicarrier FTN 127 5.1 Classical Multicarrier FTN, 128 5.2 Distances, 134 5.3 Alternative Methods and Implementations, 138 5.4 Conclusions, 143 6 Coded Modulation Performance 145 6.1 Set-Partition Coding, 146 6.2 Continuous Phase Modulation, 153 6.3 Conclusions for Coded Modulation; Highlights, 161 7 Optimal Modulation Pulses 163 7.1 Slepian’s Problem, 164 7.2 Said’s Optimum Distance Pulses, 177 7.3 Conclusions, 185 Index 190

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe only book on the market that emphasizes machine design beyond the basic principles of AC and DC machine behavior AC electrical machine design is a key skill set for developing competitive electric motors and generators for applications in industry, aerospace, and defense.Table of ContentsPreface and Acknowledgments xiii List of Principal Symbols xv About the Author xxiii Chapter 1 Magnetic Circuits 1 1.1 Biot–Savart Law 1 1.2 The Magnetic Field B 2 1.3 Example—Computation of Flux Density B 3 1.4 The Magnetic Vector Potential A 5 1.5 Example—Calculation of Magnetic Field from the Magnetic Vector Potential 6 1.6 Concept of Magnetic Flux 7 1.7 The Electric Field E 9 1.8 Ampere’s Law 10 1.9 Magnetic Field Intensity H 12 1.10 Boundary Conditions for B and H 15 1.11 Faraday’s Law 17 1.12 Induced Electric Field Due to Motion 18 1.13 Permeance, Reluctance, and the Magnetic Circuit 19 1.14 Example—Square Toroid 23 1.15 Multiple Circuit Paths 23 1.16 General Expression for Reluctance 24 1.17 Inductance 27 1.18 Example—Internal Inductance of a Wire Segment 28 1.19 Magnetic Field Energy 29 1.20 The Problem of Units 31 1.21 Magnetic Paths Wholly in Iron 33 1.22 Magnetic Materials 35 1.23 Example—Transformer Structure 37 1.24 Magnetic Circuits with Air Gaps 40 1.25 Example—Magnetic Structure with Saturation 42 1.26 Example—Calculation for Series–Parallel Iron Paths 43 1.27 Multiple Winding Magnetic Circuits 44 1.28 Magnetic Circuits Applied to Electrical Machines 46 1.29 Effect of Excitation Coil Placement 48 1.30 Conclusion 50 Reference 50 Chapter 2 The MMF and Field Distribution of an AC Winding 51 2.1 MMF and Field Distribution of a Full-Pitch Winding for a Two Pole Machine 51 2.2 Fractional Pitch Winding for a Two-Pole Machine 54 2.3 Distributed Windings 56 2.4 Concentric Windings 62 2.5 Effect of Slot Openings 64 2.6 Fractional Slot Windings 67 2.7 Winding Skew 70 2.8 Pole Pairs and Circuits Greater than One 73 2.9 MMF Distribution for Three-Phase Windings 73 2.10 Concept of an Equivalent Two-Phase Machine 76 2.11 Conclusion 77 References 77 Chapter 3 Main Flux Path Calculations Using Magnetic Circuits 79 3.1 The Main Magnetic Circuit of an Induction Machine 79 3.2 The Effective Gap and Carter’s Coefficient 80 3.3 The Effective Length 84 3.4 Calculation of Tooth Reluctance 86 3.5 Example 1—Tooth MMF Drop 89 3.6 Calculation of Core Reluctance 94 3.7 Example 2—MMF Drop Over Main Magnetic Circuit 102 3.8 Magnetic Equivalent Circuit 111 3.9 Flux Distribution in Highly Saturated Machines 112 3.10 Calculation of Magnetizing Reactance 116 3.11 Example 3—Calculation of Magnetizing Inductance 120 3.12 Conclusion 123 References 124 Chapter 4 Use of Magnetic Circuits in Leakage Reactance Calculations 125 4.1 Components of Leakage Flux in Induction Machines 125 4.2 Specific Permeance 127 4.3 Slot Leakage Permeance Calculations 129 4.4 Slot Leakage Inductance of a Single-Layer Winding 134 4.5 Slot Leakage Permeance of Two-Layer Windings 135 4.6 Slot Leakage Inductances of a Double-Cage Winding 137 4.7 Slot Leakage Inductance of a Double-Layer Winding 139 4.8 End-Winding Leakage Inductance 144 4.8.1 Method of Images 144 4.8.2 End-Winding Leakage Inductance of Random-Wound Coils 147 4.8.3 End-Winding Leakage Inductance of a Coil with Stator Iron Treated as a Perfect Conductor 148 4.8.4 End-Winding Leakage Inductance of a Coil with Stator Iron Treated as Air 150 4.8.5 End-Winding Leakage Inductance per Phase 153 4.8.6 End-Winding Leakage of Form-Wound Coils 153 4.8.7 Squirrel-Cage End-Winding Inductance 155 4.9 Stator Harmonic or Belt Leakage 156 4.10 Zigzag Leakage Inductance 159 4.11 Example 4—Calculation of Leakage Inductances 164 4.12 Effective Resistance and Inductance Per Phase of Squirrel-Cage Rotor 171 4.13 Fundamental Component of Rotor Air Gap MMF 175 4.14 Rotor Harmonic Leakage Inductance 177 4.15 Calculation of Mutual Inductances 181 4.16 Example 5—Calculation of Rotor Leakage Inductance Per Phase 186 4.17 Skew Leakage Inductance 187 4.18 Example 6—Calculation of Skew Leakage Effects 189 4.19 Conclusion 190 References 190 Chapter 5 Calculation of Induction Machine Losses 193 5.1 Introduction 193 5.2 Eddy Current Effects in Conductors 194 5.3 Calculation of Stator Resistance 203 5.4 Example 7—Calculation of Stator and Rotor Resistance 205 5.5 Rotor Parameters of Irregularly Shaped Bars 212 5.6 Categories of Electrical Steels 216 5.7 Core Losses Due to Fundamental Flux Component 217 5.8 Stray Load and No-Load Losses 222 5.9 Calculation of Surface Iron Losses Due to Stator Slotting 228 5.10 Calculation of Tooth Pulsation Iron Losses 237 5.11 Friction and Windage Losses 244 5.12 Example 8—Calculation of Iron Loss Resistances 244 5.13 Conclusion 250 References 250 Chapter 6 Principles of Design 251 6.1 Design Factors 251 6.2 Standards for Machine Construction 252 6.3 Main Design Features 255 6.4 The D2L Output Coefficient 258 6.4.1 Essen’s Rule 259 6.4.2 Magnetic Shear Stress 261 6.4.3 The Aspect Ratio 265 6.4.4 Base Impedance 268 6.5 The D3L Output Coefficient 269 6.6 Power Loss Density 277 6.7 The D2.5L Sizing Equation 277 6.8 Choice of Magnetic Loading 278 6.8.1 Maximum Flux Density in Iron 279 6.8.2 Magnetizing Current 280 6.9 Choice of Electric Loading 281 6.9.1 Voltage Rating 281 6.9.2 Current Density Constraints 282 6.9.3 Representative Values of Current Density 285 6.10 Practical Considerations Concerning Stator Construction 287 6.10.1 Random Wound vs. Formed Coil Windings 288 6.10.2 Delta vs. Wye Connection 289 6.10.3 Lamination Insulation 290 6.10.4 Selection of Stator Slot Number 290 6.10.5 Choice of Dimensions of Active Material for NEMA Designs 291 6.10.6 Selection of Wire Size 292 6.10.7 Selection of Air Gap 293 6.11 Rotor Construction 293 6.11.1 Slot Combinations to Avoid 294 6.11.2 Rotor Heating During Starting or Under Stalled Conditions 294 6.12 The Design Process 295 6.13 Effect of Machine Performance by a Change in Dimension 299 6.14 Conclusion 302 References 302 Chapter 7 Thermal Design 305 7.1 The Thermal Problem 305 7.2 Temperature Limits and Maximum Temperature Rise 306 7.3 Heat Conduction 307 7.3.1 Simple Heat Conduction Through a Rectangular Plate 308 7.3.2 Heat Conduction Through a Cylinder 309 7.3.3 Heat Conduction with Simple Internal Heat Generation 311 7.3.4 Example 9—Stator Winding Heating 313 7.3.5 One-Dimensional Conductive Heat Flow with Distributed Internal Heat Generation 314 7.3.6 Two- and Three-Dimensional Conductive Heat Flow with Internal Distributed Heat Generation 316 7.3.7 Application of Two-Dimensional Heat Flow to Stator Teeth 317 7.3.8 Radial Heat Flow Over Solid Cylinder with Internal Heat Generation 318 7.3.9 Heat Flow Over Cylindrical Shell with Internal Distributed Heat Generation 320 7.4 Heat Convection on Plane Surfaces 325 7.5 Heat Flow Across the Air Gap 327 7.6 Heat Transfer by Radiation 328 7.7 Cooling Methods and Systems 329 7.7.1 Surface Cooling by Air 329 7.7.2 Internal Cooling 329 7.7.3 Cooling in a Circulatory System 329 7.7.4 Cooling with Liquids 330 7.7.5 Direct Gas Cooling 330 7.7.6 Gas as a Cooling Medium 331 7.7.7 Liquids as a Cooling Medium 332 7.8 Thermal Equivalent Circuit 333 7.9 Example 10—Heat Distribution of 250 HP Induction Machine 338 7.9.1 Heat Inputs 339 7.9.2 Thermal Resistances 342 7.10 Transient Heat Flow 353 7.10.1 Externally Generated Heat 353 7.10.2 Internally Generated Heat—Stalled Operation 354 7.10.3 Thermal Instability 356 7.11 Conclusion 357 References 357 Chapter 8 Permanent Magnet Machines 359 8.1 Magnet Characteristics 359 8.2 Hysteresis 362 8.3 Permanent Magnet Materials 364 8.4 Determination of Magnet Operating Point 366 8.5 Sinusoidally FED Surface PM Motor 369 8.6 Flux Density Constraints 373 8.7 Current Density Constraints 376 8.8 Choice of Aspect Ratio 377 8.9 Eddy Current Iron Losses 377 8.9.1 Eddy Current Tooth Iron Losses 378 8.9.2 Eddy Current Yoke Iron Losses 379 8.10 Equivalent Circuit Parameters 380 8.10.1 Magnetizing Inductance 381 8.10.2 Current Source 382 8.10.3 Eddy Current Iron Loss Resistance 382 8.10.4 Alternate Equivalent Circuit 383 8.11 Temperature Constraints and Cooling Capability 383 8.12 Magnet Protection 384 8.12.1 Magnet Protection for Maximum Steady-State Current 384 8.12.2 Magnet Protection for Transient Conditions 386 8.13 Design for Flux Weakening 387 8.14 PM Motor with Inset Magnets 389 8.14.1 Short-Circuit Protection 392 8.14.2 Flux Weakening 392 8.15 Cogging Torque 393 8.16 Ripple Torque 394 8.17 Design Using Ferrite Magnets 394 8.18 Permanent Machines with Buried Magnets 395 8.18.1 PM Machines with Buried Circumferential Magnets 396 8.19 Conclusion 399 Acknowledgment 400 References 400 Chapter 9 Electromagnetic Design of Synchronous Machines 401 9.1 Calculation of Useful Flux Per Pole 401 9.2 Calculation of Direct and Quadrature Axis Magnetizing Inductance 402 9.3 Determination of Field Magnetizing Inductance 411 9.4 Determination of d-Axis Mutual Inductances 418 9.5 Calculation of Rotor Pole Leakage Permeances 420 9.6 Stator Leakage Inductances of a Salient Pole Synchronous Machine 424 9.6.1 Zigzag or Tooth-Top Leakage Inductance of Salient Pole Machines 424 9.7 The Amortisseur Winding Parameters 428 9.8 Mutual and Magnetizing Inductances of the Amortisseur Winding 435 9.9 Direct Axis Equivalent Circuit 435 9.10 Referral of Rotor Parameters to the Stator 438 9.11 Quadrature Axis Circuit 441 9.12 Power and Torque Expressions 446 9.13 Magnetic Shear Stress 449 9.14 Field Current Profile 451 9.15 Conclusion 453 References 453 Chapter 10 Finite-Element Solution of Magnetic Circuits 455 10.1 Formulation of the Two-Dimensional Magnetic Field Problem 455 10.2 Significance of the Vector Potential 458 10.3 The Variational Method 459 10.4 Nonlinear Functional and Conditions for Minimization 460 10.5 Description of the Finite-Element Method 465 10.6 Magnetic Induction and Reluctivity in the Triangle Element 467 10.7 Functional Minimization 468 10.8 Formulation of the Stiffness Matrix Equation 472 10.9 Consideration of Boundary Conditions 474 10.10 Step-By-Step Procedure for Solving the Finite-Element Problem 476 10.11 Finite-Element Modeling of Permanent Magnets 482 10.12 Conclusion 485 10.A Appendix 486 References 487 Appendix A Computation of Bar Current 489 Appendix B FEM Example 493 Index 505

Read more less

Book SynopsisClassic power system dynamics text now with phasor measurement and simulation toolbox This new edition addresses the needs of dynamic modeling and simulation relevant to power system planning, design, and operation, including a systematic derivation of synchronous machine dynamic models together with speed and voltage control subsystems. Reduced-order modeling based on integral manifolds is used as a firm basis for understanding the derivations and limitations of lower-order dynamic models. Following these developments, multi-machine model interconnected through the transmission network is formulated and simulated using numerical simulation methods. Energy function methods are discussed for direct evaluation of stability. Small-signal analysis is used for determining the electromechanical modes and mode-shapes, and for power system stabilizer design. Time-synchronized high-sampling-rate phasor measurement units (PMUs) to monitor power system disturbances have beTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 Physical Structures 2 1.3 Time-Scale Structures 3 1.4 Political Structures 4 1.5 The Phenomena of Interest 5 1.6 New Chapters Added to this Edition 5 2 Electromagnetic Transients 7 2.1 The Fastest Transients 7 2.2 Transmission Line Models 7 2.3 Solution Methods 12 2.4 Problems 17 3 Synchronous Machine Modeling 19 3.1 Conventions and Notation 19 3.2 Three-Damper-Winding Model 20 3.3 Transformations and Scaling 21 3.4 The Linear Magnetic Circuit 29 3.5 The Nonlinear Magnetic Circuit 35 3.6 Single-Machine Steady State 40 3.7 Operational Impedances and Test Data 44 3.8 Problems 49 4 Synchronous Machine Control Models 53 4.1 Voltage and Speed Control Overview 53 4.2 Exciter Models 53 4.3 Voltage Regulator Models 58 4.4 Turbine Models 62 4.4.1 Hydroturbines 62 4.4.2 Steam Turbines 64 4.5 Speed Governor Models 67 4.6 Problems 70 5 Single-Machine Dynamic Models 71 5.1 Terminal Constraints 71 5.2 The Multi-Time-Scale Model 74 5.3 Elimination of Stator/Network Transients 76 5.4 The Two-Axis Model 81 5.5 The One-Axis (Flux-Decay) Model 83 5.6 The Classical Model 84 5.7 Damping Torques 86 5.8 Single-Machine Infinite-Bus System 90 5.9 Synchronous Machine Saturation 94 5.10 Problems 100 6 Multimachine Dynamic Models 101 6.1 The Synchronously Rotating Reference Frame 101 6.2 Network and R-L Load Constraints 103 6.3 Elimination of Stator/Network Transients 105 6.3.1 Generalization of Network and Load Dynamic Models 110 6.3.2 The Special Case of “Impedance Loads” 112 6.4 Multimachine Two-Axis Model 113 6.4.1 The Special Case of “Impedance Loads” 115 6.5 Multimachine Flux–Decay Model 116 6.5.1 The Special Case of “Impedance Loads” 117 6.6 Multimachine Classical Model 118 6.6.1 The Special Case of “Impedance Loads” 119 6.7 Multimachine Damping Torques 120 6.8 Multimachine Models with Saturation 121 6.8.1 The Multimachine Two-Axis Model with Synchronous Machine Saturation 123 6.8.2 The Multimachine Flux-Decay Model with Synchronous Machine Saturation 124 6.9 Frequency During Transients 126 6.10 Angle References and an Infinite Bus 127 6.11 Automatic Generation Control (AGC) 129 7 Multimachine Simulation 135 7.1 Differential-Algebraic Model 135 7.1.1 Generator Buses 136 7.1.2 Load Buses 137 7.2 Stator Algebraic Equations 138 7.2.1 Polar Form 138 7.2.2 Rectangular Form 138 7.2.3 Alternate Form of Stator Algebraic Equations 139 7.3 Network Equations 140 7.3.1 Power-Balance Form 140 7.3.2 Real Power Equations 141 7.3.3 Reactive Power Equations 141 7.3.4 Current-Balance Form 142 7.4 Industry Model 149 7.5 Simplification of the Two-Axis Model 153 7.5.1 Simplification #1 (Neglecting Transient Saliency in the Synchronous Machine) 153 7.5.2 Simplification #2 (Constant Impedance Load in the Transmission System) 154 7.6 Initial Conditions (Full Model) 158 7.6.1 Load-Flow Formulation 158 7.6.2 Standard Load Flow 159 7.6.3 Initial Conditions for Dynamic Analysis 160 7.6.4 Angle Reference, Infinite Bus, and COI Reference 165 7.7 Numerical Solution: Power-Balance Form 165 7.7.1 SI Method 165 7.7.2 Review of Newton’s Method 165 7.7.3 Numerical Solution Using SI Method 166 7.7.4 Disturbance Simulation 167 7.7.5 PE Method 168 7.8 Numerical Solution: Current-Balance Form 168 7.8.1 Some Practical Details 170 7.8.2 Prediction 171 7.9 Reduced-Order Multimachine Models 171 7.9.1 Flux-Decay Model 171 7.9.2 Generator Equations 172 7.9.3 Stator Equations 172 7.9.4 Network Equations 172 7.9.5 Initial Conditions 172 7.9.6 Structure-Preserving Classical Model 173 7.9.7 Internal-Node Model 177 7.10 Initial Conditions 179 7.11 Conclusion 180 7.12 Problems 180 8 Small-Signal Stability 183 8.1 Background 183 8.2 Basic Linearization Technique 184 8.2.1 Linearization of Model A 185 8.2.2 Differential Equations 185 8.2.3 Stator Algebraic Equations 186 8.2.4 Network Equations 186 8.2.5 Linearization of Model B 193 8.2.6 Differential Equations 194 8.2.7 Stator Algebraic Equations 194 8.2.8 Network Equations 194 8.3 Participation Factors 194 8.4 Studies on Parametric Effects 198 8.4.1 Effect of Loading 198 8.4.2 Effect of KA 200 8.4.3 Effect of Type of Load 201 8.4.4 Hopf Bifurcation 203 8.5 Electromechanical Oscillatory Modes 205 8.5.1 Eigenvalues of A and A𝜔 207 8.6 Power System Stabilizers 209 8.6.1 Basic Approach 209 8.6.2 Derivation of K1 − K6 Constants 209 8.6.3 Linearization 211 8.6.4 Synchronizing and Damping Torques 215 8.6.5 Damping of Electromechanical Modes 215 8.6.6 Torque-Angle Loop 219 8.6.7 Synchronizing Torque 221 8.6.8 Damping Torque 221 8.6.9 Power System Stabilizer Design 221 8.6.10 Frequency-Domain Approach 222 8.6.11 Design Procedure Using the Frequency-Domain Method 223 8.7 Conclusion 227 8.8 Problems 227 9 Energy Function Methods 233 9.1 Background 233 9.2 Physical and Mathematical Aspects of the Problem 233 9.3 Lyapunov’s Method 236 9.4 Modeling Issues 237 9.5 Energy Function Formulation 238 9.6 Potential Energy Boundary Surface (PEBS) 241 9.6.1 Single-Machine Infinite-Bus System 241 9.6.2 Energy Function for a Single-Machine Infinite-Bus System 244 9.6.3 Equal-Area Criterion and the Energy Function 247 9.6.4 Multimachine PEBS 249 9.6.5 Initialization of VPE(𝜃) and its Use in PEBS Method 252 9.7 The Boundary Controlling u.e.p (BCU) Method 254 9.7.1 Algorithm 256 9.8 Structure-Preserving Energy Functions 259 9.9 Conclusion 260 9.10 Problems 260 10 Synchronized PhasorMeasurement 263 10.1 Background 263 10.2 Phasor Computation 264 10.2.1 Nominal Frequency Phasors 264 10.2.2 Off-Nominal Frequency Phasors 265 10.2.3 Post Processing 269 10.2.4 Positive-Sequence Signals 271 10.2.5 Frequency Estimation 272 10.2.6 Phasor Data Accuracy 274 10.2.7 PMU Simulator 275 10.3 Phasor Data Communication 276 10.4 Power System Frequency Response 277 10.5 Power System Disturbance Propagation 280 10.5.1 Disturbance Triggering 285 10.6 Power System Disturbance Signatures 285 10.6.1 Generator or Load Trip 286 10.6.2 Oscillations 287 10.6.3 Fault and Line Switching 288 10.6.4 Shunt Capacitor or Reactor Switching 289 10.6.5 Voltage Collapse 289 10.7 Phasor State Estimation 289 10.8 Modal Analyses of Oscillations 293 10.9 Energy Function Analysis 296 10.10 Control Design Using PMU Data 299 10.11 Conclusions and Remarks 301 10.12 Problems 302 11 Power SystemToolbox 305 11.1 Background 305 11.2 Power Flow Computation 306 11.2.1 Data Requirement 306 11.2.2 Power Flow Formulation and Solution 308 11.2.3 Nonconvergent Power Flow 311 11.3 Dynamic Simulation 311 11.3.1 Dynamic Models and Per-Unit Parameter Values 312 11.3.2 Initialization 313 11.3.3 Network Solution 314 11.3.4 Integration Methods 316 11.3.5 Disturbance Specifications 317 11.4 Linear Analysis 321 11.5 Conclusions and Remarks 324 11.6 Problems 324 A IntegralManifolds for Model Reduction 327 A.1 Manifolds and Integral Manifolds 327 A.2 Integral Manifolds for Linear Systems 328 A.3 Integral Manifolds for Nonlinear Systems 336 Bibliography 341 Index 353

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith the increasing worldwide trend in population migration into urban centers, we are beginning to see the emergence of the kinds of mega-cities which were once the stuff of science fiction. It is clear to most urban planners and developers that accommodating the needs of the tens of millions of inhabitants of those megalopolises in an orderly and uninterrupted manner will require the seamless integration of and real-time monitoring and response services for public utilities and transportation systems. Part speculative look into the future of the world's urban centers, part technical blueprint, this visionary book helps lay the groundwork for the communication networks and services on which tomorrow's smart cities will run. Written by a uniquely well-qualified author team, this book provides detailed insights into the technical requirements for the wireless sensor and actuator networks required to make smart cities a reality.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xxi Preface xxvii SECTION I Communication Technologies for Smart Cities 1 1 Energy-Harvesting Cognitive Radios in Smart Cities 3Mustafa Ozger, Oktay Cetinkaya and Ozgur B. Akan 1.1 Introduction 3 1.1.1 Cognitive Radio 5 1.1.2 Cognitive Radio Sensor Networks 5 1.1.3 Energy Harvesting and Energy-Harvesting Sensor Networks 6 1.2 Motivations for Using Energy-Harvesting Cognitive Radios in Smart Cities 6 1.2.1 Motivations for Spectrum-Aware Communications 7 1.2.2 Motivations for Self-Sustaining Communications 7 1.3 Challenges Posed by Energy-Harvesting Cognitive Radios in Smart Cities 8 1.4 Energy-Harvesting Cognitive Internet of Things 9 1.4.1 Definition 9 1.4.2 Energy-Harvesting Methods in IoT 10 1.4.3 System Architecture 12 1.4.4 Integration of Energy-Harvesting Cognitive Radios with the Internet 13 1.5 A General Framework for EH-CRs in the Smart City 14 1.5.1 Operation Overview 14 1.5.2 Node Architecture 15 1.5.3 Network Architecture 16 1.5.4 Application Areas 17 1.6 Conclusion 18 References 18 2 LTE-D2D Communication for Power Distribution Grid: Resource Allocation for Time-Critical Applications 21Leonardo D. Oliveira, Taufik Abrao and Ekram Hossain 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Communication Technologies for Power Distribution Grid 22 2.2.1 An Overview of Smart Grid Architecture 22 2.2.2 Communication Technologies for SG Applications Outside Substations 24 2.2.3 Communication Networks for SG 26 2.3 Overview of Communication Protocols Used in Power Distribution Networks 27 2.3.1 Modbus 27 2.3.2 IEC 60870 29 2.3.3 DNP3 31 2.3.4 IEC 61850 32 2.3.5 SCADA Protocols for Smart Grid: Existing State-of-the-Art 35 2.4 Power Distribution System: Distributed Automation Applications and Requirements 36 2.4.1 Distributed Automation Applications 36 2.4.1.1 Voltage/Var Control (VVC) 37 2.4.1.2 Fault Detection, Isolation, and Restoration (FDCIR) 38 2.4.2 Requirements for Distributed Automation Applications 39 2.5 Analysis of Data Flow in Power Distribution Grid 40 2.5.1 Model for Power Distribution Grid 40 2.5.2 IEC 61850 Traffic Model 42 2.5.2.1 Cyclic Data Flow 42 2.5.2.2 Stochastic Data Flow 45 2.5.2.3 Burst Data Flow 46 2.6 LTE-D2D for DA: Resource Allocation for Time-Critical Applications 47 2.6.1 Overview of LTE 47 2.6.2 IEC 61850 Protocols over LTE 48 2.6.2.1 Mapping MMS over LTE 49 2.6.2.2 Mapping GOOSE over LTE 50 2.6.3 Resource Allocation in uplink LTE-D2D for DA Applications 50 2.6.3.1 Problem Formulation 51 2.6.3.2 Scheduler Design 54 2.6.3.3 Numerical Evaluation 55 2.7 Conclusion 60 References 61 3 5G and Cellular Networks in the Smart Grid 69Jimmy Jessen Nielsen, Ljupco Jorguseski, Haibin Zhang, Hervé Ganem, Ziming Zhu and Petar Popovski 3.1 Introduction 69 3.1.1 Massive MTC 70 3.1.2 Mission-Critical MTC 70 3.1.3 Secure Mission-Critical MTC 71 3.2 From Power Grid to Smart Grid 71 3.3 Smart Grid Communication Requirements 74 3.3.1 Traffic Models and Requirements 74 3.4 Unlicensed Spectrum and Non-3GPP Technologies for the Support of Smart Grid 76 3.4.1 IEEE 802.11ah 76 3.4.2 Sigfox’s Ultra-Narrow Band (UNB) Approach 79 3.4.3 LoRaTM Chirp Spread Spectrum Approach 80 3.5 Cellular and 3GPP Technologies for the Support of Smart Grid 82 3.5.1 Limits of 3GPP Technologies up to Release 11 82 3.5.2 Recent Enhancements of 3GPP Technologies for IoT Applications (Releases 12–13) 83 3.5.2.1 LTE Cat-0 and Cat-M1 devices 84 3.5.2.2 Narrow-Band Internet of Things (NB-IoT) and Cat-NB1 Devices 85 3.5.3 Performance of Cellular LTE Systems for Smart Grids 86 3.5.4 LTE Access Reservation Protocol Limitations 87 3.5.4.1 LTE Access Procedure 87 3.5.4.2 Connection Establishment 90 3.5.4.3 Numerical Evaluation of LTE Random Access Bottlenecks 91 3.5.5 What Can We Expect from 5G? 93 3.6 End-to-End Security in Smart Grid Communications 94 3.6.1 Network Access Security 95 3.6.2 Transport Level Security 96 3.6.3 Application Level Security 96 3.6.4 End-to-End Security 96 3.6.5 Access Control 97 3.7 Conclusions and Summary 99 References 100 4 Machine-to-Machine Communications in the Smart City—a Smart Grid Perspective 103Ravil Bikmetov, M. Yasin Akhtar Raja and KhurramKazi 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 Architecture and Characteristics of Smart Grids for Smart Cities 105 4.2.1 Definition of a Smart Grid and Its Conceptual Model 106 4.2.2 Standardization Approach in Smart Grids 112 4.2.3 Smart Grid Interoperability Reference Model (SGIRM) 113 4.2.4 Smart Grid Architecture Model 114 4.2.5 Energy Sources in the Smart Grid 115 4.2.6 Energy Consumers in a Smart Grid 117 4.2.7 Energy Service Providers in the Smart Grid 119 4.3 Intelligent Machine-to-Machine Communications in Smart Grids 120 4.3.1 Reference Architecture of Machine-to-Machine Interactions 120 4.3.2 Communication Media and Protocols 121 4.3.3 Layered Structure of Machine-to-Machine Communications 126 4.4 Optimization Algorithms for Energy Production, Distribution, and Consumption 132 4.5 Machine Learning Techniques in Efficient Energy Services and Management 134 4.6 Future Perspectives 135 4.7 Appendix 136 References 138 5 5G and D2D Communications at the Service of Smart Cities 147Muhammad Usman,Muhammad Rizwan Asghar and Fabrizio Granelli 5.1 Introduction 147 5.2 Literature Review 150 5.3 Smart City Scenarios 153 5.3.1 Public Health 154 5.3.2 Transportation and Environment 155 5.3.3 Energy Efficiency 157 5.3.4 Smart Grid 157 5.3.5 Water Management 158 5.3.6 Disaster Response and Emergency Services 159 5.3.7 Public Safety and Security 159 5.4 Discussion 160 5.4.1 Multiple Radio Access Technologies (Multi-RAT) 160 5.4.2 Virtualization 160 5.4.3 Distributed/Edge Computing 161 5.4.4 D2D Communication 161 5.4.5 Big Data 162 5.4.6 Security and Privacy 163 5.5 Conclusion 163 References 163 SECTION II Emerging Communication Networks for Smart Cities 171 6 Software Defined Networking and Virtualization for Smart Grid 173Hakki C. Cankaya 6.1 Introduction 173 6.2 Current Status of Power Grid and Smart Grid Modernization 174 6.2.1 Smart Grid 174 6.3 Network Softwarerization in Smart Grids 177 6.3.1 Software Defined Networking (SDN) as Next-Generation Software-Centric Approach to Telecommunications Networks 177 6.3.2 Adaptation of SDN for Smart Grid and City 179 6.3.3 Opportunities for SDN in Smart Grid 179 6.4 Virtualization for Networks and Functions 183 6.4.1 Network Virtualization 183 6.4.2 Network Function Virtualization 184 6.5 Use Cases of SDN/NFV in the Smart Grid 185 6.6 Challenges and Issues with SDN/NFV-Based Smart Grid 187 6.7 Conclusion 187 References 188 7 GHetNet: A Framework Validating Green Mobile Femtocells in Smart-Grids 191Fadi Al-Turjman 7.1 Introduction 191 7.2 RelatedWork 192 7.2.1 Static Validation Techniques 194 7.2.2 Dynamic Validation Techniques 195 7.3 System Models 197 7.3.1 Markov Model 199 7.3.2 Service-Rate Model 199 7.3.3 Communication Model 200 7.4 The Green HetNet (GHetNet) Framework 201 7.5 A Case Study: E-Mobility for Smart Grids 206 7.5.1 Performance metrics and parameters 207 7.5.2 Simulation Setups and Baselines 208 7.5.3 Results and Discussion 208 7.5.3.1 The Impact of Velocity on FBS Performance 209 7.5.3.2 The Impact of the Grid Load on Energy Consumption 211 7.6 Conclusion 213 References 213 8 Communication Architectures and Technologies for Advanced Smart Grid Services 217Francois Lemercier, Guillaume Habault, Georgios Z. Papadopoulos, Patrick Maille, NicolasMontavont and Periklis Chatzimisios 8.1 Introduction 217 8.2 The Smart Grid Communication Architecture and Infrastructure 219 8.2.1 DSO-Based Communications 220 8.2.1.1 The Existing AMI Organization 220 8.2.1.2 Communication Technologies used in the AMI 222 8.2.1.3 AMI Limitations 223 8.2.2 Internet-Based Architectures 224 8.2.2.1 IP-Based Architecture Limitations 225 8.2.3 Next-Generation Smart Grid Architecture 225 8.2.3.1 Technical Issues for Next-Generation Smart Grids 227 8.2.3.2 Handing Back the Keys to the User: Energy Management Should Be Separated from the Smart Meter 227 8.2.3.3 To Build an Open Market, Use an Open Network 228 8.2.3.4 Multi-Level Aggregation 228 8.2.3.5 Security Concerns 229 8.2.3.6 Ongoing Research Efforts 229 8.3 Routing Information in the Smart Grid 231 8.3.1 Routing Family of Protocols 231 8.3.1.1 Proactive Routing Protocol 232 8.3.1.2 Topology Management under RPL 232 8.3.1.3 Routing Table Maintenance under RPL 233 8.3.1.4 Routing Strategy: Metrics and Constraints 234 8.3.1.5 Path Computation under RPL 234 8.3.1.6 Summary of the RPL DODAG construction 235 8.3.1.7 Reactive Routing Protocol 236 8.3.1.8 Topology Management under AODV 237 8.3.2 Reactive Routing Protocol in a Constrained Network 238 8.3.2.1 Performance Evaluation 239 8.3.2.2 Summary on Routing Protocols 241 8.4 Conclusion 242 References 243 9 Wireless Sensor Networks in Smart Cities: Applications of Channel Bonding to Meet Data Communication Requirements 247Syed Hashim Raza Bukhari, Sajid Siraj andMubashir Husain Rehmani 9.1 Introduction, Basics, and Motivation 247 9.2 WSNs in Smart Cities 248 9.2.1 WSNs in Underground Transportation 249 9.2.2 WSNs in Smart Cab Services 249 9.2.3 WSNs in Waste Management Systems 249 9.2.4 WSNs in Atmosphere Health Monitoring 249 9.2.5 WSNs in Smart Grids 252 9.2.6 WSNs in Weather Forecasting 252 9.2.7 WSNs in Home Automation 252 9.2.8 WSNs in Structural Health Monitoring 252 9.3 Channel Bonding 253 9.3.1 Channel Bonding Schemes in Traditional Networks 253 9.3.2 Channel Bonding Schemes in Wireless Sensor Networks 254 9.3.3 Channel Bonding Schemes in Cognitive Radio Networks 255 9.3.4 Channel Bonding for Cognitive Radio Sensor Networks 257 9.4 Applications of Channel Bonding in CRSN-Based Smart Cities 258 9.4.1 CRSNs in Smart Health Care 258 9.4.2 CRSNs in M2M Communications 258 9.4.3 CRSNs Multiple Concurrent Deployments in Smart Cities 259 9.4.4 CRSNs in Smart Home Applications 259 9.4.5 CRSNs Smart Environment Control 259 9.4.6 CRSNs-Based IoT 259 9.5 Issues and Challenges Regarding the Implementation of Channel Bonding in Smart Cities 259 9.5.1 Privacy of Citizens 260 9.5.2 Energy Conservation 260 9.5.3 Data Storage and Aggregation 260 9.5.4 Geographic Awareness and Adaptation 260 9.5.5 Interference and Spectrum Issues 260 9.6 Conclusion 261 References 261 10 A Prediction Module for Smart City IoT Platforms 269Sema F. Oktug, Yusuf Yaslan and Halil Gulacar 10.1 Introduction 269 10.2 IoT Platforms for Smart Cities 271 10.2.1 ARM Mbed 271 10.2.2 Cumulocity 271 10.2.3 DeviceHive 273 10.2.4 Digi 273 10.2.5 Digital Service Cloud 274 10.2.6 FiWare 274 10.2.7 Global Sensor Networks (GSN) 274 10.2.8 IoTgo 274 10.2.9 Kaa 275 10.2.10 Nimbits 275 10.2.11 RealTime.io 275 10.2.12 SensorCloud 275 10.2.13 SiteWhere 276 10.2.14 TempoIQ 276 10.2.15 Thinger.io 276 10.2.16 Thingsquare 276 10.2.17 ThingWorx 277 10.2.18 VITAL 277 10.2.19 Xively 277 10.3 Prediction Module Developed 277 10.3.1 The VITAL IoT Platform 278 10.3.2 VITAL Prediction Module 278 10.4 AUse Case Employing the Traffic Sensors in Istanbul 281 10.4.1 Prediction Techniques Employed 282 10.4.1.1 Data Preprocessing 284 10.4.1.2 Feature Vectors 284 10.4.2 Results 285 10.4.2.1 Regression Results 286 10.5 Conclusion 288 Acknowledgment 288 References 289 SECTION III Renewable Energy Resources and Microgrid in Smart Cities 291 11 Integration of Renewable Energy Resources in the Smart Grid: Opportunities and Challenges 293Mohammad UpalMahfuz, Ahmed O. Nasif,MdMaruf Hossain andMd. Abdur Rahman 11.1 Introduction 293 11.2 The Smart Grid Paradigm 294 11.2.1 The Smart Grid Concept 294 11.2.2 System Components of the SG 296 11.3 Renewable Energy Integration in the Smart Grid 298 11.3.1 Resource Characteristics and Distributed Generation 298 11.3.2 Why Is Integration Necessary? 299 11.4 Opportunities and Challenges 299 11.4.1 Energy Storage (ES) 300 11.4.1.1 Key Energy Storage Technologies 300 11.4.1.2 Key Energy Storage Challenges in SG 301 11.4.2 Distributed Generation (DG) 302 11.4.2.1 Key DG Sources and Generators 303 11.4.2.2 Key Parts and Functions of a DG System and Its Distribution 303 11.4.2.3 DG and Dispatch Challenges 304 11.4.3 Resource Forecasting, Modeling, and Scheduling 305 11.4.3.1 Resource Modeling and Scheduling 305 11.4.3.2 Resource Forecasting (RF) 307 11.4.4 Demand Response 308 11.4.5 Demand-Side Management (DSM) 309 11.4.6 Monitoring 310 11.4.7 Transmission Techniques 311 11.4.8 System-Related Challenges 311 11.4.9 V2G Challenges 312 11.4.10 Security Challenges in the High Penetration of RE Resources 314 11.5 Case Studies 314 11.6 Conclusion 315 References 316 12 Environmental Monitoring for Smart Buildings 327Petros Spachos and Konstantinos Plataniotis 12.1 Introduction 327 12.2 Wireless Sensor Networks in Monitoring Applications 329 12.3 Application Requirements and Challenges 330 12.3.1 Monitoring Area 330 12.3.2 Application Scenario and Design Goal 332 12.3.3 Requirements 333 12.3.3.1 Sensor Type 333 12.3.3.2 Real-Time Data Aggregation 335 12.3.3.3 Scalability 335 12.3.3.4 Usability, Autonomy, and Reliability 336 12.3.3.5 Remote Management 336 12.3.4 Challenges 336 12.3.4.1 Power Management 336 12.3.4.2 Wireless Network Coexistence 337 12.3.4.3 Mesh Routing 337 12.3.4.4 Robustness 337 12.3.4.5 Dynamic Changes 337 12.3.4.6 Flexibility 337 12.3.4.7 Size and cost 337 12.4 Wireless Sensor Network Architecture 338 12.4.1 Framework 338 12.4.2 Hardware Infrastructure 339 12.4.3 Data Processing 341 12.4.3.1 Noise Reduction, Data Smoothing, and Calibration 341 12.4.3.2 Packet formation process 342 12.4.3.3 Information Processing and Storage 343 12.4.4 Indoor Monitoring System 343 12.5 Experiments and Results 343 12.5.1 Experimental Setup 343 12.5.2 Results Analysis 347 12.6 Conclusions 350 References 350 13 Cooperative EnergyManagement in Microgrids 355Ioannis Zenginis, John Vardakas, Prodromos-VasileiosMekikis and Christos Verikoukis 13.1 Introduction 355 13.2 The Cooperative Energy Management System Model 357 13.2.1 PV Panel Modeling 359 13.2.2 Energy Storage System 360 13.2.3 Inverter 361 13.2.4 Microgrid Energy Exchange 361 13.3 Evaluation and Discussion 362 13.4 Conclusion 366 Acknowledgment 367 References 368 14 Optimal Planning and Performance Assessment of Multi-Microgrid Systems in Future Smart Cities 371ShouxiangWang, LeiWu, Qi Liu and Shengxia Cai 14.1 Optimal Planning of Multi-Microgrid Systems 372 14.1.1 Introduction 372 14.1.2 Optimal Structure Planning 373 14.1.2.1 Definition of Indices 373 14.1.2.2 Structure Planning Method 375 14.1.3 Optimal Capacity Planning 377 14.1.3.1 Definition of Indexes 377 14.1.3.2 Capacity Planning Method 381 14.1.4 Conclusions 384 14.2 Performance Assessment of Multi-Microgrid System 384 14.2.1 Introduction 384 14.2.2 Comprehensive Evaluation Indexes 386 14.2.2.1 MMGS Source-Charge Capacity Index 386 14.2.2.2 MMGS Energy Interaction Index 388 14.2.2.3 MMGS Reliability Index 390 14.2.2.4 MMGS Economics Index 395 14.2.2.5 Energy Utilization Efficiency Index 398 14.2.2.6 Energy Saving and Emission Reduction Index 398 14.2.2.7 Renewable Energy Utilization Index 399 14.2.3 Performance Assessment 400 14.2.3.1 Performance Assessment of Grid-Connected MMGS 400 14.2.3.2 Performance Assessment of Islanded MMGS 401 14.2.3.3 Annual Performance Assessment of the MMGS 402 14.2.4 Case Studies 403 14.2.4.1 System Description 403 14.2.4.2 Numerical Results 403 14.3 Conclusions 406 Acknowledgment 407 References 407 SECTION IV Smart Cities, Intelligent Transportation Systemand Electric Vehicles 411 15 Wireless Charging for Electric Vehicles in the Smart Cities: Technology Review and Impact 413Alicia Triviño-Cabrera and José A. Aguado 15.1 Introduction 413 15.2 Review of theWireless Charging Methods 415 15.2.1 Technologies SupportingWireless Power Transfer for EVs 415 15.2.2 Operation Modes forWireless Power Transfer in EVs 416 15.3 Electrical Effect of Charging Technologies on the Grid 418 15.3.1 Harmonics Control in EVWireless Chargers 418 15.3.2 Power Factor Control in EVWireless Chargers 419 15.3.3 Implementation of Bidirectionality in EVWireless Chargers 420 15.3.4 Discussion 421 15.4 Scheduling Considering Charging Technologies 421 15.5 Conclusions and Future Guidelines 423 References 424 16 Channel Access Modelling for EV Charging/Discharging Service through Vehicular ad hoc Networks (VANETs) Communications 427Dhaou Said and Hussein T. Mouftah 16.1 Introduction 428 16.2 Technical Environment of the EV Charging/Discharging Process 428 16.2.1 EVSE Overview 429 16.2.2 Inductive Chargers: Opportunities and Potential 429 16.3 Overview of Communication Technologies in the Smart Grid 430 16.3.1 Power Line Communication 430 16.3.2 Wireless Communications for EV–Smart Grid Applications 431 16.4 Channel Access Model for EV Charging Service 432 16.4.1 Overview of VANET and LTE 432 16.4.2 Case Study: Access ChannelModel 433 16.4.3 Simulations Results 438 16.5 Conclusions 440 References 440 17 Intelligent Parking Management in Smart Citie s 443Sanket Gupte andMohamed Younis 17.1 Introduction 443 17.2 Design Issues and Taxonomy of Parking Solutions 445 17.2.1 Design Issues for Autonomous Parking Systems 445 17.2.2 Taxonomy of Parking Solutions 445 17.3 Classification of Existing Parking Systems 447 17.3.1 Sensing Infrastructure 447 17.3.2 Communication Infrastructure 457 17.3.3 Storage Infrastructure 460 17.3.4 Application Infrastructure 461 17.3.5 User Interfacing 463 17.3.6 Comparison of Existing Parking Systems 465 17.4 Participatory Sensing–Based Smart Parking 465 17.4.1 The Components 467 17.4.1.1 Users 467 17.4.1.2 IoT Devices 467 17.4.1.3 Server 468 17.4.1.4 Parking Spots 468 17.4.2 Parking Management Application 469 17.4.2.1 User Interface 469 17.4.2.2 Smart Reporting System 470 17.4.2.3 Leaderboard 470 17.4.2.4 Rewards Store 471 17.4.2.5 Enforcement and Compliance 472 17.4.2.6 External Integration 472 17.4.3 Data Processing and Cloud Support 472 17.4.3.1 Availability Computation 472 17.4.3.2 Reputation System 473 17.4.3.3 Scoring System 474 17.4.3.4 ReservationModel 474 17.4.3.5 Analysis and Learning 474 17.4.4 Implementation and Performance Evaluation 474 17.4.4.1 Prototype Application 474 17.4.4.2 Experiment Setup 475 17.4.4.3 Simulation Results 475 17.4.5 Features and Benefits 477 17.5 Conclusions and Future Advancements 479 References 480 18 Electric Vehicle Scheduling and Charging in Smart Cities 485Muhammmad Amjad, Mubashir Husain Rehmani and Tariq Umer 18.1 Introduction 485 18.1.1 Integration of EVs into Smart Cities 486 18.1.1.1 Enhancing the Existing Power Capacity 486 18.1.1.2 Designing the Communication Protocols to Support the Smart Recharging Structure 486 18.1.1.3 Development of a Well-designed Recharging Architecture 486 18.1.1.4 Considering the Expected Load on the Smart Grid 486 18.1.1.5 Need for Scheduling Approaches for EVs Recharging 486 18.1.2 Main Contributions 487 18.1.3 Organization of the Chapter 487 18.2 Smart Cities and Electric Vehicles: Motivation, Background, and ApplicationScenarios 488 18.2.1 Smart Cities: An Overview 488 18.2.1.1 Provision of Smart Transportation 488 18.2.1.2 Energy Management in Smart cities 488 18.2.1.3 Integration of the Economic and Business Model 488 18.2.1.4 Wireless Communication Needs/Communication Architectures for Smart Cities 489 18.2.1.5 Traffic Congestion Avoidance in Smart Cities 489 18.2.1.6 Support of Heterogeneous Technologies in Smart Cities 489 18.2.1.7 Green Applications Support in Smart Cities 489 18.2.1.8 Security and Privacy in Smart Cities 490 18.2.2 Motivation of Using EVs in Smart cities 490 18.2.3 Application Scenarios 490 18.2.3.1 Avoiding Spinning Reserves 490 18.2.3.2 V2G and G2V Capability 491 18.2.3.3 CO2 Minimization 491 18.2.3.4 Load Management on the Local Microgrid 491 18.3 EVs Recharging Approaches in Smart Cities 491 18.3.1 Centralized EVs Recharging Approach 491 18.3.1.1 Main Contributions and Limitations of Centralized EVs-Recharging Approach 492 18.3.2 Distributed EVs Recharging Approach 493 18.3.2.1 Main Contributions and Limitations of the Distributed EVs-recharging Approach 493 18.4 Scheduling EVs Recharging in Smart Cities 493 18.4.1 Objectives Achieved via Different Scheduling Approaches 494 18.4.1.1 Reduction of Power Losses 494 18.4.1.2 Minimizing Total Cost of Energy for Users 495 18.4.1.3 Maximizing Aggregator Profit 496 18.4.1.4 Frequency Regulation 497 18.4.1.5 Voltage regulation 497 18.4.1.6 Support for Renewable Energy Sources for Recharging of EVs 497 18.4.2 Resource Allocation for EVs Recharging in Smart Cities (Optimization Approaches) 498 18.5 Open Issues, Challenges, and Future Research Directions 498 18.5.1 Support ofWireless Power Charger 499 18.5.2 Vehicle-to-Anything 499 18.5.3 Energy Management for Smart Grid via EVs 499 18.5.4 Advance Communication Needs for Controlled EVs Recharging 499 18.5.5 EVs Control Applications 499 18.5.6 Standardization for Communication Technologies Used for EVs Recharging 500 18.6 Conclusion 500 References 500 SECTION V Security and Privacy Issues and Big Data in Smart Cities 507 19 Cyber-Security and Resiliency of Transportation and Power Systems in Smart Cities 509Seyedamirabbas Mousavian,Melike Erol-Kantarci and Hussein T. Mouftah 19.1 Introduction 509 19.2 EV Infrastructure and Smart Grid Integration 510 19.3 System Model 512 19.3.1 Model Definition and Assumptions 512 19.4 Estimating the Threat Levels in the EVSE Network 513 19.5 Response Model 514 19.6 Propagation Impacts on Power System Operations 515 19.6.1 Cyberattack Propagation in PMU Networks 515 19.6.2 Threat Level Estimation in PMU Networks 515 19.6.3 Response Model in PMU Networks 518 19.6.4 PMU Networks: Experimental Results 521 19.7 Conclusion and Open Issues 525 References 525 20 Protecting the Privacy of Electricity Consumers in the Smart City 529Binod Vaidya and Hussein T. Mouftah 20.1 Introduction 529 20.2 Privacy in the Smart Grid 530 20.2.1 Privacy Concerns over Customer Electricity Data Collected by the Utility 531 20.2.2 Privacy Concerns on Energy Usage Information Collected by a Non-Utility-OwnedMetering Device 532 20.2.3 Privacy Protection 532 20.3 Privacy Principles 532 20.4 Privacy Engineering 535 20.4.1 Privacy Protection Goals 535 20.4.2 Privacy Engineering Framework and Guidelines 538 20.5 Privacy Risk and Impact Assessment 540 20.5.1 System Privacy Risk Model 540 20.5.2 Privacy Impact Assessment (PIA) 541 20.6 Privacy Enhancing Technologies 542 20.6.1 Anonymization 544 20.6.2 Trusted Computation 545 20.6.3 Cryptographic Computation 545 20.6.4 Perturbation 546 20.6.5 Verifiable Computation 547 Acknowledgment 547 References 548 21 Privacy Preserving Power Charging Coordination Scheme in the Smart Grid 555Ahmed Sherif, Muhammad Ismail, Marbin Pazos-Revilla,Mohamed Mahmoud, Kemal Akkaya, Erchin Serpedin and Khalid Qaraqe 21.1 Introduction 555 21.1.1 Smart Grid Security Requirements 555 21.1.2 Charging Coordination Security Requirement 556 21.2 Charging Coordination and Privacy Preservation 558 21.3 Privacy-Preserving Charging Coordination Scheme 560 21.3.1 Network andThreat Models 560 21.3.2 The Proposed Scheme 561 21.3.2.1 Anonymous Data Submission 561 21.3.2.2 Charging Coordination 565 21.4 Performance Evaluation 567 21.4.1 Privacy/Security Analysis 567 21.4.2 Experimental Study 568 21.4.2.1 Setup 568 21.4.2.2 Metrics and Baselines 568 21.4.2.3 Simulation Results 569 21.5 Summary 572 Acknowledgment 573 References 573 22 Securing Smart Cities Systems and Services: A Risk-Based Analytics-Driven Approach 577Mahmoud Gad and Ibrahim Abualhaol 22.1 Introduction to Cybersecurity for Smart Cities 577 22.2 Smart Cities Enablers 579 22.3 Smart Cities Attack Surface 580 22.3.1 Attack Domains 580 22.3.1.1 Communications 580 22.3.1.2 Software 580 22.3.1.3 Hardware 580 22.3.1.4 Social Engineering 580 22.3.1.5 Supply Chain 581 22.3.1.6 Physical Security 581 22.3.2 Attack Mechanisms 582 22.4 Securing Smart Cities: A Design Science Approach 582 22.5 NIST Cybersecurity Framework 583 22.6 Cybersecurity Fusion Center with Big Data Analytics 585 22.7 Conclusion 587 22.8 Table of Abbreviations 587 References 588 23 Spatiotemporal Big Data Analysis for Smart Grids Based on Random Matrix Theory 591Robert Qiu, Lei Chu, Xing He, Zenan Ling and Haichun Liu 23.1 Introduction 591 23.1.1 Perspective on Smart Grids 591 23.1.2 The Role of Data in the Future Power Grid 594 23.1.3 A Brief Account for RMT 595 23.2 RMT: A Practical and Powerful Big Data Analysis Tool 596 23.2.1 Modeling Grid Data using Large Dimensional Random Matrices 596 23.2.2 Asymptotic Spectrum Laws 598 23.2.3 Transforms 600 23.2.4 Convergence Rate 601 23.2.5 Free Probability 603 23.3 Applications to Smart Grids 608 23.3.1 Hypothesis Tests in Smart Grids 609 23.3.2 Data-DrivenMethods for State Evaluation 609 23.3.3 Situation Awareness based on Linear Eigenvalue Statistics 612 23.3.4 Early Event Detection Using Free Probability 621 23.4 Conclusion and Future Directions 626 References 629 Index 635

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive review of the recent advances in anechoic chamberand reverberation chamber designs and measurements Anechoic and Reverberation Chambers is a guide to the latest systematic solutions for designing anechoic chambers that rely on state-of-the-art computational electromagnetic algorithms. This essential resource contains a theoretical and practical understanding forelectromagnetic compatibility and antenna testing. The solutions outlined optimise chamber performance in the structure, absorber layout and antenna positions whilst minimising the overall cost. The anechoic chamber designs are verified by measurement results from Microwave Vision Group that validate the accuracy of the solution. Anechoic and Reverberation Chambers fills this gap in the literature by providing a comprehensive reference to electromagnetic measurements, applications and over-the-air tests inside chambers. The expert contributors offer a summary of the latest developments in anechoic and reverberTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xi About the Contributors xiii Acknowledgements xv Acronyms xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Background 1 1.1.1 Anechoic Chambers 1 1.1.2 Reverberation Chambers 3 1.1.3 Relationship between Anechoic Chambers and Reverberation Chambers 6 1.2 Organisation of this Book 6 References 8 2 Theory for Anechoic Chamber Design 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Absorbing Material Basics 11 2.2.1 General Knowledge 11 2.2.2 Absorbing Material Simulation 14 2.2.3 Absorbing Material Measurement 16 2.3 CEM Algorithms Overview 22 2.4 GO Theory 23 2.4.1 GO from Maxwell Equations 23 2.4.2 Analytical Expression of a Reflected Field from a Curved Surface 24 2.4.3 Alternative GO Form 28 2.5 GO-FEM Hybrid Method 29 2.6 Summary 30 References 30 3 Computer-aided Anechoic Chamber Design 35 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Framework 35 3.3 Software Implementation 35 3.3.1 3D Model Description 35 3.3.2 Algorithm Complexities 36 3.3.3 Far-Field Data 39 3.3.4 Boundary Conditions 40 3.3.5 RAM Description 41 3.3.6 Forward Algorithm 42 3.3.7 Inverse Algorithm 54 3.3.8 Post Processing 55 3.4 Summary 56 References 57 4 Anechoic Chamber Design Examples and Verifications 59 4.1 Introduction 59 4.2 Normalised Site Attenuation 59 4.2.1 NSA Definition 59 4.2.2 NSA Simulation and Measurement 60 4.3 Site Voltage Standing Wave Ratio 68 4.3.1 SVSWR Definition 68 4.3.2 SVSWR Simulation and Measurement 72 4.4 Field Uniformity 75 4.4.1 FU Definition 75 4.4.2 FU Simulation and Measurement 76 4.5 Design Margin 79 4.6 Summary 86 References 87 5 Fundamentals of the Reverberation Chamber 89 5.1 Introduction 89 5.2 Resonant Cavity Model 89 5.3 Ray Model 95 5.4 Statistical Electromagnetics 96 5.4.1 Plane-Wave Spectrum Model 96 5.4.2 Field Correlations 99 5.4.3 Boundary Fields 102 5.4.4 Enhanced Backscattering Effect 108 5.4.5 Loss Mechanism 109 5.4.6 Probability Distribution Functions 112 5.5 Figures of Merit 117 5.5.1 Field Uniformity 117 5.5.2 Lowest Usable Frequency 121 5.5.3 Correlation Coefficient and Independent Sample Number 121 5.5.4 Field Anisotropy Coefficients and Inhomogeneity Coefficients 124 5.5.5 Stirring Ratio 126 5.5.6 K-Factor 126 5.6 Summary 128 References 128 6 The Design of a Reverberation Chamber 133 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 Design Guidelines 133 6.2.1 The Shape of the RC 133 6.2.2 The Lowest Usable Frequency 134 6.2.3 The Working Volume 135 6.2.4 The Q Factor 135 6.2.5 The Stirrer Design 137 6.3 Simulation of the RC 140 6.3.1 Monte Carlo Method 140 6.3.2 Time Domain Simulation 142 6.3.3 Frequency Domain Simulation 142 6.4 Time Domain Characterisation of the RC 145 6.4.1 Statistical Behaviour in the Time Domain 146 6.4.2 Stirrer Efficiency Based on Total Scattering Cross Section 151 6.4.3 Time-Gating Technique 163 6.5 Duality Principle in the RC 166 6.6 The Limit of ACS and TSCS 169 6.7 Design Example 172 6.8 Summary 174 References 174 7 Applications in the Reverberation Chamber 185 7.1 Introduction 185 7.2 Q Factor and Decay Constant 185 7.3 Radiated Immunity Test 192 7.4 Radiated Emission Measurement 193 7.5 Free-Space Antenna S-Parameter Measurement 196 7.6 Antenna Radiation Efficiency Measurement 199 7.6.1 Reference Antenna Method 199 7.6.2 Non-reference Antenna Method 200 7.7 MIMO Antenna and Channel Emulation 212 7.7.1 Diversity Gain Measurement 212 7.7.2 Total Isotropic Sensitivity Measurement 219 7.7.3 Channel Capacity Measurement 220 7.7.4 Doppler Effect 220 7.8 Antenna Radiation Pattern Measurement 223 7.8.1 Theory 223 7.8.2 Simulations and Measurements 228 7.8.3 Discussion and Error Analysis 238 7.9 Material Measurements 243 7.9.1 Absorption Cross Section 243 7.9.2 Average Absorption Coefficient 250 7.9.3 Permittivity 257 7.9.4 Material Shielding Effectiveness 263 7.10 Cavity Shielding Effectiveness Measurement 264 7.11 Volume Measurement 270 7.12 Summary 276 References 276 8 Measurement Uncertainty in the Reverberation Chamber 283Xiaoming Chen, Yuxin Ren, and Zhihua Zhang 8.1 Introduction 283 8.2 Procedure for Uncertainty Characterisation 283 8.3 Uncertainty Model 283 8.3.1 ACF Method 284 8.3.2 DoF Method 285 8.3.3 Comparison of ACF and DoF Methods 286 8.3.4 Semi-empirical Model 289 8.4 Measurement Uncertainty of Antenna Efficiency 293 8.5 Summary 300 References 301 9 Inter-Comparison Between Antenna Radiation Efficiency Measurements Performed in an Anechoic Chamber and in a Reverberation Chamber 305Tian-Hong Loh and Wanquan Qi 9.1 Introduction 305 9.2 Measurement Facilities and Setups 306 9.2.1 Anechoic Chamber 306 9.2.2 Reverberation Chamber 307 9.3 Antenna Efficiency Measurements 308 9.3.1 Theory 308 9.3.1.1 Radiation Efficiency Using the Anechoic Chamber 308 9.3.1.2 Radiation Efficiency Using the Reverberation Chamber 309 9.3.2 Comparison Between the AC and the RC 309 9.3.2.1 Biconical Antenna 309 9.3.2.2 Horn Antenna 312 9.3.2.3 MIMO Antenna 312 9.4 Summary 318 Acknowledgement 319 References 319 10 Discussion on Future Applications 323 10.1 Introduction 323 10.2 Anechoic Chambers 323 10.3 Reverberation Chambers 323 References 325 Appendix A Code Snippets 327 Appendix B Reference NSA Values 339 Appendix C Test Report Template 345 Appendix D Typical Bandpass Filters 351 Appendix E Compact Reverberation Chamber at NUAA 359 Appendix F Relevant Statistics 373 Index 379

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides the reader with a solid understanding of the fundamental modeling of photovoltaic devices. After the material independent limit of photovoltaic conversion, the readers are introduced to the most well-known theory of classical silicon modeling. Based on this, for each of the most important PV materials, their performance under different conditions is modeled. This book also covers different modeling approaches, from very fundamental theoretic investigations to applied numeric simulations based on experimental values. The book concludes wth a chapter on the influence of spectral variations. The information is supported by providing the names of simulation software and basic literature to the field. The information in the book gives the user specific application with a solid background in hand, to judge which materials could be appropriate as well as realistic expectations of the performance the devices could achieve.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1Monika Freunek Müller 2 Fundamental Limits of Solar Energy Conversion 7Thorsten Trupke and Peter Würfel 2.1 Introduction 8 2.2 The Carnot Efficiency – A Realistic Limit for PV Conversion? 8 2.3 Solar Cell Absorbers – Converting Heat into Chemical Energy 10 2.4 No Junction Required – The IV Curve of a Uniform Absorber 12 2.5 Limiting Efficiency Calculations 15 2.6 Real Solar Cell Structures 19 2.7 Beyond the Shockley Queisser Limit 20 2.8 Summary and Conclusions 22 Acknowledgement 23 References 24 3 Optical Modeling of Photovoltaic Modules with Ray Tracing Simulations 27Carsten Schinke, Malte R.Vogt and Karsten Bothe 3.1 Introduction 28 3.1.1 Terminology 30 3.2 Basics of Optical Ray Tracing Simulations 32 3.2.1 Ray Optics 32 3.2.1.1 Basic Assumptions 33 3.2.1.2 Absorption of Light 33 3.2.1.3 Refraction of Light at Interfaces 34 3.2.1.4 Modeling of Thin Films 35 3.2.2 Ray Tracing 37 3.2.3 Monte-Carlo Particle Tracing 38 3.2.4 Statistical Uncertainty of Monte-Carlo Results 40 3.2.5 Generating Random Numbers with Non-Uniform Distributions 42 3.3 Modeling Illumination 46 3.3.1 Basic Light Sources 46 3.3.2 Modeling Realistic Illumination Conditions 48 3.3.2.1 Preprocessing of Irradiance Data 49 3.3.2.2 Implementation for Ray Tracing 50 3.3.2.3 Application Example 52 3.4 Specific Issues for Ray Tracing of Photovoltaic Modules 53 3.4.1 Geometries and Symmetries in PV Devices 55 3.4.2 Multi-Domain Approach 57 3.4.2.1 Module domain 59 3.4.2.2 Front Finger Domain 60 3.4.2.3 Front Texture Domain 60 3.4.2.4 Rear Side Domains 61 3.4.3 Post processing of Simulation Results 61 3.4.4 Ray Tracing Application Examples 64 3.4.4.1 Validation of Simulation Results 64 3.4.4.2 Optical Loss Analysis: From Cell to Module 66 3.4.4.3 Bifacial Solar Cells and Modules 68 3.5 From Optics to Power Output 69 3.5.1 Calculation Chain: From Ray Tracing to Module Power Output 70 3.5.1.1 Inclusion of the Irradiation Spectrum 73 3.5.1.2 Calculation of Module Output Power 75 3.5.1.3 Outlook: Energy Yield Calculation 75 3.5.2 Application Examples 76 3.5.2.1 Calculation of Short Circuit Current and Power Output 77 3.5.2.2 Current Loss Analysis: Standard Testing Conditions vs. Field Conditions 79 3.6 Overview of Optical Simulation Tools for PV Devices 80 3.6.1 Analysis of Solar Cells 82 3.6.2 Analysis of PV Modules and Their Surrounding 82 3.6.3 Further Tools Which are not Publicly Available 85 Acknowledgments 85 References 86 4 Optical Modelling and Simulations of Thin-Film Silicon Solar Cells 93Janez Krc, Martin Sever, Benjamin Lipovsek, Andrej Campa and Marko Topic 4.1 Introduction 94 4.2 Approaches of Optical Modelling 95 4.2.1 One-Dimensional Optical Modelling 96 4.2.2 Two- and Three-Dimensional Rigorous Optical Modelling 97 4.2.3 Challenges in Optical Modelling 97 4.3 Selected Methods and Approaches 98 4.3.1 Finite Element Method 98 4.3.2 Coupled Modelling Approach 100 4.4 Examples of Optical Modelling and Simulations 102 4.4.1 Texture Optimization Applying Spatial Fourier Analysis 103 4.4.2 Model of Non-Conformal Layer Growth 110 4.4.3 Optical Simulations of Tandem Thin-Film Silicon Solar Cell 118 4.5 The Role of Illumination Spectrum 129 4.6 Conclusion 133 Acknowledgement 134 References 135 5 Modelling of Organic Photovoltaics 141Ian R. Thompson 5.1 Introduction to Organic Photovoltaics 141 5.2 Performance of Organic Photovoltaics 143 5.3 Charge Transport in Organic Semiconductors 145 5.4 Energetic Disorder in Organic Semiconductors 150 5.5 Morphology of Organic Materials 153 5.6 Considerations for Photovoltaics 155 5.6.1 Excitons in Organic Semiconductors 155 5.6.2 Optical Absorption in Organic Photovoltaics 160 5.6.3 Carrier Harvesting in Organic Photovoltaics 161 5.7 Simulation Methods of Organic Photovoltaics 163 5.7.1 Lattice Morphologies and Device Geometry 163 5.7.2 Gaussian Disorder Model 164 5.7.3 Kinetic Monte Carlo Methods 164 5.7.4 Electrostatic Interactions 168 5.7.5 Neighbour Lists 169 5.8 Considerations When Modelling Organic Photovoltaics 169 5.8.1 The Next Steps for OPV Modelling 171 Acknowledgements 172 References 172 6 Modeling the Device Physics of Chalcogenide Thin Film Solar Cells 177Nima E. Gorji and Lindsay Kuhn 6.1 Introduction 177 6.2 Kosyachenko’s Approach: Carrier Transport 178 6.3 Demtsu-Sites Approach: Double-Diode Model 181 6.4 Kosyachenko’s Approach: Optical Loss Modeling 184 6.5 Karpov’s Approach 186 6.6 Conclusion 187 Acknowledgements 188 References 188 7 Temperature and Irradiance Dependent Efficiency Model for GaInP-GaInAs-Ge Multijunction Solar Cells 191Monika Freunek Mueller, Bruno Michel and Harold J. Hovel 7.1 Motivation 191 7.2 Efficiency Model 196 7.3 Results and Discussion 209 7.4 Conclusions 211 7.5 Acknowledgments 211 References 212 Appendix: Shockley-Queisser-Modell Calculations 213 8 Variation of Output with Environmental Factors 217Youichi Hirata, Yuzuru Ueda, Shinichiro Oke and Naotoshi Sekiguchi 8.1 Conversion Efficiency and Standard Test Conditions (STC) 218 8.2 Variation of I-V curve with Each Environmental Factor 218 8.2.1 Irradiance 219 8.2.2 Cell Temperature 221 8.2.3 Spectral Response 222 8.3 Example of Measurement of Spectral Distribution of Solar Radiation 222 8.3.1 Example of Changes with Weather 223 8.3.2 Spectral Variation with Season 225 8.3.3 Effect of Variation in Spectral Solar Radiation 226 8.4 Irradiance 227 8.5 Effects on Performance of PV Modules/Cells 229 8.5.1 System Configurations and Measurements 229 8.5.2 Evaluation Methods 231 8.5.2.1 Performance Ratio 231 8.5.2.2 Effective Array Peak Power of PV Systems 233 8.5.3 Measurement Results 233 8.5.3.1 Performance Ratios 233 8.5.3.2 Degradation Rates 234 8.6 Cell Temperature 236 8.6.1 Output Energy by Temperature Coefficient 236 8.6.2 Output Energy with Different Installation Method 237 8.7 Results for Concentrated Photovoltaics 239 8.7.1 Introduction 239 8.7.2 Field Test of a CPV Module 239 8.7.3 Decline of Efficiency of the Early-Type CPV Module 239 8.7.4 Influences of the Degradation 241 Acknowledgments 243 References 244 9 Modeling of Indoor Photovoltaic Devices 245Monika Freunek Müller 9.1 Introduction 245 9.1.1 Brief History of IPV 246 9.1.2 Characteristics of IPV Modeling 247 9.2 Indoor Radiation 248 9.2.1 Modeling Indoor Spectral Irradiance 250 9.3 Maximum Efficiencies 252 9.3.1 Intensity effects 255 9.4 Demonstrated Efficiencies and Further Optimization 257 9.5 Characterization and Measured Efficiencies 261 9.5.1 Irradiance Measurements 261 9.6 Outlook 262 9.7 Acknowledgement 264 References 264 10 Modelling Hysteresis in Perovskite Solar Cells 267James M. Cave and Alison B. Walker 10.1 Introduction to Perovskite Solar Cells 267 Acknowledgements 277 References 277 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisENCYCLOPEDIA OF RENEWABLE ENERGY Written by a highly respected engineer and prolific author in the energy sector, this is the single most comprehensive, thorough, and up-to-date reference work on renewable energy. The world's energy industry is and has always been volatile, sometimes controversial, with wild swings upward and downward. This has, historically, been mostly because most of our energy has come from fossil fuels, which is a finite source of energy. Every so often, a technology comes along, like hydrofracturing, that is a game-changer. But is it, really? Aren't we just delaying the inevitable with these temporary price fixes The only REAL game-changer is renewable energy. For decades, renewable energy sources have been sought, developed, and studied. Sometimes wind is at the forefront, sometimes solar, and, for the last decade or so, there has been a surge in interest for biofeedstocks and biofuels. There are also the old standbys of nuclear and geothermal energy, which hTable of ContentsIntroduction xxxvii A 1 B 99 C 227 D 329 E 365 F 423 G 481 H 585 I 651 J 681 K 683 L 689 M 741 N 781 O 807 P 835 Q 921 R 923 S 969 T 1057 U 1095 V 1105 W 1111 X 1199 Y 1203 Z 1207 Conversion Factors 1211 Further Reading 1213 About the Author 1215

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive and accessible introduction to the development of embedded systems and Internet of Things devices using ARM mbed Designing Embedded Systems and the Internet of Things (IoT) with the ARM mbed offers an accessible guide to the development of ARM mbed and includes a range of topics on the subject from the basic to the advanced. ARM mbed is a platform and operating system based on 32-bit ARM Cortex-M microcontrollers. This important resource puts the focus on ARM mbed NXP LPC1768 and FRDM-K64F evaluation boards. NXP LPC1768 has powerful features such as a fast microcontroller, various digital and analog I/Os, various serial communication interfaces and a very easy to use Web based compiler. It is one of the most popular kits that are used to study and create projects. FRDM-K64F is relatively new and largely compatible with NXP LPC1768 but with even more powerful features. This approachable text is an ideal guide that is divided into four sectiTable of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv Author’s Acknowledgments xix About the Companion Website xxi Part I Introduction to Arm® Mbed™ and IoT 1 1 Introduction to Arm® Mbed™ 3 1.1 What is an Embedded System? 3 1.2 Microcontrollers and Microprocessors 4 1.3 ARM® Processor Architecture 8 1.4 The Arm® Mbed™ Systems 10 1.4.1 NXP LPC1768 11 1.4.2 NXP LPC11U24 14 1.4.3 BBC Micro:bit 15 1.4.4 The Arm® Mbed™ Ethernet Internet of Things (IoT) Starter Kit 17 1.5 Summary 21 1.6 Chapter Review Questions 21 2 Introduction to the Internet of Things (IoT) 23 2.1 What is the Internet of Things (IoT)? 23 2.2 How Does IoT Work? 24 2.3 How Will IoT Change Our Lives? 25 2.4 Potential IoT Applications 27 2.4.1 Home 27 2.4.2 Healthcare 28 2.4.3 Transport 28 2.4.4 Energy 28 2.4.5 Manufacture 28 2.4.6 Environment 28 2.5 Summary 29 2.6 Chapter Review Questions 29 3 IoT Enabling Technologies 31 3.1 Sensors and Actuators 31 3.2 Communications 31 3.2.1 RFID and NFC (Near‐Field Communication) 32 3.2.2 Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) 32 3.2.3 LiFi 33 3.2.4 6LowPAN 33 3.2.5 ZigBee 34 3.2.6 Z‐Wave 34 3.2.7 LoRa 34 3.3 Protocols 35 3.3.1 HTTP 35 3.3.2 WebSocket 36 3.3.3 MQTT 37 3.3.4 CoAP 38 3.3.5 XMPP 38 3.4 Node‐RED 39 3.5 Platforms 41 3.5.1 IBM Watson IoT—Bluemix (http://www.ibm.com/internet‐of‐things/) 41 3.5.2 Eclipse IoT (https://iot.eclipse.org/) 42 3.5.3 AWS IoT (https://aws.amazon.com/iot/) 42 3.5.4 Microsoft Azure IoT Suite (https://azure.microsoft.com/en‐us/suites/iot‐suite/) 42 3.5.5 Google Cloud IoT (https://cloud.google.com/solutions/iot/) 44 3.5.6 ThingWorx (https://www.thingworx.com/) 44 3.5.7 GE Predix (https://www.predix.com/) 44 3.5.8 Xively (https://www.xively.com/) 44 3.5.9 macchina.io (https://macchina.io/) 45 3.5.10 Carriots (https://www.carriots.com/) 45 3.6 Summary 45 3.7 Chapter Review Questions 45 Part II Arm® Mbed™ Development 47 4 Getting Started with Arm® Mbed™ 49 4.1 Introduction 49 4.2 Hardware and Software Required 49 4.2.1 Hardware 49 4.2.2 Software 50 4.3 Your First Program: Blinky LED 53 4.3.1 Connect the Mbed to a PC 53 4.3.2 Click “mbed.htm” to Log In 53 4.3.3 Add the FRDM‐K64F Platform to Your Compiler 54 4.3.4 Import an Existing Program 54 4.3.5 Compile, Download, and Run Your Program 57 4.3.6 What Next? 57 4.4 Create Your Own Program 57 4.5 C/C++ Programming Language 58 4.6 Functions and Modular Programming 58 4.7 Manage Platforms 61 4.8 Clone Your Program 63 4.9 Search and Replace 64 4.10 Compile Your Program for Multiple Platforms 65 4.11 Delete Your Program 65 4.12 Disaster Recovery Procedure 67 4.13 Upgrade Firmware 67 4.14 Help 67 4.15 Summary 69 5 Inputs and Outputs 71 5.1 Digital Inputs and Outputs 71 5.1.1 Digital Inputs 71 5.1.2 Digital Outputs 74 5.1.3 BusIn, BusOut, and BusInOut 79 5.2 Analog Inputs and Outputs 81 5.2.1 Analog Inputs 81 5.2.2 Analog Outputs 82 5.3 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) 86 5.4 Accelerometer and Magnetometer 88 5.5 SD Card 96 5.6 Local File System (LPC1768) 99 5.7 Interrupts 100 5.8 Summary 101 6 Digital Interfaces 103 6.1 Serial 103 6.2 SPI 106 6.3 I2C 108 6.4 CAN 111 6.5 Summary 113 7 Networking and Communications 115 7.1 Ethernet 115 7.2 Ethernet Web Client and Web Server 119 7.3 TCP Socket and UDP Socket 124 7.4 WebSocket 128 7.5 WiFi 131 7.6 Summary 135 8 Digital Signal Processing and Control 137 8.1 Low‐Pass Filter 137 8.2 High‐Pass Filter 141 8.3 Band‐Pass Filter 143 8.4 Band‐Stop Filter and Notch Filter 146 8.5 Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 149 8.6 PID Controller 160 8.7 Summary 164 9 Debugging, Timer, Multithreading, and Real‐Time Programming 165 9.1 Debugging 165 9.2 Timer, Timeout, Ticker, and Time 167 9.3 Network Time Protocol (NTP) 171 9.4 Multithreading and Real‐Time Programming 173 9.5 Summary 179 10 Libraries and Programs 181 10.1 Import Libraries and Programs 181 10.2 Export Your Program 181 10.3 Write Your Own Library 182 10.4 Publish Your Library 188 10.5 Publish Your Program 190 10.6 Version Control 192 10.7 Collaborations 196 10.8 Update Your Library and Program 201 10.9 Summary 202 Part III The IoT Starter Kit and IoT Projects 203 11 Arm® Mbed™ Ethernet IoT Starter Kit 205 11.1 128×32 LCD 205 11.2 Joystick 207 11.3 Two Potentiometers 208 11.4 Speaker 209 11.5 Three‐Axis Accelerometer 211 11.6 LM75B Temperature Sensor 211 11.7 RGB LED 212 11.8 Summary 214 12 IoT Projects with Arm® Mbed™ 215 12.1 Temperature Monitoring over the Internet 215 12.2 Smart Lighting 224 12.3 Voice‐Controlled Door Access 230 12.4 RFID Reader 237 12.5 Cloud Example with IBM Watson Bluemix 242 12.5.1 IBM Quickstart Service 243 12.5.2 IBM Registered Service (Bluemix) 245 12.5.3 Add IBM Watson IoT Service to Your Application 252 12.5.4 Add Your Mbed Device to Your Watson IoT Organization 252 12.5.5 Adding Credentials onto Your Mbed Device 257 12.5.6 Link Your IBM IoT Watson Application to Your Mbed Device 257 12.5.7 Sending Commands from Your IBM IoT Watson Application to Your Mbed Board 261 12.5.8 More with Node-RED 261 12.6 Real-Time Signal Processing 271 12.7 Summary 277 Part IV Appendices 279 Appendix A: Example Codes 281 Appendix B: HiveMQ MQTT Broker 285 Appendix C: Node‐RED on Raspberry Pi 295 Appendix D: String and Array Operations 303 Appendix E: Useful Online Resources 311 Index 313

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn invaluable academic reference for the area of high-power converters, covering all the latest developments in the field High-power multilevel converters are well known in industry and academia as one of the preferred choices for efficient power conversion. Over the past decade, several power converters have been developed and commercialized in the form of standard and customized products that power a wide range of industrial applications. Currently, the modular multilevel converter is a fast-growing technology and has received wide acceptance from both industry and academia. Providing adequate technical background for graduate- and undergraduate-level teaching, this book includes a comprehensive analysis of the conventional and advanced modular multilevel converters employed in motor drives, HVDC systems, and power quality improvement. Modular Multilevel Converters: Analysis, Control, and Applications provides an overview of high-power converters, referTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Preface xvii Acknowledgments xxi Acronyms xxiii Symbols xxvii About the Companion Website xli Part I General Aspects of Conventional mmc 1 Review of High-Power Converters 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Overview of High-Power Converters 4 1.3 Voltage Source Converters 6 1.3.1 Neutral-Point Clamped Converter 8 1.3.2 Active Neutral-Point Clamped Converter 10 1.3.3 Flying Capacitor Converter 11 1.3.4 Nested Neutral-Point Clamped Converter 12 1.3.5 Cascaded H-bridge Converter 13 1.3.6 Cascaded Neutral-Point Clamped Converter 15 1.4 Current Source Converters 16 1.4.1 Load-Commutated Current Source Converter 16 1.4.2 PWM Current Source Converter 18 1.5 Matrix Converters 19 1.5.1 Direct Matrix Converter 19 1.5.2 Indirect Matrix Converter 20 1.5.3 Multi-Modular Matrix Converter 21 1.6 Modular Multilevel Converters 23 1.6.1 Converter Technology 24 1.6.2 Applications 24 1.6.3 Technical Challenges 31 1.7 Summary 33 References 34 2 Fundamentals of Modular Multilevel Converter 37 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Modular Multilevel Converter 38 2.2.1 Converter Con guration 39 2.2.2 Con guration of Submodules 39 2.2.3 Comparison of Submodules 46 2.2.4 Principle of Operation 48 2.3 Pulse Width Modulation Schemes 49 2.3.1 Phase-Shifted Carrier Modulation 51 2.3.2 Level-Shifted Carrier Modulation 59 2.3.3 Sampled Average Modulation 60 2.3.4 Space Vector Modulation 65 2.3.5 Staircase Modulation 73 2.4 Summary 77 References 77 3 Classical Control of Modular Multilevel Converter 79 3.1 Introduction 79 3.2 Overview of Classical Control Method 80 3.3 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Control 82 3.3.1 Leg Voltage Control 82 3.3.2 Voltage Balance Strategy 83 3.4 Output Current Control 88 3.4.1 Reference Frame Theory 88 3.4.2 Control of MMC with Passive Load 92 3.5 Circulating Current Control 95 3.5.1 Mathematical Model 96 3.5.2 Control in Synchronous-dq Reference Frame 97 3.5.3 Control in Stationary-abc Reference Frame 100 3.6 Summary 101 References 101 4 Model Predictive Control of Modular Multilevel Converter 103 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 Mathematical Model of mmc 105 4.2.1 Continuous-Time Model 105 4.2.2 Discretization Methods 108 4.2.3 Discrete-Time Model 110 4.3 Extrapolation Techniques 113 4.3.1 Vector Angle Extrapolation 113 4.3.2 Lagrange Extrapolation 113 4.4 Cost Function and Weight factors 114 4.4.1 Formulation of Cost Function 114 4.4.2 Selection of Weight Factors 116 4.5 Direct Model Predictive Control 117 4.5.1 Design Procedure 117 4.5.2 Control Algorithm 120 4.6 Indirect Model Predictive Control 124 4.6.1 Design Procedure 125 4.6.2 Control Algorithm 127 4.7 Summary 128 References 128 Part II Advanced Modular Multilevel Converters 5 Passive Cross-Connected Modular Multilevel Converters 133 5.1 Introduction 133 5.2 Passive Cross-Connected mmc 134 5.2.1 Con guration of Power Circuit 134 5.2.2 Switching States and Output Voltage 135 5.3 Principle of Operation 138 5.3.1 Modeling of PC-MMC 138 5.3.2 Phase-Shifted Carrier Modulation for PC-MMC 140 5.4 Low/Zero Frequency Operation of PC-MMC 144 5.4.1 Equivalent Circuit 145 5.4.2 Design of Cross-Connected Capacitor 146 5.4.3 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Ripple 148 5.4.4 Common-Mode Voltage 151 5.5 Classical Control of PC-MMC 153 5.5.1 Output Current Control 154 5.5.2 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Control 156 5.5.3 Synthesis of Modulation Signals 159 5.6 Summary 162 References 162 6 Active Cross-Connected Modular Multilevel Converters 165 6.1 Introduction 165 6.2 Active Cross-Connected mmc 166 6.2.1 Circuit Con guration of AC-MMC 166 6.2.2 Switching States and Output Voltage 166 6.3 Principles of Operation 169 6.3.1 Modeling of AC-MMC 170 6.3.2 Phase-Shifted Carrier Modulation for AC-MMC 171 6.4 Low-Frequency Operation of AC-MMC 176 6.4.1 Equivalent Circuit 176 6.4.2 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Ripple 178 6.4.3 Common-Mode Voltage 181 6.4.4 Current Stress on Semiconductor Devices 184 6.5 Classical Control of AC-MMC 185 6.5.1 Output Current Control 186 6.5.2 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Control 186 6.5.3 Synthesis of Modulation Signals 189 6.6 Summary 192 References 192 7 Star and Delta-Channel Modular Multilevel Converters 195 7.1 Introduction 195 7.2 Star-Channel Modular Multilevel Converter 196 7.2.1 Circuit Con guration of Star-Channel mmc 196 7.2.2 Switching States and Output Voltage 197 7.3 Principles of Operation 200 7.3.1 Modeling of Star-Channel mmc 200 7.3.2 Phase-Shifted Carrier Modulation for Star-Channel mmc 203 7.4 Low-Frequency Operation of Star-Channel mmc 207 7.4.1 Equivalent Circuit 208 7.4.2 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Ripple 209 7.4.3 Common-Mode Voltage 213 7.5 Classical Control of Star-Channel mmc 216 7.5.1 Output Current Control 217 7.5.2 Submodule Capacitor Voltage Control 217 7.5.3 Synthesis of Modulation Signals 221 7.6 Delta-Channel Modular Multilevel Converter 223 7.7 Comparison of Advanced Modular Multilevel Converters 225 7.8 Summary 226 References 227 Part III Applications of Modular Multilevel Converters 8 Modular Multilevel Converter Based Medium-Voltage Motor Drives 231 8.1 Introduction 231 8.2 Fundamentals of MMC-Based Motor Drive 232 8.2.1 System Con gurations 232 8.2.2 Control Schemes 233 8.3 Voltage-Oriented Control of Grid-Side mmc 234 8.3.1 Principle of voltage orientation 235 8.3.2 Implementation of PLL 236 8.3.3 Block diagram of VOC 237 8.4 Indirect Field-Oriented Control of Motor-side mmc 240 8.4.1 Principle of Field Orientation 241 8.4.2 Rotor Flux Vector Estimator 242 8.4.3 Block diagram of IFOC approach 244 8.5 Low-Speed Operation of MMC-based Motor Drive 248 8.5.1 Analysis of Submodule Capacitor Voltage Ripple 248 8.5.2 Analysis of MMC with High-Frequency Voltage and Current Injection 254 8.5.3 Estimation of High-Frequency Voltage and Current Magnitude 256 8.5.4 Minimization of Submodule Capacitor Voltage Ripple 257 8.6 Common-Mode Voltage Issues and Blocking Schemes 262 8.6.1 De nition of Common-Mode Voltage 262 8.6.2 Blocking of Common-Mode Voltage 264 8.7 Transformer-less MMC-based Motor Drive 265 8.8 Summary 269 References 269 9 Role of Modular Multilevel Converters In The Power System 271 9.1 Introduction 271 9.2 MMC-Based HVDC Transmission Systems 272 9.2.1 Two-Terminal System 273 9.2.2 Multi-Terminal System 274 9.2.3 DC-Side Short-Circuit Fault Protection 275 9.2.4 HVDC Circuit Breakers 277 9.3 Control of Two-Terminal MMC-Based HVDC System 278 9.3.1 Sending-End Converter Control 279 9.3.2 Receiving-End Converter Control 281 9.4 Control of Multi-Terminal MMC-Based HVDC System 286 9.4.1 Voltage Margin Control Scheme 288 9.4.2 Voltage Droop Control Scheme 293 9.5 MMC-based Static Synchronous Compensator 294 9.5.1 System Con guration 295 9.5.2 Reactive Power Compensation 295 9.5.3 Compensation of Unbalanced AC-Grid Currents 298 9.6 MMC-based Uni ed Power Quality Conditioner 306 9.7 Summary 307 References 307 Appendix A MATLAB Demo Projects 311 References 312 Index 313

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book offers detailed coverage of color, colorants, the coloring of materials, and reproducing the color of materials through imaging. It combines the clarity and ease of earlier editions with significant updates about the advancement in color theory and technology. Provides guidance for how to use color measurement instrumentation, make a visual assessment, set a visual tolerance, and select a formulation Supplements material with numerical examples, graphs, and illustrations that clarify and explain complex subjects Expands coverage of topics including spatial vision, solid-state lighting, cameras and spectrophotometers, and translucent materials Table of ContentsPreface xi Chapter 1 Physical Properties of Colors 1 A What this Book is about? 1 B The Spectrum and Wave Theory 2 C Light Sources 3 D Conventional Materials 5 Transmission 5 Absorption 6 Surface Scattering 7 Internal Scattering 7 Terminology – Dyes Versus Pigments 10 Spectral Characteristics of Conventional Materials 12 E Fluorescent Materials 12 F Gonioapparent Materials 14 Metallic Materials 14 Pearlescent Materials 14 Interference Materials 15 Diffraction Materials 16 G Photochromic and Thermochromic Colorants 16 H Summary 16 Chapter 2 Color and Spatial Vision 17 A Trichromacy 17 B Light and Chromatic adaptation 21 C Compression 23 D Opponency 23 E Spatial Vision 26 F Observer variability 29 G Summary 34 Chapter 3 Visual Color Specification 37 A One-Dimensional Scales 37 Hue 37 Lightness 38 Chromatic Intensity 39 B Three-Dimensional Systems 39 Geometries 39 Natural Color System 40 Munsell Color System 42 Other Color-Order Systems 46 C Color Appearance: Multidimensional systems 46 D Color-Mixing systems 47 RGB and HSB 47 The Pantone Matching System 48 Limitations of Color-Mixing Systems for Color Specification 49 E Summary 49 Chapter 4 Numerical Color Specification: Colorimetry 51 A Color Matching 51 B Derivation of the Standard observers 53 Theoretical Considerations 53 The Color-Matching Experiment 54 The 1924 CIE Standard Photopic Observer 57 The 1931 CIE Standard Colorimetric Observer 58 The 1964 CIE Standard Colorimetric Observer 61 Cone-Fundamental-Based Colorimetric Observers 62 C Calculating Tristimulus values for Materials 62 D Chromaticity Coordinates and the Chromaticity diagram 63 E Calculating Tristimulus values and Chromaticity Coordinates for sources 67 F Transformation of Primaries 68 Displays 68 Cone Fundamentals 71 G Approximately Uniformly Spaced Systems 71 L* Lightness 72 u′v′ Uniform-Chromaticity Scale Diagram 72 Cieluv 73 Cielab 74 Rotation of CIELAB Coordinates 75 H Color-appearance models 78 I Whiteness and Yellowness 83 Whiteness 83 Yellowness 84 J Summary 84 Chapter 5 Color-Quality Specification 85 A Perceptibility and Acceptability Visual Judgments 85 B Color-Difference Geometry 86 C Ellipses and Ellipsoids 89 D The Color-Difference Problem 92 E Weighted Color-Difference Formulas 96 F CMC(L:C) Color-Difference Formula 99 G Ciede2000 Color-Difference Formula 100 H Uniform Color-Difference Spaces 105 I Determining Color-Tolerance Magnitude 106 J Summary 110 Chapter 6 Color and Material-Appearance Measurement 111 A Basic Principles of Measuring Color and Material Appearance 111 B The Sample 112 C Visual Color Measurement 113 D Measurement geometries 114 Bidirectional Reflectance Distribution Function 115 CIE Recommended Geometries for Measuring Spectral Reflectance Factor 115 CIE Recommended Geometries for Measuring Spectral Transmittance Factor 118 Multiangle Geometries 118 E Spectrophotometry 119 F Spectroradiometry 121 G Fluorescence Measurements 122 H Precision and Accuracy Measurements 124 Repeatability 125 Intramodel Reproducibility 127 Accuracy 128 I spectral Imaging 134 J Material-Appearance Measurements 137 Gloss 137 Microstructure – Bidirectional Reflectance Distribution Function 137 Macrostructure 142 Sparkle and Graininess 143 K Summary 144 Chapter 7 Lighting 145 A Standard Illuminants 145 B Luminance Illuminance and Luminous Efficacy 148 C Correlated Color Temperature 149 D Color Rendition 150 E Summary 155 Chapter 8 Metamerism and Color Inconstancy 157 A Metamerism Terminology 157 B Producing Metamers 158 C Indices of Metamerism 160 Special Index of Metamerism 160 General Index of Metamerism 162 Using Indices of Metamerism 163 D Color Inconstancy and Indices of Color Inconstancy 164 E Summary 168 Chapter 9 Optical Modeling of Colored Materials 169 A Generic Approach to Color Modeling 169 B Modeling Transparent Materials 171 C Modeling Opaque Materials 174 Opaque Paints 176 Opaque Textiles 181 D Modeling Gonioapparent Materials 184 E Color-Formulation Software 184 F Summary 188 Chapter 10 Color Imaging 189 A Analysis and Synthesis 190 B Color Management 191 C Additive versus Subtractive Mixing 195 D Displays and Encoding 198 E Printing 204 F Digital Cameras 212 Colorimetric Accuracy 213 Spectral Accuracy 217 G Spectral Color Reproduction 219 H Summary 219 Bibliography 221 Annotated Bibliography 237 Recommended Books 243 Index 247

Read more less

Book SynopsisA timely overview of a complete spectrum of technologiesspecifically designed for public safety communications as well as their deployment as management In our increasingly disaster-prone world, the need to upgrade and better coordinate our public safety networks combined with successful communications is more critical than ever. Fundamentals of Public Safety Networks and Critical Communications Systems fills a gap in the literature by providing a book that reviews a comprehensive set of technologies, from most popular to the most advanced communications technologies that can be applied to public safety networks and mission-critical communications systems. The book explores the technical and economic feasibility, design, application, and sustainable operation management of these vital networks and systems. Written by a noted expert in the field, the book provides extensive coverage of systems, services, end-user devices, and applications of public-safety Table of ContentsForeword by Alan Kaplan xv Foreword by Hussein Mouftah xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxiii List of Abbreviations xxv About the Author xxxv 1 OVERVIEW 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 Technologies Used in Critical Communications 4 1.2.1 Narrowband Land and Private Mobile Radio Systems 4 1.2.2 Broadband Technologies for Critical Communications 6 1.2.3 Interoperability 9 1.3 Applications, Systems, and End-User Devices 11 1.3.1 Applications and Systems 11 1.3.2 End-User Terminals and Consoles 13 1.4 Standards, Policies, and Spectrum 15 1.4.1 Frequency Spectrum for Critical Communications 15 1.4.2 Standards Development in Critical Communications 16 1.5 Planning, Design, Deployment, and Operational Aspects 18 1.5.1 Planning 18 1.5.2 Technology Considerations for a Critical Communications System 19 1.5.3 Economic and Financial Considerations 20 1.5.4 Paving the Way 21 1.5.5 Design and Deployment 22 1.5.6 Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (a.k.a. Management) 24 1.6 Summary and Conclusions 25 References 27 2 USERS OF CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 33 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Organizations Involved in Public Safety 34 2.2.1 Police Departments 34 2.2.2 Fire Departments 35 2.2.3 Emergency Medical Services 36 2.2.4 Emergency Management Agencies 37 2.2.5 Coast Guard 37 2.2.6 Other Organizations in Public Safety 38 2.3 Other Sectors using Critical Communications Systems 39 2.3.1 Transportation 40 2.3.2 Utilities 40 2.3.3 Others 41 2.4 Summary and Conclusions 42 References 42 3 CHARACTERISTICS OF CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Features Common to Both Critical Communications Systems and Other Wireless Networks 47 3.3 Features Unique to Critical Communications Systems 50 3.4 Importance of Interoperability Features 52 3.5 Summary and Conclusions 53 References 54 4 INTRODUCTION TO TECHNOLOGIES AND STANDARDS FOR CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS 55 4.1 Introduction 55 4.2 Analog Systems—Historical Perspective 58 4.3 Narrowband Land and Private Mobile Radio Systems 59 4.4 Limitations of Narrowband PMR/LMR Systems 60 4.5 Broadband Technologies 60 4.6 Other Technologies 61 4.7 Summary and Conclusions 63 References 63 5 PROJECT 25 (P25) 65 5.1 Introduction 65 5.2 Architecture 68 5.3 Interfaces 71 5.3.1 Air Interfaces 72 5.3.2 Wireline Interfaces 73 5.3.3 Data Interfaces 74 5.3.4 Security Interfaces 75 5.4 Services 75 5.5 Operations 76 5.6 Security 77 5.7 RF Spectrum 77 5.8 Standardization 78 5.9 Deployment 80 5.10 Future 81 5.11 Summary and Conclusions 84 References 85 6 TERRESTRIAL TRUNKED RADIO (TETRA) 87 6.1 Introduction 87 6.2 Architecture 88 6.3 Interfaces 90 6.3.1 Air Interfaces 90 6.3.2 Intersystem Interface 92 6.3.3 Terminal Equipment Interface (TEI) 93 6.3.4 Line Station (Dispatcher) Interface 94 6.3.5 Network Management Interface 94 6.3.6 PSTN/ISDN/PDN 94 6.4 Services 95 6.4.1 Basic Voice Services 95 6.4.2 Supplementary Services 96 6.4.3 Data Services 97 6.5 Operations 97 6.6 Security 98 6.7 Spectrum 98 6.8 Standardization 99 6.9 Deployment 100 6.9.1 Cost Factors Impacting TETRA Wireless Systems 100 6.10 Future 104 6.11 Summary and Conclusions 105 References 105 7 DIGITAL MOBILE RADIO (DMR) 107 7.1 Introduction 107 7.2 Architecture 109 7.3 Interfaces 111 7.3.1 DMR Air Interface (AI) 112 7.3.2 Trunking Interface 113 7.3.3 Data Application Interface 113 7.4 Services 113 7.4.1 Voice Services 114 7.4.2 Data Services 115 7.5 Operations 116 7.6 Security 116 7.7 Spectrum 117 7.8 Standardization 117 7.9 Deployment 118 7.10 Future 119 7.11 Summary and Conclusions 119 References 120 8 LONG-TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) 121 8.1 Introduction 122 8.2 Architecture 125 8.2.1 E-UTRAN 125 8.2.2 Evolved Packet Core (EPC) 127 8.3 Interfaces 128 8.3.1 Air Interface 129 8.3.2 E-UTRAN Network Interfaces 129 8.3.3 EPC Interfaces 130 8.3.4 Interworking Interfaces 131 8.4 Services 132 8.5 Operations 133 8.6 Security 134 8.7 Spectrum 135 8.8 Standardization 136 8.9 Future 138 8.10 Deployment 138 8.11 Use of LTE as a Critical Communications Network 139 8.12 Summary and Conclusions 142 References 143 9 FUTURE TECHNOLOGIES FOR CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 145 9.1 Introduction 145 9.2 5G and Beyond 146 9.3 Augmented Reality (AR) 150 9.4 Internet of Things (IoT) 151 9.5 Big Data Analytics 152 9.6 Summary and Conclusions 153 References 154 10 SYSTEMS AND APPLICATIONS USED IN CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS 157 10.1 Introduction 157 10.2 Command and Control Centers 158 10.3 Emergency Response Systems 158 10.4 Incident Management System 160 10.5 Public Warning Systems 161 10.6 Others 162 10.7 Summary and Conclusions 163 References 163 11 END-USER DEVICES CONNECTED TO CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 165 11.1 Introduction 165 11.2 Mobile Radios 166 11.3 Portable Radios 167 11.4 Dispatch Consoles 170 11.5 Others 171 11.6 Summary and Conclusions 172 References 172 12 PLANNING FOR DEPLOYMENT AND OPERATIONS OF CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 175 12.1 Introduction 175 12.2 Developing Policies 176 12.2.1 National Broadband Policy 177 12.2.2 Governance Policy 177 12.2.3 Spectrum Management Policy 178 12.3 Developing a Business Case 180 12.3.1 Identifying Alternatives 181 12.3.2 Feasibility Studies 184 12.3.3 Interoperability Concerns 185 12.3.4 Comparison of Alternatives and the Recommendation 188 12.4 Developing Project Plans 190 12.5 Summary and Conclusions 192 References 193 13 ECONOMIC AND FINANCIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR DEPLOYING CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 195 13.1 Introduction 195 13.2 Cost and Benefit of Deploying and Operating a Public Safety Network 196 13.2.1 Cost of Deploying and Operating a Public Safety Network 196 13.2.2 Benefits of Deploying and Operating a Public Safety Network 198 13.3 Financing Alternatives 199 13.3.1 Bond Financing 199 13.3.2 Lease Financing 200 13.3.3 Financing via Sharing the Network 200 13.4 Evaluation of Financing Alternatives 201 13.5 Summary and Conclusions 202 References 203 14 DESIGNING, IMPLEMENTATION, AND INTEGRATION 205 14.1 Introduction 205 14.2 Network Architecture and Design 205 14.2.1 Designing Narrowband Technologies Based Network 206 14.2.2 Designing a Broadband Technology Based Network 208 14.3 Implementation and Installation 213 14.4 System Integration, Verification, and Validation Testing 214 14.5 Summary and Conclusions 215 References 215 15 OPERATIONS, ADMINISTRATION, AND MAINTENANCE OF CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 217 15.1 Introduction 217 15.2 Developing Operations Plans 220 15.3 Operation Support Systems (OSSs), Tools, and Applications 221 15.3.1 Many Types of OSSs: Layered Organization 222 15.3.2 Interfaces among OSSs 223 15.3.3 OSSs Supporting Network Management Functions 223 15.3.4 Tools and Applications Supporting Operations 224 15.3.5 OSSs Supporting Network Technologies 225 15.4 Operations Support Centers, Policies, Guidelines, and Procedures 226 15.4.1 Centers, People, Administration 228 15.4.2 Configuration Management Related Procedures 230 15.4.3 Fault Management Related Procedures 232 15.4.4 Performance Management Related Procedures 233 15.4.5 Accounting Management Related Procedures 234 15.4.6 Security Management Related Procedures 235 15.5 Summary and Conclusions 236 References 237 16 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS 239 16.1 Major Points and Observations 239 16.2 Challenges in Deploying Critical Communications Systems 241 A PROJECT 25 DOCUMENTS 243 B TETRA DOCUMENTS BY ETSI 249 C LTE CRITICAL COMMUNICATIONS RELATED DOCUMENTS 265 Index 273

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplores the fundamentals required to understand, analyze, and implement space modulation techniques (SMTs) in coherent and non-coherent radio frequency environments This book focuses on the concept of space modulation techniques (SMTs), and covers those emerging high data rate wireless communication techniques. The book discusses the advantages and disadvantages of SMTs along with their performance. A general framework for analyzing the performance of SMTs is provided and used to detail their performance over several generalized fading channels. The book also addresses the transmitter design of these techniques with the optimum number of hardware components and the use of these techniques in cooperative and mm-Wave communications. Beginning with an introduction to the subject and a brief history, Space Modulation Techniques goes on to offer chapters covering MIMO systems like spatial multiplexing and space-time coding. It then looks at channel models, such as Rayleigh, Rician, NakaTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Wireless History 1 1.2 MIMO Promise 2 1.3 Introducing Space Modulation Techniques (SMTs) 3 1.4 Advanced SMTs 4 1.4.1 Space–Time Shift Keying (STSK) 4 1.4.2 Index Modulation (IM) 4 1.4.3 Differential SMTs 5 1.4.4 OpticalWireless SMTs 6 1.5 Book Organization 6 2 MIMO System and ChannelModels 9 2.1 MIMO System Model 9 2.2 SpatialMultiplexing MIMO Systems 11 2.3 MIMO Capacity 11 2.4 MIMO ChannelModels 13 2.4.1 Rayleigh Fading 15 2.4.2 Nakagami-n (Rician Fading) 15 2.4.3 Nakagami-m Fading 16 2.4.4 The ;;–;; MIMO Channel 17 2.4.5 The ;;–;; Distribution 20 2.4.6 The ;;–;; Distribution 23 2.5 Channel Imperfections 26 2.5.1 Spatial Correlation 26 2.5.1.1 Simulating SC Matrix 29 2.5.1.2 Effect of SC on MIMO Capacity 31 2.5.2 Mutual Coupling 31 2.5.2.1 Effect of MC on MIMO Capacity 33 2.5.3 Channel Estimation Errors 34 2.5.3.1 Impact of Channel Estimation Error on the MIMO Capacity 34 3 SpaceModulation Transmission and Reception Techniques 35 3.1 Space Shift Keying (SSK) 36 3.2 Generalized Space Shift Keying (GSSK) 39 3.3 SpatialModulation (SM) 41 3.4 Generalized SpatialModulation (GSM) 44 3.5 Quadrature Space Shift Keying (QSSK) 45 3.6 Quadrature SpatialModulation (QSM) 48 3.7 Generalized QSSK (GQSSK) 53 3.8 Generalized QSM (GQSM) 55 3.9 Advanced SMTs 55 3.9.1 Differential Space Shift Keying (DSSK) 55 3.9.2 Differential SpatialModulation (DSM) 60 3.9.3 Differential Quadrature SpatialModulation (DQSM) 60 3.9.4 Space–Time Shift Keying (STSK) 65 3.9.5 Trellis Coded-Spatial Modulation (TCSM) 66 3.10 Complexity Analysis of SMTs 69 3.10.1 Computational Complexity of the ML Decoder 69 3.10.2 Low-Complexity Sphere Decoder Receiver for SMTs 70 3.10.2.1 SMT-Rx Detector 70 3.10.2.2 SMT-Tx Detector 71 3.10.2.3 Single Spatial Symbol SMTs (SS-SMTs) 71 3.10.2.4 Double Spatial Symbols SMTs (DS-SMTs) 72 3.10.2.5 Computational Complexity 73 3.10.2.6 Error Probability Analysis and Initial Radius 74 3.11 Transmitter Power Consumption Analysis 75 3.11.1 Power Consumption Comparison 77 3.12 Hardware Cost 80 3.12.1 Hardware Cost Comparison 81 3.13 SMTs Coherent and Noncoherent Spectral Efficiencies 82 4 Average Bit Error Probability Analysis for SMTs 85 4.1 Average Error Probability over Rayleigh Fading Channels 85 4.1.1 SM and SSK with Perfect Channel Knowledge at the Receiver 85 4.1.1.1 Single Receive Antenna (Nr = 1) 86 4.1.1.2 Arbitrary Number of Receive Antennas (Nr) 88 4.1.1.3 Asymptotic Analysis 89 4.1.2 SM and SSK in the Presence of Imperfect Channel Estimation 90 4.1.2.1 Single Receive Antenna (Nr = 1) 91 4.1.2.2 Arbitrary Number of Receive Antennas (Nr) 92 4.1.2.3 Asymptotic Analysis 92 4.1.3 QSM with Perfect Channel Knowledge at the Receiver 94 4.1.4 QSM in the Presence of Imperfect Channel Estimation 96 4.2 A General Framework for SMTs Average Error Probability over Generalized Fading Channels and in the Presence of Spatial Correlation and Imperfect Channel Estimation 98 4.3 Average Error Probability Analysis of Differential SMTs 101 4.4 Comparative Average Bit Error Rate Results 103 4.4.1 SMTs, GSMTs, and QSMTs ABER Comparisons 103 4.4.2 Differential SMTs Results 107 5 Information Theoretic Treatment for SMTs 109 5.1 Evaluating the Mutual Information 110 5.1.1 Classical SpatialMultiplexing MIMO 110 5.1.2 SMTs 111 5.2 Capacity Analysis 114 5.2.1 SMX 114 5.2.2 SMTs 115 5.2.2.1 Classical SMTs Capacity Analysis 115 5.2.2.2 SMTs Capacity Analysis by Maximing over Spatial and Constellation Symbols 119 5.3 Achieving SMTs Capacity 121 5.3.1 SSK 121 5.3.2 SM 124 5.4 Information Theoretic Analysis in the Presence of Channel Estimation Errors 128 5.4.1 Evaluating the Mutual Information 128 5.4.1.1 Classical SpatialMultiplexing MIMO 128 5.4.1.2 SMTs 129 5.4.2 Capacity Analysis 131 5.4.2.1 SpatialMultiplexing MIMO 131 5.4.2.2 SMTs 134 5.4.3 Achieving SMTs Capacity 135 5.4.3.1 SSK 135 5.4.3.2 SM 136 5.5 Mutual Information Performance Comparison 138 6 Cooperative SMTs 141 6.1 Amplify and Forward (AF) Relaying 141 6.1.1 Average Error Probability Analysis 143 6.1.1.1 Asymptotic Analysis 147 6.1.1.2 Numerical Results 147 6.1.2 Opportunistic AF Relaying 149 6.1.2.1 Average Error Probability Analysis 151 6.1.2.2 Asymptotic Analysis 152 6.2 Decode and Forward (DF) Relaying 152 6.2.1 Multiple single-antenna DF relays 152 6.2.2 Single DF Relay with Multiple Antennas 153 6.2.3 Average Error Potability Analysis 154 6.2.3.1 Multiple Single-Antenna DF Relays 154 6.2.3.2 Single DF Relay with Multiple-Antennas 157 6.2.3.3 Numerical Results 157 6.3 Two-Way Relaying (2WR) SMTs 158 6.3.1 The Transmission Phase 159 6.3.2 The Relaying Phase 161 6.3.3 Average Error Probability Analysis 162 6.3.3.1 Numerical Results 165 7 SMTs for Millimeter-Wave Communications 167 7.1 Line of Sight mmWave Channel Model 168 7.1.1 Capacity Analysis 168 7.1.1.1 SM 168 7.1.1.2 QSM 169 7.1.1.3 Randomly Spaced Antennas 169 7.1.1.4 Capacity Performance Comparison 172 7.1.2 Average Bit Error Rate Results 174 7.2 Outdoor Millimeter-Wave Communications 3D Channel Model 175 7.2.1 Capacity Analysis 179 7.2.2 Average Bit Error Rate Results 182 8 Summary and Future Directions 185 8.1 Summary 185 8.2 Future Directions 187 8.2.1 SMTs with Reconfigurable Antennas (RAs) 187 8.2.2 Practical Implementation of SMTs 188 8.2.3 Index Modulation and SMTs 188 8.2.4 SMTs for OpticalWireless Communications 189 A MatlabCodes 191 A.1 Generating the Constellation Diagrams 191 A.1.1 SSK 191 A.1.2 GSSK 192 A.1.3 SM 193 A.1.4 GSM 194 A.1.5 QSSK 195 A.1.6 QSM 196 A.1.7 GQSSK 197 A.1.8 GQSM 199 A.1.9 SMTs 200 A.1.10 DSSK 202 A.1.11 DSM 203 A.1.12 DSMTs 204 A.2 Receivers 205 A.2.1 SMTs ML Receiver 205 A.2.2 DSMTs ML Receiver 206 A.3 Analytical and Simulated ABER 207 A.3.1 ABER of SM over Rayleigh Fading Channels with No CSE 207 A.3.2 ABER of SM over Rayleigh Fading Channels with CSE 209 A.3.3 ABER of QSM over Rayleigh Fading Channels with No CSE 211 A.3.4 ABER of QSM over Rayleigh Fading Channels with CSE 214 A.3.5 Analytical ABER of SMTs over Generalized Fading Channels and with CSE and SC 216 A.3.6 Simulated ABER of SMTs Using Monte Carlo Simulation over Generalized Fading Channels and with CSE and SC 222 A.3.7 Analytical ABER of DSMTs over Generalized Fading Channels 228 A.3.8 Simulated ABER of DSMTs Using Monte Carlo Simulation over Generalized Fading Channels 232 A.4 Mutual Information and Capacity 235 A.4.1 SMTs Simulated Mutual Information over Generalized Fading Channels and with CSE 235 A.4.2 SMTs Capacity 240 References 243 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a systematic overview of a hot research area, examining the principles and theories of energy harvesting communications This book provides a detailed and advanced level introduction to the fundamentals of energy harvesting techniques and their use in state-of-the-art communications systems. It fills the gap in the market by covering both basic techniques in energy harvesting and advanced topics in wireless communications. More importantly, it discusses the application of energy harvesting in communications systems to give readers at different levels a full understanding of these most recent advances in communications technologies. The first half of Energy Harvesting Communications: Principles and Theories focuses on the challenges brought by energy harvesting in communications. The second part of the book looks at different communications applications enhanced by energy harvesting. It offers in-depth chapters that: discuss different energy sourceTable of ContentsPreface xi Acronyms xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 Relationship with Green Communications 2 1.3 Potential Applications 3 1.3.1 Energy Harvesting for 5G 3 1.4 Outline of Chapters 4 2 Energy Sources 5 2.1 Introduction 5 2.2 Types of Sources 6 2.2.1 Mechanical Energy 6 2.2.2 Solar/Light Energy 8 2.2.3 Electromagnetic Energy 9 2.3 Predictive Models of Sources 9 2.3.1 Solar Energy Modeling 10 2.3.2 Ambient RF Energy Modeling 12 2.4 Summary 16 3 Energy Harvesters 19 3.1 Introduction 19 3.2 Photovoltaic Panels 19 3.2.1 Principles 20 3.2.2 Models 22 3.3 Radio Frequency Energy Harvester 25 3.3.1 Principles 26 3.3.2 Efficiencies 28 3.4 Overall Models 31 3.5 Battery and Supercapacitor 35 3.5.1 Battery 35 3.5.2 Supercapacitor 36 3.6 Summary 36 4 Physical Layer Techniques 39 4.1 Introduction 39 4.2 Effect of Energy Harvesting 40 4.2.1 Distribution of Transmission Power 41 4.2.2 Transmission Delay and Probability 43 4.2.3 Bit Error Rate 47 4.2.4 Achievable Rate 52 4.2.5 General Information Theoretic Limits 54 4.3 Energy Harvesting Detection 55 4.4 Energy Harvesting Estimation 61 4.4.1 With Relaying 62 4.4.1.1 Scheme 1 62 4.4.1.2 Scheme 2 66 4.4.1.3 Scheme 3 68 4.4.1.4 Scheme 4 70 4.4.1.5 Scheme 5 71 4.4.1.6 Scheme 6 72 4.4.2 Without Relaying 79 4.5 Energy Transmission Waveform 83 4.5.1 Scenario 84 4.5.2 Energy Waveform Optimization 85 4.5.2.1 Linear Harvester 85 4.5.2.2 Non-Linear Harvester 86 4.6 Other Issues and Techniques 88 4.6.1 Circuit Power Consumption 88 4.6.2 Physical Layer Security 89 4.6.3 Non-orthogonal Multiple Access 91 4.6.4 Joint Detection and Estimation 92 4.7 Summary 98 5 Upper Layer Techniques 101 5.1 Introduction 101 5.2 Media Access Control Protocols 102 5.2.1 Duty Cycling 102 5.2.1.1 Wireless Power Transfer 103 5.2.1.2 Ambient Energy Harvesting 107 5.2.2 Other Issues in MAC Protocols 110 5.3 Routing Protocols 111 5.3.1 Ambient Energy Harvesting 112 5.3.2 Wireless Power Transfer 117 5.4 Other Issues in the Upper Layers 118 5.4.1 Scheduling 118 5.4.2 Effective Capacity 121 5.5 Summary 123 6 Wireless Powered Communications 125 6.1 Introduction 125 6.2 Types of Wireless Powered Communications 126 6.3 Simultaneous Wireless Information and Power Transfer 127 6.3.1 Ideal Implementations 128 6.3.2 Practical Implementations 130 6.3.2.1 Time Switching 130 6.3.2.2 Power Splitting 132 6.3.2.3 General Scheme 134 6.4 Hybrid Access Point 135 6.4.1 Rate-Energy Tradeoff 135 6.4.2 Fairness Issue 138 6.4.3 Channel Knowledge Issue 138 6.4.3.1 Average Achievable Rate 139 6.4.3.2 Average BER 141 6.4.3.3 Numerical Examples 144 6.5 Power Beacon 150 6.5.1 System and Design Problem 150 6.5.2 More Notes 152 6.6 Other Issues 153 6.6.1 Effect of Interference onWireless Power 153 6.6.1.1 System and Assumptions 153 6.6.1.2 Performances with Interference 154 6.6.1.3 Performances without Interference 155 6.6.1.4 Numerical Examples 155 6.6.2 Effect of Interference byWireless Power 157 6.6.2.1 System and Assumptions 158 6.6.2.2 Average Interference Power 159 6.6.2.3 Rate 159 6.6.2.4 Numerical Examples 161 6.6.3 Exploitation of Interference 163 6.6.4 Multiple Antennas 169 6.7 An Example: Wireless Powered Sensor Networks 172 6.8 Summary 172 7 Energy Harvesting Cognitive Radios 175 7.1 Introduction 175 7.1.1 Cognitive Radio 175 7.1.2 Cognitive Radio Functions 177 7.1.3 Spectrum Sensing 177 7.1.4 Energy Harvesting Cognitive Radio 178 7.2 Conventional Cognitive Radio 180 7.2.1 Different Types of Cognitive Radio Systems 180 7.2.2 Spectrum Sensing Methods 182 7.2.2.1 Energy Detection 182 7.2.2.2 Feature Detection 186 7.3 Types of Energy Harvesting Cognitive Radio 189 7.3.1 Protocols 189 7.3.2 Energy Sources 190 7.4 From the Secondary Base Station 192 7.5 From the Primary User 198 7.5.1 Conventional PU 198 7.5.2 Wireless Powered PU 204 7.6 From the Ambient Environment 210 7.7 Information Energy Cooperation 215 7.8 Other Important Issues 217 7.9 Summary 218 8 Energy Harvesting Relaying 221 8.1 Introduction 221 8.1.1 Wireless Relaying 221 8.1.2 Relaying Protocols 222 8.1.3 Energy Harvesting Relaying 223 8.2 Conventional Relaying 224 8.2.1 Amplify-and-Forward Relaying 224 8.2.2 Decode-and-Forward Relaying 225 8.2.3 Performance Metrics 226 8.2.3.1 Amplify-and-Forward 226 8.2.3.2 Decode-and-Forward 227 8.2.4 Relay Selection 229 8.2.4.1 Full Selection 231 8.2.4.2 Partial Selection 231 8.2.5 Two-Way Relaying 233 8.3 Types of Energy Harvesting Relaying 235 8.4 From the Ambient Environment 237 8.5 From the Power Transmitter 241 8.5.1 One User and Single Antenna 241 8.5.2 Multiple Users and Single Antenna 242 8.5.3 One User and Multiple Antennas 244 8.6 From the Source 246 8.6.1 Amplify-and-Forward Relaying 247 8.6.2 Decode-and-Forward Relaying 250 8.6.2.1 Instantaneous Transmission 251 8.6.2.2 Delay- or Error-Constrained Transmission 253 8.6.2.3 Delay- or Error-Tolerant Transmission 254 8.6.2.4 Numerical Examples 255 8.6.3 Energy Harvesting Source 260 8.7 Other Important Issues 270 8.7.1 Interference 270 8.7.1.1 Time Switching 271 8.7.1.2 Power Splitting 273 8.7.2 Multi-Hop 275 8.7.2.1 Time Switching 276 8.7.2.2 Power Splitting 280 8.7.2.3 Numerical Examples 282 8.7.3 Others 291 8.8 Summary 292 References 293 Index 307

Read more less

Book SynopsisSATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS PAYLOAD AND SYSTEM A valuable reference on communications satellite systemsThis book presents the state of the art in commercial communications satellite systems, thoroughly and in detail not to be found in any other book. These systems provide the television and some of the telephone and Internet services in use every day. The book focuses on the satellite payload, which consists of antennas, receivers, and transmitters. The book discusses the what, the how, and the why of various choices that have been made in currently operating systems.The book is organized into three parts: In-depth description of various payload units, not requiring specialist knowledge. For each unit and the payload as a whole, the architectures, the theory of operation, analysis, performance, and specifications are presented. End-to-end system context in which the payload operates. Digital communications theory and satellite communications protocolsTable of Contents1 Introduction 2 1.1 End-to-End Satellite Communications System 2 1.2 What the Book Is About 3 1.3 Channel and Channel Sharing 3 1.4 Payload 4 1.5 Ground Transmitter and Ground Receiver 7 1.6 System 8 1.7 Conventions 8 1.8 Book Sources 9 1.9 Summary of Rest of Book 10 References 12 PART I. PAYLOAD 2 2 Payload’s On-Orbit Environment 2 2.1 What Determines Environment 2 2.2 On-Orbit Environment and Mitigation by Spacecraft Bus 8 2.3 General Effects of Mitigated Environment on Payload 19 References 24 3 Antenna Basics and Single-Beam Antenna 2 3.1 Introduction 2 3.2 Examples of Single-Beam Antenna 2 3.3 General Antenna Concepts 3 3.4 Reflector-Antenna Basics 9 3.5 Steerable Single-Beam Antennas 15 3.6 Reflector Technology for Single-Beam Antennas 16 3.7 Horn for Single-Beam Antennas 17 3.8 Other Antenna Components 20 3.9 Antenna Pointing Error 24 3.10 Antenna Autotrack 26 3.11 Reflector-Antenna Inefficiencies 28 3.12 Testing 32 References 35 4 Payload-Integration Elements 2 4.1 Introduction 2 4.2 Coaxial Cable vs. Waveguide 2 4.3 Coaxial Cable 2 4.4 Waveguide 7 4.5 Other Integration Elements 13 4.6 Redundancy Configurations 17 4.7 Impedance Mismatch and Scattering Parameters 21 References 26 5 Microwave Filter 2 5.1 Introduction 2 5.2 Basics of Analog Filters 2 5.3 Basics of Specifically Microwave Filters 7 5.4 Technology for Bandpass Filters 13 5.5 Filter Units 17 5.6 Bandpass Filter Specification 23 References 24 6 Low-Noise Amplifier and Frequency Converter 2 6.1 Introduction 2 6.2 LNAs and Frequency Converters in Payload 2 6.3 Nonlinearity of LNA and Frequency Converter 4 6.4 Noise Figure 8 6.5 Low-Noise Amplifier 8 6.6 Frequency Converter 11 6.7 Receiver 23 6.A Appendix. Formula for Integrating Phase Noise Spectrum 24 References 24 7 Preamplifier and High-Power Amplifier 2 7.1 Introduction 2 7.2 HPA Concepts and Terms 2 7.3 Traveling-Wave Tube Amplifier vs. Solid-State Power Amplifier 7 7.4 Traveling-Wave Tube Subsystem 9 7.5 Solid-State Power Amplifier 26 References 34 8 Payload’s Analog Communications Parameters 2 8.1 Introduction 2 8.2 Gain Variation with Frequency 4 8.3 Phase Variation with Frequency 7 8.4 Channel Bandwidth 9 8.5 Phase Noise 10 8.6 Frequency Stability 10 8.7 Spurious Signals from Frequency Converter 10 8.8 HPA Nonlinearity 11 8.9 Near-Carrier Spurious Signals from HPA Subsystem 12 8.10 Stability of Gain and Power-Out 13 8.11 Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power 14 8.12 Figure of Merit G/Ts 15 8.13 Saturation Flux Density 17 8.14 Self-Interference 17 8.15 Passive Intermodulation Products 19 8.A Appendices 20 References 21 9 More Analyses for Payload Development 2 9.1 Introduction 2 9.2 How to Deal with Noise Figure 2 9.3 How to Make and Maintain Payload Performance Budgets 4 9.4 HPA Topics 16 9.5 What Nonlinearity Does to Modulated Signal 20 9.6 Simulating Payload Performance as a Function of Gaussian Random Variables 24 References 24 10 Processing Payload and Flexible Payload 2 10.1 Introduction 2 10.2 Processing Operations 7 10.3 Non-Regenerative Processing Payloads 13 10.4 Regenerative Payloads 16 10.5 Communications Parameters of Digital Processing Payload 20 References 20 11 Multi-Beam Antenna and Phased Array 2 11.1 Introduction 2 11.2 MBA Introduction 3 11.3 Reflector for MBA or Contoured Beam and Configuration of Feeds 6 11.4 Horn and Feed Assembly for GEO 11 11.5 Location of Radiating Elements in Offset-Fed Reflector MBA 16 11.6 Single-Feed-Per-Beam MBA 19 11.7 Phased Array Introduction 20 11.8 Radiating Element of Phased Array 23 11.9 Beam-Forming Network 27 11.10 Applications of Phased Array 30 11.11 Beam-Hopping 32 11.12 Amplification of Phased Array 33 11.13 Phased Array Pointing Error 39 11.14 Mutual Coupling in Radiating-Element Cluster 40 11.15 Testing MBA 41 References 42 PART II. END-TO-END SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM 2 12 Digital Communications Theory 2 12.1 Introduction 2 12.2 Signal Representation 2 12.3 Filtering in General 7 12.4 White Gaussian Noise 8 12.5 End-to-End Communications System 9 12.6 Bit Manipulation 10 12.7 Modulation Introduction 14 12.8 Memoryless Modulation 14 12.9 Maximum-Likelihood Estimation 22 12.10 Demodulation for Memoryless Modulation 23 12.11 Modulation with Memory 32 12.12 Maximum-Likelihood Sequence Estimation 34 12.13 Demodulation for Modulation with Memory 34 12.14 Bit Recovery 35 12.15 Inter-Symbol Interference 36 12.16 SNR, Es/N0, and Eb/N0 39 12.A Appendix. Sketch of Proof That Pulse Transform and Signal Spectrum Are Related for Memoryless Modulation 41 References 42 13 Satellite Communications Standards 2 13.1 Introduction 2 13.2 Background 2 13.3 Application Examples of First-Generation Standards 6 13.4 Second-Generation DVB Communications Standards 8 13.5 Satmode Communications Standard 15 References 16 14 Communications Link 2 14.1 Introduction 2 14.2 Primary Information Sources 2 14.3 Link Availability 3 14.4 Signal Power on Link 4 14.5 Noise Level on Link 18 14.6 Interference on Link 19 14.7 End-to-End C/(N0 + I0) 29 14.8 Link Budget 30 14.9 Implementation Loss Item in Link Budget 32 References 32 15 Probabilistic Treatment of Downlink Margin for Multi-Beam Payload 2 15.1 Introduction 2 15.2 Multi-Beam-Downlink Payload Specifications 2 15.3 Analysis Method 3 15.4 Analysis Assumptions 4 15.5 Repeater-Caused Variation of C and C/Iself and Nominal Value 5 15.6 Combining Antenna-Caused Variation and Nominal Value into Repeater-Caused Variation 11 15.7 Combining Atmosphere-Caused Variation into Payload-Caused Variation 14 15.8 Optimizing Multi-Beam-Downlink Payload Specified on Link Availability 15 15.A Appendix. Iteration Details for Optimizing Multi-Beam Payload Specified on Link Availability 16 16 Model of End-to-End Communications System 2 16.1 Introduction 2 16.2 Considerations for Both Software Simulation and Hardware Emulation 2 16.3 Additional Considerations for Simulation 6 16.4 Additional Considerations for Emulation 15 References 18 PART III. SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 2 17 Fixed and Broadcast Satellite Services 2 17.1 Introduction 2 17.2 Satellite Television 2 17.3 Regulations in General 4 17.4 Fixed Satellite Service 4 17.5 Broadcast Satellite Service 13 References 17 18 High-Throughput Satellites 2 18.1 Introduction 2 18.2 Frequency and Bandwidth 4 18.3 Residential Internet HTS 6 18.4 Commercial Communications HTS 13 References 15 19 Non-Geostationary Satellite Systems 2 19.1 Introduction 2 19.2 Iridium 3 19.3 Globalstar 9 19.5 O3b 14 19.6 OneWeb 21 19.7 Starlink 26 19.8 Telesat LEO 32 References 33 20 Mobile Satellite Systems 2 20.1 Introduction 2 20.2 Thuraya 5 20.3 Inmarsat-4 and Alphasat 12 20.4 TerreStar/EchoStar XXI 27 20.5 SkyTerra 35 20.6 Inmarsat-5 (Global Xpress) F1-F4 44 References 53

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive resource to the latest developments of system enhancement techniques of Femtocells, power management, interference mitigation and antenna design LTE Communications and Networks fills a gap in the literature to offer a comprehensive review of the most current developments of LTE Femtocells and antennas and explores their future growth. With contributions from a group of experts that represent the fields of wireless communications and mobile communications, signal processing and antenna design, this text identifies technical challenges and presents recent results related to the development, integration and enhancement of LTE systems in portable devices. The authors examine topics such as application of cognitive radio with efficient sensing mechanisms, interference mitigation and power management schemes for the LTE systems. They also provide a comprehensive account of design challenges and approaches, performance enhancement techniques and Table of ContentsList of Contributors xv Preface xvi 1 Introduction 1Ghazanfar Ali Safdar and Masood Ur Rehman 1.1 Evolution of Wireless and Cellular Communication 2 1.1.1 1 G 3 1.1.2 2 G 3 1.1.3 2.5 G 3 1.1.4 2.75 G 4 1.1.5 3 G 4 1.1.6 3.5 G 4 1.1.7 4 G/LTE 5 1.2 LTE Architecture 5 1.2.1 Communications Perspective Challenges in LTE Networks 8 1.2.1.1 Signalling System 8 1.2.1.2 Backward Compatibility 9 1.2.1.3 BS Efficiency 9 1.2.2 LTE Radio Frame 10 1.3 LTE Antennas 11 1.4 LTE Applications 11 1.4.1 Communications 11 1.4.2 Public Safety 12 1.4.3 Device]to]Device Communications 12 1.4.4 Video Streaming 12 1.4.5 Voice over LTE (VoLTE) 12 1.4.6 Internet of Things 13 1.4.7 Wearable Systems 13 1.4.8 Cloud Computing 13 1.5 Book Organization 14 References 16 Part I LTE Femtocells 19 2 LTE Femtocells 21Ghazanfar Ali Safdar 2.1 Introduction 21 2.1.1 Cross]Tier Interference 22 2.1.2 Co]Tier Interference 24 2.1.3 Downlink Interference Modelling 24 2.1.4 Uplink Interference Modelling 25 2.2 Platform for Femtocell Deployment 26 2.3 LTE Architecture Overview 26 2.3.1 LTE Downlink Transmission 27 2.3.2 LTE Uplink Transmission 27 2.4 LTE Femtocell Interference Analysis 28 2.4.1 Scenario 1: Cross]Tier Interference Analysis 28 2.4.2 Scenario 2: Effects of Femtocell Access Mode Deployment 28 2.4.3 Scenario 3: Co]Tier Interference Analysis 29 2.4.4 Scenario 4: Effects of Varying FAP Transmit Power Levels on MUEs 29 2.5 Interference Mitigation: Current State of the Art 31 2.5.1 Spectrum Access/Frequency Assignment 31 2.5.2 Power Control 32 2.5.3 Antenna Schemes 33 2.6 Cognitive Femtocells: A Smart Solution to a Complex Problem 33 2.7 Summary 35 References 36 3 Interference Mitigation in Cognitive Radio]Based LTE Femtocells 38Ghazanfar Ali Safdar 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Femtocells 41 3.2.1 Femtocells – Interference versus Deployment 43 3.2.2 Femtocells – Typical Interference Mitigation Techniques 46 3.2.2.1 Spectrum Access/Frequency Assignment Schemes 46 3.2.2.2 Power Control (PC) Schemes 46 3.2.2.3 Antenna Schemes 48 3.3 Interference Mitigation in Femtocells using Cognitive Radio 49 3.3.1 Cognitive Interference Mitigation 51 3.3.1.1 Cognitive Interference Mitigation – PC 52 3.3.1.2 Cognitive Interference Mitigation – Spectrum Access 54 3.3.1.3 Cognitive Interference Mitigation – Antenna Schemes 64 3.3.1.4 Cognitive Interference Mitigation – Joint Schemes 66 3.3.2 Cognitive Interference Mitigation versus Conventional Interference Mitigation 70 3.4 Summary 74 References 75 4 Coverage Area]Based Power Control for Interference Management in LTE Femtocells 84Ghazanfar Ali Safdar 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Coverage Radius Based Power Control Scheme (PS) 88 4.2.1 Radius Limit Setting 89 4.2.2 Initial Coverage Radius 89 4.2.3 Self]Update 89 4.2.4 Final Radius 89 4.3 System Model 90 4.4 Performance Analysis 92 4.4.1 Results and Discussion 93 4.4.1.1 SINR Cross]Tier (Single Cell) 93 4.4.1.2 SINR Co]Tier (Single Cell) 94 4.4.1.3 Downlink Throughput (Single Cell) 95 4.4.1.4 Co] and Cross]Tier SINR (Single Cell versus Multicell) 96 4.4.1.5 Droppage in SINR (Single Cell versus Multicell) 97 4.4.1.6 Coverage Area Bounds and Impact on SINR (Single Cell versus Multicell) 99 4.5 Summary 100 References 101 5 Energy Management in LTE Femtocells 104Kapil Kanwal, Ghazanfar Ali Safdar, Masood Ur Rehman and Xiaodong Yang 5.1 Introduction 105 5.2 Architecture of LTE Networks 105 5.2.1 Communications Perspective Challenges in LTE Networks 106 5.2.1.1 Signalling System 106 5.2.1.2 Backward Compatibility 107 5.2.1.3 BS Efficiency 107 5.2.2 Importance of Energy Management in LTE Networks 108 5.3 Classification of ES Schemes 108 5.3.1 Static Power Consumption 109 5.3.2 Dynamic Power Consumption 109 5.4 Energy Efficient Resource Allocation 113 5.4.1 Hybrid FBS and MBS Based Schemes 113 5.4.2 Link Adaptation Schemes 114 5.4.3 Cross Layer Resource Allocation Schemes 115 5.4.4 MBSFN Resource Allocation Scheme 115 5.5 Bandwidth Expansion Schemes 117 5.5.1 CoMP Based Coverage Expansion 117 5.5.2 Time Compression (TCoM) Scheme 118 5.5.3 Bandwidth Expansion Mode (BEM) Scheme 119 5.5.4 Component Carrier Based Schemes 121 5.5.5 Scheduling Based Schemes 122 5.6 Load Balancing Schemes 123 5.6.1 Distance Aware Schemes 123 5.6.2 Coverage Expansion Based Schemes 125 5.6.3 Distributed Schemes 125 5.6.4 Shared Relay Based Schemes 127 5.6.5 CRN Adopted Switching Off of a BS 128 5.6.6 Reduced Early Handover (REHO) Scheme 129 5.7 Comparative Analysis 130 5.8 Open Research Issues 135 5.9 Summary 139 References 140 6 Spectrum Sensing Mechanisms in Cognitive Radio Based LTE Femtocells 150Tazeen S. Syed and Ghazanfar Ali Safdar 6.1 Fundamentals of Signal Processing 151 6.1.1 Channel Model 151 6.1.1.1 Additive Gaussian Noise Channel 151 6.1.1.2 Linear Filter Channel 152 6.1.1.3 Band Limited Channel 153 6.1.2 Modulation Technique 153 6.1.3 Error Probability 154 6.2 Spectrum Sensing Techniques 155 6.2.1 Primary Transmitter Detection 155 6.2.1.1 Energy Detector 156 6.2.1.2 Matched Filter Detection 158 6.2.1.3 Cyclostationary Feature Detection 159 6.2.1.4 Waveform Detection 160 6.2.1.5 Wavelet Detection 161 6.2.1.6 Hybrid Sensing 162 6.2.1.7 Multi]Taper Spectrum Sensing 163 6.2.2 Collaborative/Cooperative Detection 163 6.2.3 Interference Temperature Detection 166 6.2.4 Primary Receiver Detection 166 6.3 History Assisted Spectrum Sensing 166 6.4 Model]and Statistics]Based Spectrum Sensing Classification 167 6.5 Challenges and Issues 172 6.6 Summary 176 References 177 Part II Antennas for LTE Femtocells 185 7 Antenna Consideration for LTE Femtocells 187Masood Ur Rehman 7.1 Antenna Fundamentals 187 7.1.1 Input Impedance and Matching 188 7.1.2 Bandwidth 189 7.1.3 Radiation Pattern 190 7.1.4 Directivity and Gain 191 7.1.5 Efficiency 193 7.1.6 Polarization 193 7.2 Antenna Requirements for LTE Femtocells 196 7.2.1 Frequency Bands 197 7.2.2 Form Factor and Size Limitation 201 7.2.3 Impedance Matching, Directivity, Gain and Efficiency 201 7.2.4 Directionality 202 7.2.5 Polarization 203 7.2.6 Human Body Effects and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) 204 7.2.7 Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) 205 References 206 8 Multiband Antennas for LTE Femtocells 209Masood Ur Rehman and Xiaodong Yang 8.1 Fundamentals of Multiband Antennas 209 8.1.1 Multiband Techniques 210 8.1.1.1 Higher Order Resonances 210 8.1.1.2 Multiple Resonant Structures 211 8.2 Types of Multiband Antennas 211 8.3 Multiband Antenna Design: Case Studies 214 8.3.1 Multi]Slot Antenna 215 8.3.1.1 Antenna Geometry 215 8.3.1.2 Antenna Performance Evaluation 215 8.3.2 Patch]Loop Combination Antenna 220 8.3.2.1 Antenna Configuration 220 8.3.2.2 Antenna Performance 220 8.4 Open Research Issues 227 References 227 9 Reconfigurable Antennas for LTE Femtocells 230Masood Ur Rehman and Waqas Farooq 9.1 Fundamentals of Reconfigurable Antennas 230 9.1.1 Types of Reconfigurable Antennas 231 9.1.1.1 Use of Switches 232 9.1.1.2 Structural and Mechanical Changes 232 9.1.1.3 Material Changes 234 9.2 Realization of Reconfigurable Antennas 234 9.3 Rectangular Patch Reconfigurable LTE Femtocell Antenna 237 9.3.1 Design Conception 237 9.3.2 Frequency Reconfiguration Mode 239 9.3.3 Antenna Performance Evaluation 240 9.4 Circular Patch Reconfigurable LTE Femtocell Antenna 246 9.4.1 Frequency Reconfiguration Mode 248 9.4.2 Antenna Performance Evaluation 248 9.5 Open Research Issues 253 References 254 10 Multimode Antennas for LTE Femtocells 259Oluyemi Peter Falade, Xiaodong Chen and Masood Ur Rehman 10.1 Multimode Antennas: Fundamentals and Types 260 10.2 Design of a Compact Multimode LTE Femtocell Antenna for Handheld Devices 261 10.2.1 Numerical Analysis 263 10.2.2 Experimental Investigation 266 10.3 Design of a Multifunctional Compact Antenna for LTE Femtocells and GNSS Systems 268 10.3.1 Numerical Analysis 273 10.3.2 Experimental Investigation 279 10.4 Summary 284 10.5 Open Challenges and Issues 284 References 284 11 Human Body Effects on LTE Femtocell Antennas 289Masood Ur Rehman and Qammer Hussain Abbasi 11.1 Interaction of the Human Body with Antennas 290 11.2 Numerical Modelling of the Human Body 291 11.2.1 Evaluation and Comparison of Numerical Models of Human Body 294 11.2.1.1 On]Body Transmission 294 11.2.1.2 Effects on Antenna Radiation Pattern 297 11.2.1.3 Electric Field Distribution 299 11.2.1.4 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) 300 11.3 Evaluation of Human Body Effects on LTE Femtocell Antennas 305 11.3.1 On]Body Antenna Placement 308 11.3.2 Antenna]Body Separation 310 11.3.3 On]Body LTE Channel Characterization 312 11.3.4 On]Off Body LTE Channel Characterization 313 11.3.5 Body]to]Body LTE Channel Characterization 315 11.4 Open Research Issues 316 References 317 12 The Road Ahead for LTE Femtocells 322Masood Ur Rehman and Ghazanfar Ali Safdar 12.1 Future Prospects and Challenges 323 12.1.1 Spectrum Sharing 324 12.1.2 Intelligent/Efficient Spectrum Sensing Schemes 324 12.1.3 Primary/Secondary User Issue 325 12.1.4 Energy Saving 325 12.1.5 Security 326 12.1.6 Pilot Power/Coverage Radius Issue 326 12.1.7 Signalling Overhead 326 12.1.8 Proximity Services 326 12.1.9 The Internet]of]Things (IoT) 327 12.1.10 The Age of Big Data 328 12.1.11 5G and Femtocells 328 12.1.12 Antenna Design and Channel Modelling 328 References 330 Index 332

Read more less

Book SynopsisAllows the reader to deepen their understanding of various technologies for both fixed power supply installations of railway systems and for railway rolling stock This book explores the electric railway systems that play a crucial role in the mitigation of congestion and pollution caused by road traffic. It is divided into two parts: the first covering fixed power supply systems, and the second concerning the systems for railway rolling stock. In particular, after a historical introduction to the framework of technological solutions in current use, the authors investigate electrification systems for the power supply of rail vehicles, trams, and subways. Electrical Railway Transportation Systems explores the direct current systems used throughout the world for urban and suburban transport, which are also used in various countries for regional transport. It provides a study of alternating current systems, whether for power supply frequency or for special railway frequency, that are usTable of ContentsForeword xiii Acknowledgments xv 1. Introduction to Railway Systems 1 1.1 Traction Electrification Systems 1 1.1.1 DC Electrification 5 1.1.2 Single-Phase Electrification at Railway Frequency 7 1.1.3 Single-Phase Electrification at Mains Frequency 8 1.1.4 Three-Phase Electrification at Railway Frequency 9 1.2 Types of Electric Power Supply in Railway Lines 12 1.3 Track and Train Wheel 13 2. Basic Notions for the Study of Electric Traction Systems 17 2.1 The Park Transform 17 2.1.1 The Stationary Reference Frame Park Transform 18 2.1.2 Representation of Space Vectors 19 2.1.3 The Park Transform and Symmetrical Components 28 2.1.4 Powers in the Park Variables 31 2.1.5 Stationary Reference Frame Three-Phase Components 33 2.1.6 Rotary Reference Frame Rotating Park Transform 33 2.1.7 Final Considerations Regarding the Park Transform 39 2.2 Graetz Diode Bridge Rectifiers 42 2.2.1 Six-Pulse Rectifier 42 2.2.2 Twelve-Pulse Rectifiers 47 2.3 Thyristor Rectifiers 50 2.3.1 Phase Control 51 2.3.2 Noninstantaneous Switching 53 2.4 Forced Switching Converters 57 2.4.1 Sinusoidal PWM Modulation 57 2.4.2 Complete Single-Phase Full-Bridge Inverter 60 2.4.3 The Three-Phase Inverter 63 2.4.4 Converters Operating as Rectifiers 68 2.4.5 PWM Rectifier with Unitary Power Factor 70 2.4.6 Control Techniques for PWM Rectifiers 74 2.4.7 Multilevel Converters 82 3. DC Railway Electrification Systems 99 3.1 Connection of Electrical Substations 100 3.2 Structure of Traction Power Substation 103 3.2.1 Diagram of a Conversion Substation 104 3.3 Braking Energy Recovery Systems for DC Railway Applications 133 3.3.1 Braking Energy Recovery Systems in Subway Lines 134 3.4 Contact Lines 139 3.4.1 Constructive Aspects of the Line 142 3.4.2 Catenary Suspension 142 3.4.3 Counterweight and Automatic Regulation 144 3.4.4 Electrical Calculations of the Traction Lines 146 3.4.5 Voltage Drops 148 3.4.6 Short Circuit and Contact Line Protection 162 3.5 Probabilistic Methods for Rating the TPSS 166 3.5.1 The Probabilistic Method: General Information and Conditions 167 3.5.2 Representation of Absorption in a Train 167 3.5.3 Supply of a Substation 169 3.5.4 Power Supply by a Single Substation 173 3.5.5 Form Factor for Substation 174 3.5.6 Power Supply with Several Substations 174 4. AC Systems at Mains Frequency 177 4.1 Configuration of the Power Supply System 178 4.1.1 Substations with Transformers in Parallel 180 4.1.2 The Scott Diagram 180 4.1.3 The V Diagram 182 4.1.4 Order Sequence 6 183 4.1.5 Evolution of Solutions 183 4.2 Substation Diagram 185 4.3 25 kV Contact Line Power Supply 186 4.3.1 Line Circuit 186 4.4 2 × 25 kV–50 Hz Systems 188 4.4.1 Transformer 188 4.4.2 Autotransformer 196 4.4.3 Overhead Power Lines 198 4.4.4 Feeder 204 4.4.5 Track 205 4.4.6 The Ideal Functioning of the Autotransformer System 208 4.5 Mathematical–Physical Study of the Functioning 209 4.5.1 Circuit Equations of the 2 × 25 kV–50 Hz System 209 4.5.2 Calculation of the Line Inductance 216 4.6 Creating Autotransformer Systems 224 4.6.1 Primary Power Supply 224 4.6.2 Traction Power Substations (TPSS) 228 4.6.3 Auxiliary Points 231 4.6.4 Service Point 242 4.6.5 Overhead Lines and Grounding Circuits 243 4.6.6 Auxiliary Services’ Power Supply and Line Users 246 4.6.7 Ups 247 4.6.8 Pole Transformation Points 252 4.6.9 LV Section 253 5. Single-Phase Networks at Railway Frequency 255 5.1 Centralized Distribution 255 5.1.1 Contact Line Power Supply 258 5.2 The Distributed Conversion System 258 5.2.1 Electronic Converters 260 6. Electromagnetic Compatibility 263 6.1 Interference Phenomena 265 6.1.1 Conducted Interference Phenomena 265 6.1.2 Induced Type Interference Phenomena 274 6.1.3 Capacitive Interference Phenomena 284 6.1.4 Radiated Interference Phenomena 285 6.1.5 Electromagnetic Fields Inside the Train 286 6.2 Stray Currents 287 6.2.1 Origin of Stray Currents 288 6.2.2 Implications for the Transport System Infrastructure 290 6.2.3 Implications on Underground Structures Located Near the Transport System 294 7. Elements of Transport Technology 297 7.1 Introduction 297 7.2 The Mechanical Aspects of Electric Traction Vehicles 297 7.3 Rail Vehicles with Bogie Structures 299 7.4 Rolling Stock Wheel Arrangements 301 7.5 Classification of Rolling Stock 302 7.6 The Wheel–Ground Kinematic Pair 306 7.7 Vehicular Motion 307 7.8 The Adhesion Factor 308 7.9 The Adhesion Conditions of Individual Railcars and Trains 310 7.10 The Adhesion Coefficient 312 7.11 Practical Values for the Adhesion Coefficient 313 7.12 Resistance to Motion 314 7.13 Air Resistance 317 7.14 Resistance to Forward Motion 318 7.15 Incidental Resistances 321 7.16 Overall Resistances 324 7.17 Tractive Effort Diagram of Traction Vehicles 324 7.18 Determining the Mechanical Characteristic 327 7.19 Variations in Wheelset Load 330 7.20 The Traction Diagram 333 7.21 Start-up 335 7.22 The Deceleration and Braking Phase 338 7.23 Average and Commercial Speeds 339 7.24 Braking Systems 341 7.25 Operational Speed Limits 343 7.26 Motion Transmission 348 7.27 Performance Required from a Traction Drive 350 7.28 Introduction to Traction Drives 354 8. DC Motor Drives 359 8.1 Construction Features 359 8.2 Nominal Data 360 8.3 Motor Schematics 361 8.4 Magnetic Circuit 362 8.5 No-Load Operation 364 8.6 No-Load Losses 365 8.6.1 Mechanical Losses 365 8.6.2 Rotor Core Losses 366 8.6.3 No-Load Test 367 8.7 Load Operation 368 8.7.1 Armature Core or Stack Reaction 368 8.7.2 Load Magnetization Characteristic 370 8.7.3 Interpoles 370 8.7.4 Compensator Winding Effect 371 8.8 Voltage Drops and Starting Conditions 372 8.8.1 Voltage Drops 372 8.8.2 Starting Conditions 372 8.9 Speed Characteristic 373 8.9.1 Air Gap Torque 374 8.10 Power Losses and Efficiency 374 8.11 Tractive Effort Diagram 376 8.12 Speed Regulation 378 8.12.1 Traditional Drives 379 8.12.2 Electronic Drives 379 8.13 Voltage Regulation 379 8.14 Field Regulation 381 8.14.1 Dynamic Behavior of Inductive Shunt Field Regulation 382 8.14.2 Power Losses and Efficiency 386 8.14.3 Torque and Tractive Effort Diagram 386 8.14.4 Coefficient of Elasticity 386 8.15 Forward/Reverse Drive 387 8.15.1 Direct Command Forward/Reverse Drives 388 8.15.2 Indirect Command Forward/Reverse Drives 389 8.15.3 Separate Field Motors 389 8.16 Speed Control 390 8.17 Rheostatic Regulation 391 8.17.1 Rheostat Sections 393 8.17.2 Approaching Positions 395 8.18 Automatic Starting Conditions 396 8.19 Series–Parallel Connection of the Motors 396 8.20 Series–Parallel Transition 398 8.20.1 Short Circuit Transition 398 8.20.2 Bridge Transition 401 8.20.3 Comparison of the Two Systems 402 8.21 Energy Loss in the Starting Rheostat 402 8.21.1 Parallel Motors 404 8.21.2 Series–Parallel Starting Conditions 404 8.21.3 Comparison 405 8.22 Electronic DC Motor Drives 405 8.22.1 Chopper Description 406 8.22.2 Operating Principle of an Ideal Chopper 409 8.22.3 Real Chopper Operation 413 8.22.4 Chopper Regulation During Vehicle Operation Phases 416 8.22.5 Harmonic Currents Generated by the Chopper 419 9. AC Motor Drives 423 9.1 Drives with Induction Motors 423 9.1.1 The Advantages of Induction Machines 424 9.1.2 Operating Principle of an Induction Motor 425 9.1.3 Tractive Effort Diagram of the Motor 427 9.1.4 Operation of the Induction Motor at Variable Speeds 429 9.1.5 Generation of the Ideal Tractive Effort Diagram 431 9.1.6 Torque and Speed Control in an Induction Machine 434 9.1.7 Speed Reverse 452 9.2 Drives with Permanent Magnet Motors 453 9.2.1 Use of Permanent Magnets 453 9.2.2 Main Properties of a Magnet 454 9.2.3 Magnet Stability 457 9.2.4 Reluctance Variations and Demagnetizing Fields 459 9.2.5 Use of Permanent Magnets in Electrical Machines 459 9.2.6 Model of a Synchronous Machine with Permanent Magnets 466 9.2.7 Control Techniques for PM Synchronous Machines 479 9.2.8 Use of PMSMS in Electric Traction 491 9.2.9 Design Criteria for Limiting Fault Conditions 495 10. Current Collecting Systems, Protection Systems, and Auxiliary Services onboard Vehicles 505 10.1 Current Collecting System 505 10.1.1 Pantograph 506 10.1.2 Current Collecting Quality 507 10.1.3 Third Rail 512 10.2 Onboard Protection Systems 514 10.3 Electrical Power Systems Auxiliary Services 515 10.4 Batteries 517 10.4.1 Electrochemical Batteries 518 10.4.2 Batteries for Railway Applications 521 10.4.3 Battery Variables and Parameters 523 10.4.4 Battery Sizing 526 10.5 Compressed Air Production 526 10.6 The Braking System 527 10.6.1 Westinghouse System (Compressed Air Brake) 528 10.6.2 Electropneumatic System (EP Brake) 528 10.6.3 Electrodynamic Brake (ED Brake) 529 10.6.4 The Electrohydraulic Brake 529 10.6.5 Eddy Current Brake 530 10.6.6 Electromagnetic Runner Brakes 532 10.6.7 Brake Control Unit (BCU) 532 10.6.8 Vehicle Air Conditioning: the HVAC System 534 10.6.9 Passengers Information System (PIS) 537 11. Multisystem Rolling Stocks 539 11.1 Transformer 540 11.1.1 Multivoltage and Multifrequency Transformer Operation 540 11.1.2 Power Electronic Traction Transformer (PETT) 541 11.1.3 Operation as an Inductor 543 11.2 Four-Quadrant Converter 544 11.2.1 Stability Analysis of the 4Q Converter 549 11.2.2 Interleaving of Multiple 4Q Converters 559 11.3 Reconfiguration of the Traction Circuit During the Power Supply Systems Changeover 564 11.3.1 Example of Transition between 25 kV AC and 3 kV DC 564 11.3.2 Example of a Transformer in Multisystem Vehicles 567 12. Self-Propelled Vehicles 571 12.1 Diesel–Electric Traction 571 12.1.1 Characteristics of the Diesel Engine 573 12.1.2 Diesel Engine and Transmission Regulation 576 12.1.3 Electric Transmission 576 12.1.4 Multiengine Systems 583 12.1.5 Dual-Power Vehicles 584 12.2 Fuel Cell Trains 585 12.2.1 Fuel Cell Vehicle 588 Index 591

Read more less

Book SynopsisA complete guide to the state of the art theoretical and manufacturing developments of body sensor network, design, and algorithms In Body Sensor Networking, Design, and Algorithms, professionals in the field of Biomedical Engineering and e-health get an in-depth look at advancements, changes, and developments. When it comes to advances in the industry, the text looks at cooperative networks, noninvasive and implantable sensor microelectronics, wireless sensor networks, platforms, and optimizationto name a few. Each chapter provides essential information needed to understand the current landscape of technology and mechanical developments. It covers subjects including Physiological Sensors, Sleep Stage Classification, Contactless Monitoring, and much more. Among the many topics covered, the text also includes additions such as: Over 120 figures, charts, and tables to assist with the understanding of complex topicsDesign examples and detailed experimental worksA companion website fTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 History of Wearable Technology 1 1.2 Introduction to BSN Technology 2 1.3 BSN Architecture 7 1.4 Layout of the Book 10 References 11 2 Physical, Physiological, Biological, and Behavioural States of the Human Body 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Physical State of the Human Body 17 2.3 Physiological State of Human Body 19 2.4 Biological State of Human Body 23 2.5 Psychological and Behavioural State of the Human Body 24 2.6 Summary and Conclusions 30 References 31 3 Physical, Physiological, and Biological Measurements 35 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Wearable Technology for Gait Monitoring 35 3.2.1 Accelerometer and Its Application to Gait Monitoring 36 3.2.1.1 How Accelerometers Operate 37 3.2.1.2 Accelerometers in Practice 39 3.2.2 Gyroscope and IMU 40 3.2.3 Force Plates 41 3.2.4 Goniometer 41 3.2.5 Electromyography 41 3.2.6 Sensing Fabric 42 3.3 Physiological Sensors 42 3.3.1 Multichannel Measurement of the Nerves Electric Potentials 42 3.3.2 Other Sensors 45 3.4 Biological Sensors 48 3.4.1 The Structures of Biological Sensors – The Principles 48 3.4.2 Emerging Biosensor Technologies 51 3.5 Conclusions 51 References 53 4 Ambulatory and Popular Sensor Measurements 59 4.1 Introduction 59 4.2 Heart Rate 59 4.2.1 HR During Physical Exercise 60 4.3 Respiration 62 4.4 Blood Oxygen Saturation Level 67 4.5 Blood Pressure 70 4.5.1 Cuffless Blood Pressure Measurement 71 4.6 Blood Glucose 72 4.7 Body Temperature 73 4.8 Commercial Sensors 74 4.9 Conclusions 75 References 76 5 Polysomnography and Sleep Analysis 83 5.1 Introduction 83 5.2 Polysomnography 84 5.3 Sleep Stage Classification 85 5.3.1 Sleep Stages 85 5.3.2 EEG-Based Classification of Sleep Stages 86 5.3.2.1 Time Domain Features 86 5.3.2.2 Frequency Domain Features 87 5.3.2.3 Time-frequency Domain Features 87 5.3.2.4 Short-time Fourier Transform 88 5.3.2.5 Wavelet Transform 88 5.3.2.6 Matching Pursuit 88 5.3.2.7 Empirical Mode Decomposition 89 5.3.2.8 Nonlinear Features 89 5.3.3 Classification Techniques 90 5.3.3.1 Using Neural Networks 90 5.3.3.2 Application of CNNs 92 5.3.4 Sleep Stage Scoring Using CNN 94 5.4 Monitoring Movements and Body Position During Sleep 96 5.5 Conclusions 99 References 100 6 Noninvasive, Intrusive, and Nonintrusive Measurements 107 6.1 Introduction 107 6.2 Noninvasive Monitoring 107 6.3 Contactless Monitoring 109 6.3.1 Remote Photoplethysmography 109 6.3.1.1 Derivation of Remote PPG 110 6.3.2 Spectral Analysis Using Autoregressive Modelling 111 6.3.3 Estimation of Physiological Parameters Using Remote PPG 114 6.3.3.1 Heart Rate Estimation 114 6.3.3.2 Respiratory Rate Estimation 116 6.3.3.3 Blood Oxygen Saturation Level Estimation 117 6.3.3.4 Pulse Transmit Time Estimation 118 6.3.3.5 Video Pre-processing 119 6.3.3.6 Selection of Regions of Interest 120 6.3.3.7 Derivation of the rPPG Signal 120 6.3.3.8 Processing rPPG Signals 120 6.3.3.9 Calculation of rPTT/dPTT 121 6.4 Implantable Sensor Systems 122 6.5 Conclusions 123 References 124 7 Single and Multiple Sensor Networking for Gait Analysis 129 7.1 Introduction 129 7.2 Gait Events and Parameters 129 7.2.1 Gait Events 129 7.2.2 Gait Parameters 130 7.2.2.1 Temporal Gait Parameters 130 7.2.2.2 Spatial Gait Parameters 132 7.2.2.3 Kinetic Gait Parameters 133 7.2.2.4 Kinematic Gait Parameters 133 7.3 Standard Gait Measurement Systems 135 7.3.1 Foot Plantar Pressure System 135 7.3.2 Force-plate Measurement System 135 7.3.3 Optical Motion Capture Systems 137 7.3.4 Microsoft Kinect Image and Depth Sensors 138 7.4 Wearable Sensors for Gait Analysis 140 7.4.1 Single Sensor Platforms 140 7.4.2 Multiple Sensor Platforms 141 7.5 Gait Analysis Algorithms Based on Accelerometer/Gyroscope 143 7.5.1 Estimation of Gait Events 143 7.5.2 Estimation of Gait Parameters 144 7.5.2.1 Estimation of Orientation 144 7.5.2.2 Estimating Angles Using Accelerometers 146 7.5.2.3 Estimating Angles Using Gyroscopes 147 7.5.2.4 Fusing Accelerometer and Gyroscope Data 148 7.5.2.5 Quaternion Based Estimation of Orientation 148 7.5.2.6 Step Length Estimation 150 7.6 Conclusions 152 References 152 8 Popular Health Monitoring Systems 157 8.1 Introduction 157 8.2 Technology for Data Acquisition 157 8.3 Physiological Health Monitoring Technologies 158 8.3.1 Predicting Patient Deterioration 158 8.3.2 Ambient Assisted Living: Monitoring Daily Living Activities 163 8.3.3 Monitoring Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease Patients 164 8.3.4 Movement Tracking and Fall Detection/Prevention 165 8.3.5 Monitoring Patients with Dementia 166 8.3.6 Monitoring Patients with Parkinson’s Disease 168 8.3.7 Odour Sensitivity Measurement 172 8.4 Conclusions 174 References 174 9 Machine Learning for Sensor Networks 183 9.1 Introduction 183 9.2 Clustering Approaches 187 9.2.1 k-means Clustering Algorithm 187 9.2.2 Iterative Self-organising Data Analysis Technique 188 9.2.3 Gap Statistics 188 9.2.4 Density-based Clustering 189 9.2.5 Affinity-based Clustering 190 9.2.6 Deep Clustering 190 9.2.7 Semi-supervised Clustering 191 9.2.7.1 Basic Semi-supervised Techniques 191 9.2.7.2 Deep Semi-supervised Techniques 191 9.2.8 Fuzzy Clustering 192 9.3 Classification Algorithms 193 9.3.1 Decision Trees 193 9.3.2 Random Forest 194 9.3.3 Linear Discriminant Analysis 194 9.3.4 Support Vector Machines 195 9.3.5 k-nearest Neighbour 201 9.3.6 Gaussian Mixture Model 201 9.3.7 Logistic Regression 202 9.3.8 Reinforcement Learning 202 9.3.9 Artificial Neural Networks 203 9.3.9.1 Deep Neural Networks 204 9.3.9.2 Convolutional Neural Networks 205 9.3.9.3 Recent DNN Approaches 207 9.3.10 Gaussian Processes 208 9.3.11 Neural Processes 208 9.3.12 Graph Convolutional Networks 209 9.3.13 Naïve Bayes Classifier 209 9.3.14 Hidden Markov Model 210 9.3.14.1 Forward Algorithm 212 9.3.14.2 Backward Algorithm 212 9.3.14.3 HMM Design 212 9.4 Common Spatial Patterns 213 9.5 Applications of Machine Learning in BSNs and WSNs 216 9.5.1 Human Activity Detection 216 9.5.2 Scoring Sleep Stages 217 9.5.3 Fault Detection 218 9.5.4 Gas Pipeline Leakage Detection 218 9.5.5 Measuring Pollution Level 218 9.5.6 Fatigue-tracking and Classification System 218 9.5.7 Eye-blink Artefact Removal from EEG Signals 219 9.5.8 Seizure Detection 219 9.5.9 BCI Applications 219 9.6 Conclusions 219 References 220 10 Signal Processing for Sensor Networks 229 10.1 Introduction 229 10.2 Signal Processing Problems for Sensor Networks 230 10.3 Fundamental Concepts in Signal Processing 231 10.3.1 Nonlinearity of the Medium 231 10.3.2 Nonstationarity 232 10.3.3 Signal Segmentation 233 10.3.4 Signal Filtering 236 10.4 Mathematical Data Models 237 10.4.1 Linear Models 237 10.4.1.1 Prediction Method 237 10.4.1.2 Prony’s Method 238 10.4.1.3 Singular Spectrum Analysis 240 10.4.2 Nonlinear Modelling 242 10.4.3 Gaussian Mixture Model 243 10.5 Transform Domain Signal Analysis 245 10.6 Time-frequency Domain Transforms 245 10.6.1 Short-time Fourier Transform 245 10.6.2 Wavelet Transform 246 10.6.2.1 Continuous Wavelet Transform 246 10.6.2.2 Examples of Continuous Wavelets 247 10.6.2.3 Discrete Time Wavelet Transform 247 10.6.3 Multiresolution Analysis 248 10.6.4 Synchro-squeezing Wavelet Transform 249 10.7 Adaptive Filtering 250 10.8 Cooperative Adaptive Filtering 251 10.8.1 Diffusion Adaptation 252 10.9 Multichannel Signal Processing 254 10.9.1 Instantaneous and Convolutive BSS Problems 255 10.9.2 Array Processing 257 10.10 Signal Processing Platforms for BANs 258 10.11 Conclusions 259 References 260 11 Communication Systems for Body Area Networks 267 11.1 Introduction 267 11.2 Short-range Communication Systems 271 11.2.1 Bluetooth 271 11.2.2 Wi-Fi 272 11.2.3 ZigBee 272 11.2.4 Radio Frequency Identification Devices 273 11.2.5 Ultrawideband 273 11.2.6 Other Short-range Communication Methods 274 11.2.7 RF Modules Available in Market 275 11.3 Limitations, Interferences, Noise, and Artefacts 275 11.4 Channel Modelling 276 11.4.1 BAN Propagation Scenarios 276 11.4.1.1 On-body Channel 276 11.4.1.2 In-body Channel 277 11.4.1.3 Off-body Channel 277 11.4.1.4 Body-to-body (or Interference) Channel 278 11.4.2 Recent Approaches to BAN Channel Modelling 278 11.4.3 Propagation Models 279 11.4.4 Standards and Guidelines 283 11.5 BAN-WSN Communications 284 11.6 Routing in WBAN 285 11.6.1 Posture-based Routing 285 11.6.2 Temperature-based Routing 286 11.6.3 Cross-layer Routing 287 11.6.4 Cluster-based Routing 288 11.6.5 QoS-based Routing 289 11.7 BAN-building Network Integration 290 11.8 Cooperative BANs 290 11.9 BAN Security 291 11.10 Conclusions 292 References 292 12 Energy Harvesting Enabled Body Sensor Networks 301 12.1 Introduction 301 12.2 Energy Conservation 302 12.3 Network Capacity 302 12.4 Energy Harvesting 303 12.5 Challenges in Energy Harvesting 304 12.6 Types of Energy Harvesting 307 12.6.1 Harvesting Energy from Kinetic Sources 308 12.6.2 Energy Sources from Radiant Sources 312 12.6.3 Energy Harvesting from Thermal Sources 312 12.6.4 Energy Harvesting from Biochemical and Chemical Sources 313 12.7 Topology Control 315 12.8 Typical Energy Harvesters for BSNs 317 12.9 Predicting Availability of Energy 318 12.10 Reliability of Energy Storage 319 12.11 Conclusions 320 References 321 13 Quality of Service, Security, and Privacy for Wearable Sensor Data 325 13.1 Introduction 325 13.2 Threats to a BAN 326 13.2.1 Denial-of-service 326 13.2.2 Man-in-the-middle Attack 327 13.2.3 Phishing and Spear Phishing Attacks 327 13.2.4 Drive-by Attack 327 13.2.5 Password Attack 328 13.2.6 SQL Injection Attack 328 13.2.7 Cross-site Scripting Attack 328 13.2.8 Eavesdropping 328 13.2.9 Birthday Attack 329 13.2.10 Malware Attack 329 13.3 Data Security and Most Common Encryption Methods 330 13.3.1 Data Encryption Standard (DES) 331 13.3.2 Triple DES 331 13.3.3 Rivest–Shamir–Adleman (RSA) 331 13.3.4 Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) 332 13.3.5 Twofish 334 13.4 Quality of Service (QoS) 334 13.4.1 Quantification of QoS 335 13.4.1.1 Data Quality Metrics 335 13.4.1.2 Network Quality Related Metrics 335 13.5 System Security 337 13.6 Privacy 339 13.7 Conclusions 339 References 340 14 Existing Projects and Platforms 345 14.1 Introduction 345 14.2 Existing Wearable Devices 347 14.3 BAN Programming Framework 348 14.4 Commercial Sensor Node Hardware Platforms 348 14.4.1 Mica2/MicaZ Motes 348 14.4.2 TelosB Mote 349 14.4.3 Indriya-Zigbee Based Platform 350 14.4.4 IRIS 350 14.4.5 iSense Core Wireless Module 351 14.4.6 Preon32 Wireless Module 351 14.4.7 Wasp Mote 352 14.4.8 WiSense Mote 352 14.4.9 panStamp NRG Mote 354 14.4.10 Jennic JN5139 354 14.5 BAN Software Platforms 355 14.5.1 Titan 355 14.5.2 CodeBlue 355 14.5.3 RehabSPOT 356 14.5.4 SPINE and SPINE2 356 14.5.5 C-SPINE 356 14.5.6 MAPS 356 14.5.7 DexterNet 356 14.6 Popular BAN Application Domains 356 14.7 Conclusions 359 References 359 15 Conclusions and Suggestions for Future Research 363 15.1 Summary 363 15.2 Future Directions in BSN Research 363 15.2.1 Smart Sensors: Intelligent, Biocompatible, and Wearable 364 15.2.2 Big Data Problem 366 15.2.3 Data Processing and Machine Learning 366 15.2.4 Decentralised and Cooperative Networks 367 15.2.5 Personalised Medicine Through Personalised Technology 367 15.2.6 Fitting BSN to 4G and 5G Communication Systems 367 15.2.7 Emerging Assistive Technology Applications 368 15.2.8 Solving Problems with Energy Harvesting 368 15.2.9 Virtual World 368 15.3 Conclusions 369 References 369 Index 373

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn important resource that examines the physical aspects of wireless communications based on mathematical and physical evidence The Physics and Mathematics of Electromagnetic Wave Propagation in Cellular Wireless Communicationdescribes the electromagnetic principles for designing a cellular wireless system and includes the subtle electromagnetic principles that are often overlooked in designing such a system. This important text explores both the physics and mathematical concepts used in deploying antennas for transmission and reception of electromagnetic signals and examines how to select the proper methodology from a wide range of scenarios. In this much-needed guide, the authorsnoted experts in the fieldexplore the principle of electromagnetics as developed through the Maxwellian principles and describe the properties of an antenna in the frequency domain. The text also includes a review of the characterization of propagation path loss in a cellular wireless environment and examiTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xvii 1 The Mystery of Wave Propagation and Radiation from an Antenna 1 Summary 1 1.1 Historical Overview of Maxwell’s Equations 3 1.2 Review of Maxwell–Hertz–Heaviside Equations 5 1.2.1 Faraday’s Law 5 1.2.2 Generalized Ampere’s Law 8 1.2.3 Gauss’s Law of Electrostatics 9 1.2.4 Gauss’s Law of Magnetostatics 10 1.2.5 Equation of Continuity 11 1.3 Development of Wave Equations 12 1.4 Methodologies for the Solution of the Wave Equations 16 1.5 General Solution of Maxwell’s Equations 19 1.6 Power (Correlation) Versus Reciprocity (Convolution) 24 1.7 Radiation and Reception Properties of a Point Source Antenna in Frequency and in Time Domain 28 1.7.1 Radiation of Fields from Point Sources 28 1.7.1.1 Far Field in Frequency Domain of a Point Radiator 29 1.7.1.2 Far Field in Time Domain of a Point Radiator 30 1.7.2 Reception Properties of a Point Receiver 31 1.8 Radiation and Reception Properties of Finite‐Sized Dipole‐Like Structures in Frequency and in Time 33 1.8.1 Radiation Fields from Wire‐Like Structures in the Frequency Domain 33 1.8.2 Radiation Fields from Wire‐Like Structures in the Time Domain 34 1.8.3 Induced Voltage on a Finite‐Sized Receive Wire‐Like Structure Due to a Transient Incident Field 34 1.8.4 Radiation Fields from Electrically Small Wire‐Like Structures in the Time Domain 35 1.9 An Expose on Channel Capacity 44 1.9.1 Shannon Channel Capacity 47 1.9.2 Gabor Channel Capacity 51 1.9.3 Hartley‐Nyquist‐Tuller Channel Capacity 53 1.10 Conclusion 56 References 57 2 Characterization of Radiating Elements Using Electromagnetic Principles in the Frequency Domain 61 Summary 61 2.1 Field Produced by a Hertzian Dipole 62 2.2 Concept of Near and Far Fields 65 2.3 Field Radiated by a Small Circular Loop 68 2.4 Field Produced by a Finite‐Sized Dipole 70 2.5 Radiation Field from a Finite‐Sized Dipole Antenna 72 2.6 Maximum Power Transfer and Efficiency 74 2.6.1 Maximum Power Transfer 75 2.6.2 Analysis Using Simple Circuits 77 2.6.3 Computed Results Using Realistic Antennas 81 2.6.4 Use/Misuse of the S‐Parameters 84 2.7 Radiation Efficiency of Electrically Small Versus Electrically Large Antenna 85 2.7.1 What is an Electrically Small Antenna (ESA)? 86 2.7.2 Performance of Electrically Small Antenna Versus Large Resonant Antennas 86 2.8 Challenges in Designing a Matched ESA 90 2.9 Near‐ and Far‐Field Properties of Antennas Deployed Over Earth 94 2.10 Use of Spatial Antenna Diversity 100 2.11 Performance of Antennas Operating Over Ground 104 2.12 Fields Inside a Dielectric Room and a Conducting Box 107 2.13 The Mathematics and Physics of an Antenna Array 120 2.14 Does Use of Multiple Antennas Makes Sense? 123 2.14.1 Is MIMO Really Better than SISO? 132 2.15 Signal Enhancement Methodology Through Adaptivity on Transmit Instead of MIMO 138 2.16 Conclusion 148 Appendix 2A Where Does the Far Field of an Antenna Really Starts Under Different Environments? 149 Summary 149 2A.1 Introduction 150 2A.2 Derivation of the Formula 2D2/λ 153 2A.3 Dipole Antennas Operating in Free Space 157 2A.4 Dipole Antennas Radiating Over an Imperfect Ground 162 2A.5 Epilogue 164 References 167 3 Mechanism of Wireless Propagation: Physics, Mathematics, and Realization 171 Summary 171 3.1 Introduction 172 3.2 Description and Analysis of Measured Data on Propagation Available in the Literature 173 3.3 Electromagnetic Analysis of Propagation Path Loss Using a Macro Model 184 3.4 Accurate Numerical Evaluation of the Fields Near an Earth–Air Interface 190 3.5 Use of the Numerically Accurate Macro Model for Analysis of Okumura et al.’s Measurement Data 192 3.6 Visualization of the Propagation Mechanism 199 3.7 A Note on the Conventional Propagation Models 203 3.8 Refinement of the Macro Model to Take Transmitting Antenna’s Electronic and Mechanical Tilt into Account 207 3.9 Refinement of the Data Collection Mechanism and its Interpretation Through the Definition of the Proper Route 210 3.10 Lessons Learnt: Possible Elimination of Slow Fading and a Better Way to Deploy Base Station Antennas 217 3.10.1 Experimental Measurement Setup 224 3.11 Cellular Wireless Propagation Occurs Through the Zenneck Wave and not Surface Waves 227 3.12 Conclusion 233 Appendix 3A Sommerfeld Formulation for a Vertical Electric Dipole Radiating Over an Imperfect Ground Plane 234 Appendix 3B Asymptotic Evaluation of the Integrals by the Method of Steepest Descent 247 Appendix 3C Asymptotic Evaluation of the Integrals When there Exists a Pole Near the Saddle Point 252 Appendix 3D Evaluation of Fields Near the Interface 254 Appendix 3E Properties of a Zenneck Wave 258 Appendix 3F Properties of a Surface Wave 259 References 261 4 Methodologies for Ultrawideband Distortionless Transmission/ Reception of Power and Information 265 Summary 265 4.1 Introduction 266 4.2 Transient Responses from Differently Sized Dipoles 268 4.3 A Travelling Wave Antenna 276 4.4 UWB Input Pulse Exciting a Dipole of Different Lengths 279 4.5 Time Domain Responses of Some Special Antennas 281 4.5.1 Dipole Antennas 281 4.5.2 Biconical Antennas 292 4.5.3 TEM Horn Antenna 299 4.6 Two Ultrawideband Antennas of Century Bandwidth 305 4.6.1 A Century Bandwidth Bi‐Blade Antenna 306 4.6.2 Cone‐Blade Antenna 310 4.6.3 Impulse Radiating Antenna (IRA) 313 4.7 Experimental Verification of Distortionless Transmission of Ultrawideband Signals 315 4.8 Distortionless Transmission and Reception of Ultrawideband Signals Fitting the FCC Mask 327 4.8.1 Design of a T‐pulse 329 4.8.2 Synthesis of a T‐pulse Fitting the FCC Mask 331 4.8.3 Distortionless Transmission and Reception of a UWB Pulse Fitting the FCC Mask 332 4.9 Simultaneous Transmission of Information and Power in Wireless Antennas 338 4.9.1 Introduction 338 4.9.2 Formulation and Optimization of the Various Channel Capacities 342 4.9.2.1 Optimization for the Shannon Channel Capacity 342 4.9.2.2 Optimization for the Gabor Channel Capacity 344 4.9.2.3 Optimization for the Hartley‐Nyquist‐Tuller Channel Capacity 345 4.9.3 Channel Capacity Simulation of a Frequency Selective Channel Using a Pair of Transmitting and Receiving Antennas 347 4.9.4 Optimization of Each Channel Capacity Formulation 353 4.10 Effect of Broadband Matching in Simultaneous Information and Power Transfer 355 4.10.1 Problem Description 357 4.10.1.1 Total Channel Capacity 358 4.10.1.2 Power Delivery 361 4.10.1.3 Limitation on VSWR 361 4.10.2 Design of Matching Networks 362 4.10.2.1 Simplified Real Frequency Technique (SRFT) 362 4.10.2.2 Use of Non‐Foster Matching Networks 366 4.10.3 Performance Gain When Using a Matching Network 367 4.10.3.1 Constraints of VSWR < 2 367 4.10.3.2 Constraints of VSWR < 3 369 4.10.3.3 Without VSWR Constraint 371 4.10.3.4 Discussions 372 4.10.4 PCB (Printed Circuit Board) Implementation of a Broadband‐ Matched Dipole 373 4.11 Conclusion 376 References 377 Index 383

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn in-depth description of the state-of-the-art of 3D shape analysis techniques and their applications This book discusses the different topics that come under the title of 3D shape analysis. It covers the theoretical foundations and the major solutions that have been presented in the literature. It also establishes links between solutions proposed by different communities that studied 3D shape, such as mathematics and statistics, medical imaging, computer vision, and computer graphics. The first part of 3D Shape Analysis: Fundamentals, Theory, and Applications provides a review of the background concepts such as methods for the acquisition and representation of 3D geometries, and the fundamentals of geometry and topology. It specifically covers stereo matching, structured light, and intrinsic vs. extrinsic properties of shape. Parts 2 and 3 present a range of mathematical and algorithmic tools (which are used for e.g., global descriptors, keypoint detectTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Motivation 1 1.2 The 3D Shape Analysis Problem 2 1.3 About This Book 5 1.4 Notation 9 Part I Foundations 11 2 Basic Elements of 3D Geometry and Topology 13 2.1 Elements of Differential Geometry 13 2.1.1 Parametric Curves 13 2.1.2 Continuous Surfaces 15 2.1.2.1 Differential Properties of Surfaces 17 2.1.2.1.1 First Fundamental Form 17 2.1.2.1.2 Second Fundamental Form and Shape Operator 18 2.1.2.2 Curvatures 19 2.1.2.3 Laplace and Laplace–Beltrami Operators 21 2.1.3 Manifolds, Metrics, and Geodesics 22 2.1.4 Discrete Surfaces 24 2.1.4.1 Representations of Discrete Surfaces 24 2.1.4.2 Mesh Data Structures 28 2.1.4.3 Discretization of the Differential Properties of Surfaces 29 2.2 Shape, Shape Transformations, and Deformations 30 2.2.1 Shape-Preserving Transformations 31 2.2.1.1 Normalization for Translation 32 2.2.1.2 Normalization for Scale 32 2.2.1.3 Normalization for Rotation 32 2.2.1.3.1 Rotation Normalization Using Principal Component Analysis (PCA) 33 2.2.1.3.2 Rotation Normalization Using Planar Reflection Symmetry Analysis 34 2.2.2 Shape Deformations 35 2.2.3 Bending 35 2.2.4 Stretching 37 2.3 Summary and Further Reading 38 3 3D Acquisition and Preprocessing 41 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 3D Acquisition 41 3.2.1 Contact 3D Acquisition 43 3.2.1.1 Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM) 43 3.2.1.2 Arm-Based 3D Scanner 44 3.2.2 Noncontact 3D Acquisition 44 3.2.2.1 Time-of-Flight 44 3.2.2.1.1 Pulse-Based TOF 44 3.2.2.1.2 Phase Shift-Based TOF 45 3.2.2.2 Triangulation 45 3.2.2.3 Stereo 47 3.2.2.4 Structured Light 50 3.2.2.4.1 Temporal Coded Patterns 51 3.2.2.4.2 Spatial Coded Patterns 52 3.2.2.4.3 Direct Coded Patterns 55 3.2.2.5 Shape from X 55 3.3 Preprocessing 3D Models 56 3.3.1 Surface Smoothing and Fairing 57 3.3.1.1 Laplacian Smoothing 57 3.3.1.2 Taubin Smoothing 58 3.3.1.3 Curvature Flow Smoothing 58 3.3.2 Spherical Parameterization of 3D Surfaces 58 3.4 Summary and Further Reading 62 Part II 3D Shape Descriptors 65 4 Global Shape Descriptors 67 4.1 Introduction 67 4.2 Distribution-Based Descriptors 69 4.2.1 Point Sampling 69 4.2.2 Geometric Features 70 4.2.2.1 Geometric Attributes 70 4.2.2.2 Differential Attributes 71 4.2.3 Signature Construction and Comparison 72 4.3 View-Based 3D Shape Descriptors 73 4.3.1 The Light Field Descriptors (LFD) 74 4.3.2 Feature Extraction 75 4.3.3 Properties 76 4.4 Spherical Function-Based Descriptors 77 4.4.1 Spherical Shape Functions 78 4.4.2 Comparing Spherical Functions 80 4.4.2.1 Spherical Harmonic Descriptors 80 4.4.2.2 SphericalWavelet Transforms 81 4.4.2.2.1 Wavelet Coefficients as a Shape Descriptor 82 4.4.2.2.2 SphericalWavelet Energy Signatures 82 4.5 Deep Neural Network-Based 3D Descriptors 83 4.5.1 CNN-Based Image Descriptors 84 4.5.2 Multiview CNN for 3D Shapes 85 4.5.2.1 Network Architecture 86 4.5.2.2 View Aggregation using CNN 86 4.5.3 Volumetric CNN 87 4.6 Summary and Further Reading 89 5 Local Shape Descriptors 93 5.1 Introduction 93 5.2 Challenges and Criteria 94 5.2.1 Challenges 94 5.2.2 Criteria for 3D Keypoint Detection 95 5.2.3 Criteria for Local Feature Description 96 5.3 3D Keypoint Detection 96 5.3.1 Fixed-Scale Keypoint Detection 97 5.3.1.1 Curvature-Based Methods 97 5.3.1.1.1 Local Surface Patch (LSP) 98 5.3.1.2 Other Surface Variation-Based Methods 98 5.3.1.2.1 Matei’s Method 99 5.3.1.2.2 Intrinsic Shape Signatures (ISS) 99 5.3.1.2.3 Harris 3D 99 5.3.2 Adaptive-Scale Keypoint Detection 101 5.3.2.1 Extrinsic Scale-Space Based Methods 101 5.3.2.1.1 3D Shape Filtering 101 5.3.2.1.2 Multiscale Surface Variation 104 5.3.2.2 Intrinsic Scale-Space Based Methods 106 5.3.2.2.1 Scale-Space on 2D Parameterized Images 106 5.3.2.2.2 Scale-Space on 3D Shapes 109 5.3.2.2.3 Scale-Space on Transformed Domains 112 5.4 Local Feature Description 113 5.4.1 Signature-Based Methods 114 5.4.1.1 Splash 114 5.4.1.2 Point Signature 115 5.4.2 Histogram Based Methods 115 5.4.2.1 Histogram of Spatial Distributions 115 5.4.2.1.1 Spin Images 116 5.4.2.1.2 3D Shape Context 117 5.4.2.1.3 Intrinsic Shape Signature (ISS) 118 5.4.2.1.4 Rotational Projection Statistics (RoPS) 118 5.4.2.2 Histogram of Geometric Attributes 122 5.4.2.2.1 Point Feature Histograms (PFH) 122 5.4.2.2.2 Fast Point Feature Histograms (FPFH) 123 5.4.2.2.3 Signature of Histograms of Orientations (SHOT) 123 5.4.2.3 Histogram of Oriented Gradients 124 5.4.3 Covariance-Based Methods 124 5.5 Feature Aggregation Using Bag of Feature Techniques 126 5.5.1 Dictionary Construction 127 5.5.1.1 Feature Extraction 127 5.5.1.2 Codebook Construction 127 5.5.2 Coding and Pooling Schemes 128 5.5.2.1 Sparse Coding 128 5.5.2.2 Fisher Vectors 129 5.5.3 Vector of Locally Aggregated Descriptors (VLAD) 129 5.5.4 Vector of Locally Aggregated Tensors (VLAT) 130 5.6 Summary and Further Reading 131 5.6.1 Summary of 3D Keypoint Detection 131 5.6.2 Summary of Local Feature Description 132 5.6.3 Summary of Feature Aggregation 133 Part III 3D Correspondence and Registration 135 6 Rigid Registration 137 6.1 Introduction 137 6.2 Coarse Registration 138 6.2.1 Point Correspondence-Based Registration 138 6.2.1.1 The Typical Pipeline 139 6.2.1.2 Transformation Estimation from a Group of Correspondences 139 6.2.1.3 Transformation Estimation fromThree Correspondences 140 6.2.1.4 Transformation Estimation from Two Correspondences 141 6.2.1.5 Transformation Estimation from One Correspondence 142 6.2.2 Line-Based Registration 143 6.2.2.1 Line Matching Method 143 6.2.2.2 Line Clustering Method 144 6.2.2.2.1 Rotation Estimation 145 6.2.2.2.2 Translation Estimation 146 6.2.3 Surface-Based Registration 146 6.2.3.1 Principal Component Analysis (PCA) 146 6.2.3.2 RANSAC-Based DARCES 147 6.2.3.3 Four-Points Congruent Sets (4PCS) 149 6.2.3.3.1 Affine Invariants of 4-Points Set 149 6.2.3.3.2 Congruent 4-Points Extraction 151 6.2.3.3.3 The 4PCS Algorithm 151 6.3 Fine Registration 152 6.3.1 Iterative Closest Point (ICP) 153 6.3.1.1 Closest Point Search 153 6.3.1.2 Transformation Estimation 153 6.3.1.3 Summary of the ICP Method 154 6.3.2 ICP Variants 155 6.3.2.1 Point Selection 155 6.3.2.2 Point Matching 156 6.3.2.3 Point PairWeighting 156 6.3.2.4 Point Pair Rejection 156 6.3.2.5 Error Metrics 157 6.3.3 Coherent Point Drift 157 6.4 Summary and Further Reading 160 7 Nonrigid Registration 161 7.1 Introduction 161 7.2 Problem Formulation 162 7.3 Mathematical Tools 165 7.3.1 The Space of Diffeomorphisms 165 7.3.2 Parameterizing Spaces 166 7.4 Isometric Correspondence and Registration 168 7.4.1 Möbius Voting 168 7.4.2 Examples 170 7.5 Nonisometric (Elastic) Correspondence and Registration 171 7.5.1 Surface Deformation Models 171 7.5.1.1 Linear Deformation Model 171 7.5.1.2 Elastic Deformation Models 172 7.5.2 Square-Root Normal Fields (SRNF) Representation 173 7.5.3 Numerical Inversion of SRNF Maps 174 7.5.3.1 SRNF Inversion Algorithm 176 7.5.4 Correspondence 177 7.5.4.1 Optimization Over SO(3) 178 7.5.4.2 Optimization Over Γ 178 7.5.4.3 Differential of 𝜙 [184] 179 7.5.4.4 Initialization of the Gradient [184] 179 7.5.5 Elastic Registration and Geodesics 181 7.5.6 Coregistration 181 7.6 Summary and Further Reading 184 8 Semantic Correspondences 187 8.1 Introduction 187 8.2 Mathematical Formulation 188 8.3 Graph Representation 191 8.3.1 Characterizing the Local Geometry and the Spatial Relations 191 8.3.1.1 Unary Descriptors 192 8.3.1.2 Binary Descriptors 192 8.3.2 Cross Mesh Pairing of Patches 192 8.4 Energy Functions for Semantic Labeling 194 8.4.1 The Data Term 194 8.4.2 Smoothness Terms 194 8.4.2.1 Smoothness Constraints 194 8.4.2.2 Geometric Compatibility 195 8.4.2.3 Label Compatibility 196 8.4.3 The Intermesh Term 196 8.5 Semantic Labeling 196 8.5.1 Unsupervised Clustering 197 8.5.2 Learning the Labeling Likelihood 199 8.5.2.1 GentleBoost Classifier 199 8.5.2.2 Training GentleBoost Classifiers 200 8.5.3 Learning the Remaining Parameters 201 8.5.4 Optimization Using Graph Cuts 202 8.6 Examples 202 8.7 Summary and Further Reading 204 Part IV Applications 207 9 Examples of 3D Semantic Applications 209 9.1 Introduction 209 9.2 Semantics: Shape or Status 209 9.3 Semantics: Class or Identity 212 9.4 Semantics: Behavior 216 9.5 Semantics: Position 219 9.6 Summary and Further Reading 221 10 3D Face Recognition 223 10.1 Introduction 223 10.2 3D Face Recognition Tasks, Challenges and Datasets 224 10.2.1 3D Face Verification 224 10.2.2 3D Face Identification 225 10.2.3 3D Face Recognition Challenges 225 10.2.3.1 Intrinsic Transformations 225 10.2.3.2 Acquisition Conditions 226 10.2.3.3 Data Acquisition 226 10.2.3.4 Computation Time 227 10.2.4 3D Face Datasets 227 10.3 3D Face Recognition Methods 228 10.3.1 Holistic Approaches 232 10.3.1.1 Eigenfaces and Fisherfaces 232 10.3.1.1.1 Eigenfaces 232 10.3.1.1.2 Fisherfaces 233 10.3.1.2 Iterative Closest Point 234 10.3.1.3 Hausdorff Distance 234 10.3.1.4 Canonical Form 234 10.3.2 Local Feature-Based Matching 235 10.3.2.1 Keypoint-Based Methods 235 10.3.2.1.1 Landmark-Based Methods 235 10.3.2.1.2 SIFT-Like Keypoints 236 10.3.2.2 Curve-Based Features 237 10.3.2.3 Patch-Based Features 238 10.3.2.4 Other Features 239 10.4 Summary 239 11 Object Recognition in 3D Scenes 241 11.1 Introduction 241 11.2 Surface Registration-Based Object Recognition Methods 241 11.2.1 Feature Matching 242 11.2.2 Hypothesis Generation 242 11.2.2.1 Geometric Consistency-Based Hypothesis Generation 243 11.2.2.2 Pose Clustering-Based Hypothesis Generation 244 11.2.2.3 Constrained Interpretation Tree-Based Hypothesis Generation 244 11.2.2.4 RANdom SAmple Consensus-Based Hypothesis Generation 245 11.2.2.5 GameTheory-Based Hypothesis Generation 246 11.2.2.5.1 Preliminary on Game Theory 246 11.2.2.5.2 Matching Game for Transformation Hypothesis Generation 247 11.2.2.6 Generalized Hough Transform-Based Hypothesis Generation 248 11.2.3 Hypothesis Verification 249 11.2.3.1 Individual Verification 249 11.2.3.2 Global Verification 251 11.3 Machine Learning-Based Object Recognition Methods 255 11.3.1 Hough Forest-Based 3D Object Detection 255 11.3.1.1 3D Local Patch Extraction 255 11.3.1.2 3D Local Patch Representation 256 11.3.1.3 Hough Forest Training and Testing 256 11.3.1.3.1 Offline Training 256 11.3.1.3.2 Online detection 258 11.3.2 Deep Learning-Based 3D Object Recognition 260 11.3.2.1 Hand-crafted Feature-Based Methods 262 11.3.2.2 2D View-Based Methods 262 11.3.2.3 3D Voxel-Based Methods 263 11.3.2.4 3D Point Cloud-Based Methods 265 11.4 Summary and Further Reading 265 12 3D Shape Retrieval 267 12.1 Introduction 267 12.2 Benchmarks and Evaluation Criteria 270 12.2.1 3D Datasets and Benchmarks 270 12.2.2 Performance Evaluation Metrics 271 12.2.2.1 Precision 272 12.2.2.2 Recall 272 12.2.2.3 Precision-Recall Curves 273 12.2.2.4 F- and E-Measures 273 12.2.2.5 Area under Curve (AUC) or Average Precision (AP) 273 12.2.2.6 Mean Average Precision (mAP) 274 12.2.2.7 Cumulated Gain-Based Measure 274 12.2.2.8 Nearest Neighbor (NN), First-Tier (FT), and Second-Tier (ST) 275 12.3 Similarity Measures 275 12.3.1 Dissimilarity Measures 275 12.3.2 Hashing and Hamming Distance 277 12.3.3 Manifold Ranking 278 12.4 3D Shape Retrieval Algorithms 280 12.4.1 Using Handcrafted Features 280 12.4.2 Deep Learning-Based Methods 282 12.5 Summary and Further Reading 284 13 Cross-domain Retrieval 285 13.1 Introduction 285 13.2 Challenges and Datasets 287 13.2.1 Datasets 288 13.2.2 Training Data Synthesis 289 13.2.2.1 Photo Synthesis from 3D Models 289 13.2.2.2 2D Sketch Synthesis from 3D Models 290 13.3 Siamese Network for Cross-domain Retrieval 290 13.4 3D Shape-centric Deep CNN 292 13.4.1 Embedding Space Construction 293 13.4.1.1 Principal Component Analysis 295 13.4.1.2 Multi-dimensional Scaling 296 13.4.1.3 Kernel-Based Analysis 296 13.4.2 Learning Shapes from Synthesized Data 298 13.4.3 Image and Sketch Projection 298 13.5 Summary and Further Reading 300 14 Conclusions and Perspectives 301 References 303 Index 337

Read more less

Book SynopsisYour guide to advanced thermoelectric materials Written by a distinguished group of contributors, this book provides comprehensive coverage of the most up-to-date information on all aspects of advanced thermoelectric materials ranging from system biology, diagnostics, imaging, image-guided therapy, therapeutics, biosensors, and translational medicine and personalized medicine, as well as the much broader task of covering most topics of biomedical research.

Read more less

Book SynopsisRadome Electromagnetic Theory and Design explores the theoretical tools and methods required to design radomes that are fully transparent to the electromagnetic energy transmitted or received by the enclosed antenna. A radome is a weatherproof and camouflaged enclosure that protects the enclosed radar or communication antenna, and are typically used on a fixed or moving platform such as an aircraft, ship or missile. The author a noted expert in the field examines the theoretical methods that apply to all type of radomes: planar, conformal, airborne and ground based. The text offers a description of the various measurement methods that characterise the electrical parameters of a radome, and discusses their merits in terms of accuracy. This groundbreaking book brings together in one volume all the necessary theoretical tools to design radomesTrade ReviewI have been active in the areas of radome design and analysis, as a quick search of my Google scholar list of articles on Frequency Selective surfaces (FSSs) will readily show. In my opinion, this book is simply only one-of-its-kind on the subject of radomes. It is well organized, thorough, and it is easy to follow. It is useful both for practicing engineers designing radomes, graduate students learning about radomes and how to design them, and for researchers wanting to improve the existing designs. The book is an interesting mix of both the theoretical and practical aspects of analysis and design and is very well suited for use as supporting material for a Short Course on radomes. All in all, I have a very high opinion of this book, and I recommend it strongly to anyone who is either active in the field of radome, or wants to get into it in the future. I am very confident in saying that you couldn’t find a better reference on the subject, not only from an academic point of view, but also as an excellent source of information useful for designing radomes. Raj Mittra, IEEETable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 History of Radome Development 4 1.2 Types of Radomes 6 1.2.1 Solid Laminate 6 1.2.2 Inflatable 7 1.2.3 Sandwich 8 1.2.4 Metal Space Frame 8 1.2.5 Dielectric Space Frame 10 1.3 Organization of the Book 10 References 12 2 Sandwich Radomes 15 2.1 Transmission Line Analogy 16 2.2 Multilayer Analysis 17 2.3 Single Layer 22 2.4 A-Sandwich 28 2.5 B-Sandwich 31 2.6 C-Sandwich 33 References 37 Problems 37 3 Frequency Selective Surfaces (FSS) Radomes 39 3.1 Scattering Analysis of Planar FSS 40 3.2 Scattering Analysis of Multilayer FSS Structures 62 3.3 Metamaterial Radomes 72 References 86 Problems 87 4 Airborne Radomes 89 4.1 Plane Wave Spectrum Combined with Surface Integration Technique 91 4.1.1 Multilevel Algorithm for Radiation Pattern Computation 103 4.2 Surface Integration Technique Based on Equivalence Principle 109 4.3 Volume Integration Formulation Methods 123 4.3.1 Solution Using Fast Multipole Method 126 4.4 Differential Equation Formulation Methods 132 References 138 Problems 141 5 Scattering from Infinite Cylinders 145 5.1 Heterogeneous Beams—Volume Integral Equation Formulation 147 5.2 Homogeneous Beams—Surface Integral Equation Formulation 160 5.3 Conductive Beams—Surface Integral Equation Formulation 166 5.4 Tuned Beams—Surface Integral Equation Formulation 176 5.5 Scattering from Infinite Cylinders—Differential Equation Formulation 185 References 194 Problems 195 6 Ground-BasedRadomes 201 6.1 Scattering from an Individual Beam 203 6.2 Scattering Analysis of the Beams Assembly 206 6.2.1 Transmission Loss 211 6.2.2 Sidelobe Level Increment 211 6.2.3 Null Depth Increment 212 6.2.4 Beamwidth Change 212 6.2.5 Boresight Error 212 6.2.6 Boresight-Error Slope 213 6.2.7 Cross-Polarization Ratio 213 6.2.8 Antenna Noise Temperature 213 6.3 Geometry Optimization 215 6.4 Intermodulation Distortion in MSF Radomes 217 6.4.1 The IMP Effect in MSF Radomes 218 References 220 Problems 222 7 Measurement Methods 225 7.1 Panel Measurements 226 7.2 Characterization of Forward-Scattering Parameters 227 7.2.1 Far-Field Probing 228 7.2.2 Near-Field Probing 234 7.2.3 Focused-Beam System 240 References 252 Problems 254 Appendices 255 A Vector Analysis 255 A. 1 Coordinate Transformations 255 A.1. 1 Azimuth over Elevation Positioner 256 A.1. 2 Elevation over Azimuth Positioner 257 A. 2 Vector Differential Operators 258 B Dielectric Constants and Loss Tangent for Some Radome Materials 261 C Basic Antenna Theory 263 C.1 Vector Potentials 263 C.2 Far-Field Approximation 267 C.3 Directivity and Gain 269 C.4 Antenna Noise Temperature 269 C.5 Basic Array Theory 270 D Conjugate Gradient Algorithm 273 References 274 Index 275

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis textbook reviews the methodologies of reliability prediction as currently used inindustries such as electronics, automotive, aircraft, aerospace, off-highway, farm machinery, and others. It then discusses why these are not successful; and, presents methods developed by the authors for obtaining accurate information for successful prediction. The approach is founded on approaches that accurately duplicate the real world use of the product. Their approach is based on two fundamental components needed for successful reliability prediction; first, the methodology necessary; and, second, use of accelerated reliability and durability testing as a source of the necessary data. Applicable to all areas of engineering, this textbook details the newest techniques and tools to achieve successful reliabilityprediction and testing. It demonstrates practical examples of the implementation of the approaches described. This book is atool for engineers, managers, researchers, in industry, teacheTable of ContentsPreface xiLevM. Klyatis and Edward L. Anderson About the Authors xix Introduction xxiiiLevM. Klyatis 1 Analysis of Current Practices in Reliability Prediction 1LevM. Klyatis 1.1 Overview of Current Situation in Methodological Aspects of Reliability Prediction 1 1.1.1 What is a Potential Failure Mode? 5 1.1.2 General Model 6 1.1.3 Classical Test Theory 6 1.1.4 Estimation 7 1.1.5 Reliability Prediction for Mean Time Between Failures 9 1.1.6 About Reliability Software 9 1.1.6.1 MIL-HDBK-217 Predictive Method 10 1.1.6.2 Bellcore/Telcordia Predictive Method 11 1.1.6.3 Discussion of Empirical Methods 11 1.1.7 Physics of Failure Methods 12 1.1.7.1 Arrhenius’s Law 12 1.1.7.2 Eyring and Other Models 12 1.1.7.3 Hot Carrier Injection Model 13 1.1.7.4 Black Model for Electromigration 14 1.1.7.5 Discussion of Physics of Failure Methods 14 1.1.8 Life Testing Method 15 1.1.8.1 Conclusions 15 1.1.8.2 Failure of the Old Methods 17 1.1.9 Section Summary 23 1.2 Current Situation in Practical Reliability Prediction 24 1.3 From History of Reliability Prediction Development 27 1.4 Why Reliability Prediction is Not Effectively Utilized in Industry 30 References 35 Exercises 40 2 Successful Reliability Prediction for Industry 43LevM. Klyatis 2.1 Introduction 43 2.2 Step-by-Step Solution for Practical Successful Reliability Prediction 46 2.3 Successful Reliability Prediction Strategy 48 2.4 The Role of Accurate Definitions in Successful Reliability Prediction: Basic Definitions 49 2.5 Successful Reliability Prediction Methodology 53 2.5.1 Criteria of Successful Reliability Prediction Using Results of Accelerated Reliability Testing 53 2.5.2 Development of Techniques for Product Reliability Prediction Using Accelerated Reliability Testing Results 63 2.5.2.1 Basic Concepts of Reliability Prediction 63 2.5.2.2 Prediction of the Reliability Function without Finding the Accurate Analytical or Graphical Form of the Failures’ Distribution Law 64 2.5.2.3 Prediction Using Mathematical Models Without Indication of the Dependence Between Product Reliability and Different Factors of Manufacturing and Field Usage 65 2.5.2.4 Practical Example 68 References 70 Exercises 71 3 Testing as a Source of Initial Information for Successful Practical Reliability Prediction 75LevM. Klyatis 3.1 How the Testing Strategy Impacts the Level of Reliability Prediction 75 3.2 The Role of Field Influences on Accurate Simulation 80 3.3 Basic Concepts of Accelerated Reliability and Durability Testing Technology 83 3.4 Why Separate Simulation of Input Influences is not Effective in Accelerated Reliability and Durability Testing 88 References 96 Exercises 97 4 Implementation of Successful Reliability Testing and Prediction 101LevM. Klyatis 4.1 Direct Implementation: Financial Results 102 4.1.1 Cost-Effective Test Subject Development and Improvement 107 4.1.1.1 Example 1 108 4.1.1.2 Example 2 109 4.2 Standardization as a Factor in the Implementation of Reliability Testing and Prediction 110 4.2.1 Implementation of Reliability Testing and Successful Reliability Prediction through the Application of Standard EP-456 “Test and Reliability Guidelines” for Farm Machinery 110 4.2.2 How the Work in SAE G-11 Division, Reliability Committee Assisted in Implementing Accelerated Reliability Testing as a Component of Successful Reliability Prediction 111 4.2.3 Development and Implementation of Reliability Testing during the Work for the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), USA Representative for International Organization for Standardization (ISO), Reliability and Risk (IEC/ISO Joint Study Group) 149 4.3 Implementing Reliability Testing and Prediction through Presentations, Publications, Networking as Chat with the Experts, Boards, Seminars,Workshops/Symposiums Over the World 155 4.4 Implementation of Reliability Prediction and Testing through Citations and Book Reviews of Lev Klyatis’s Work Around the World 183 4.5 Why Successful Product Prediction Reliability has not been Widely Embraced by Industry 193 References 194 Exercises 195 5 Reliability and Maintainability Issues with Low-Volume, Custom, and Special-Purpose Vehicles and Equipment 197Edward L. Anderson 5.1 Introduction 197 5.2 Characteristics of Low-Volume, Custom, and Special-Purpose Vehicles and Equipment 200 5.2.1 Product Research 202 5.2.2 Vendor Strength 203 5.2.3 Select a Mature Product 203 5.2.4 Develop a Strong Purchase Contract 203 5.2.5 Establish a Symbiotic Relationship 204 5.2.6 Utilize Consensus Standards 204 5.2.7 User Groups/Professional Societies 205 5.2.8 Prerequisites 205 5.2.9 Extended Warranties 206 5.2.10 Defect/Failure Definitions/Remedies 206 5.2.11 Pre-Award and/or Preproduction Meetings 207 5.2.12 Variation 208 5.2.13 Factory Inspections 209 5.2.14 Prototype Functional or Performance Testing 210 5.2.15 Acceptance Testing 210 5.2.16 “Lead the Fleet” Utilization 211 5.2.17 Reserves 212 5.2.18 Problem Log 213 5.2.19 Self-Help 213 References 214 Exercises 214 6 Exemplary Models of Programs and Illustrations for Professional Learning in Reliability Prediction and Accelerated Reliability Testing 217LevM. Klyatis 6.1 Examples of the Program 217 6.1.1 Example 1. Several Days’ Course: “Successful Prediction of Product Reliability and Necessary Testing” 217 6.1.2 Example 2. One-Day Course “Methodology of Reliability Prediction” 218 6.1.3 Example 3. One–Two Days’ Course (or tutorial) “Accelerated Reliability and Durability Testing Technology as Source of Obtaining Information for Successful Reliability Prediction” 219 6.1.4 Example 4. One–Two Days’ Seminar “Foundation for Designing Successful Accelerated Testing” 219 6.2 Illustrations for these and Other Programs in Reliability Prediction and Testing 220 6.2.1 Examples: Text for the Slides 220 6.2.2 Examples of Figures 228 Index 243

Read more less

Book SynopsisMust-have reference on electronic packaging technology! The electronics industry is shifting towards system packaging technology due to the need for higher chip circuit density without increasing production costs. Electronic packaging, or circuit integration, is seen as a necessary strategy to achieve a performance growth of electronic circuitry in next-generation electronics. With the implementation of novel materials with specific and tunable electrical and magnetic properties, electronic packaging is highly attractive as a solution to achieve denser levels of circuit integration. The first part of the book gives an overview of electronic packaging and provides the reader with the fundamentals of the most important packaging techniques such as wire bonding, tap automatic bonding, flip chip solder joint bonding, microbump bonding, and low temperature direct Cu-to-Cu bonding. Part two consists of concepts of electronic circuit design and its role in low power devices, biomedical devTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Impact of Moore’s Law on Si Technology 3 1.3 5G Technology and AI Applications 4 1.4 3D IC Packaging Technology 7 1.5 Reliability Science and Engineering 11 1.6 The Future of Electronic Packaging Technology 13 1.7 Outline of the Book 14 References 15 Part I 17 2 Cu-to-Cu and Other Bonding Technologies in Electronic Packaging 19 2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 Wire Bonding 20 2.3 Tape-Automated Bonding 23 2.4 Flip-Chip Solder Joint Bonding 26 2.5 Micro-Bump Bonding 32 2.6 Cu-to-Cu Direct Bonding 35 2.6.1 Critical Factors for Cu-to-Cu Bonding 36 2.6.2 Analysis of Cu-to-Cu Bonding Mechanism 39 2.6.3 Microstructures at the Cu-to-Cu Bonding Interface 46 2.7 Hybrid Bonding 51 2.8 Reliability – Electromigration and Temperature Cycling Tests 54 Problems 56 References 57 3 Randomly-Oriented and (111) Uni-directionally-Oriented Nanotwin Copper 61 3.1 Introduction 61 3.2 Formation Mechanism of Nanotwin Cu 63 3.3 In Situ Measurement of Stress Evolution During Nanotwin Deposition 67 3.4 Electrodeposition of Randomly Oriented Nanotwinned Copper 69 3.5 Formation of Unidirectionally (111)-oriented Nanotwin Copper 71 3.6 Grain Growth in [111]-Oriented nt-Cu 75 3.7 Uni-directional Growth of η-Cu 6 Sn 5 in Microbumps on (111) Oriented nt-Cu 77 3.8 Low Thermal-Budget Cu-to-Cu Bonding Using [111]-Oriented nt-Cu 78 3.9 Nanotwin Cu RDL for Fanout Package and 3D IC Integration 83 Problems 86 References 87 4 Solid–Liquid Interfacial Diffusion Reaction (SLID) Between Copper and Solder 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Kinetics of Scallop-Type IMC Growth in SLID 93 4.3 A Simple Model for the Growth of Mono-Size Hemispheres 95 4.4 Theory of Flux-Driven Ripening 97 4.5 Measurement of the Nano-channel Width Between Two Scallops 100 4.6 Extremely Rapid Grain Growth in Scallop-Type Cu6Sn5 in Slid 100 Problems 102 References 103 5 Solid-State Reactions Between Copper and Solder 105 5.1 Introduction 105 5.2 Layer-Type Growth of IMC in Solid-State Reactions 106 5.3 Wagner Diffusivity 111 5.4 Kirkendall Void Formation in Cu 3 Sn 113 5.5 Sidewall Reaction to Form Porous Cu 3 Sn in μ-Bumps 114 5.6 Effect of Surface Diffusion on IMC Formation in Pillar-Type μ-Bumps 120 Problems 124 References 125 Part II 127 6 Essence of Integrated Circuits and Packaging Design 129 6.1 Introduction 129 6.2 Transistor and Interconnect Scaling 131 6.3 Circuit Design and LSI 133 6.4 System-on-Chip (SoC) and Multicore Architectures 139 6.5 System-in-Package (SiP) and Package Technology Evolution 140 6.6 3D IC Integration and 3D Silicon Integration 144 6.7 Heterogeneous Integration: An Introduction 145 Problems 146 References 146 7 Performance, Power, Thermal, and Reliability 149 7.1 Introduction 149 7.2 Field-Effect Transistor and Memory Basics 151 7.3 Performance: A Race in Early IC Design 155 7.4 Trend in Low Power 157 7.5 Trade-off between Performance and Power 159 7.6 Power Delivery and Clock Distribution Networks 160 7.7 Low-Power Design Architectures 163 7.8 Thermal Problems in IC and Package 166 7.9 Signal Integrity and Power Integrity (SI/PI) 168 7.10 Robustness: Reliability and Variability 169 Problems 171 References 172 8 2.5D/3D System-in-Packaging Integration 173 8.1 Introduction 173 8.2 2.5D IC: Redistribution Layer (RDL) and TSV-Interposer 174 8.3 2.5D IC: Silicon, Glass, and Organic Substrates 176 8.4 2.5D IC: HBM on Silicon Interposer 177 8.5 3D IC: Memory Bandwidth Challenge for High-Performance Computing 178 8.6 3D IC: Electrical and Thermal TSVs 180 8.7 3D IC: 3D-Stacked Memory and Integrated Memory Controller 182 8.8 Innovative Packaging for Modern Chips/Chiplets 183 8.9 Power Distribution for 3D IC Integration 186 8.10 Challenge and Trend 187 Problems 188 References 188 Part III 191 9 Irreversible Processes in Electronic Packaging Technology 193 9.1 Introduction 193 9.2 Flow in Open Systems 196 9.3 Entropy Production 198 9.3.1 Electrical Conduction 199 9.3.1.1 Joule Heating 201 9.3.2 Atomic Diffusion 203 9.3.3 Heat Conduction 203 9.3.4 Conjugate Forces When Temperature Is a Variable 205 9.4 Cross-Effects in Irreversible Processes 206 9.5 Cross-Effect Between Atomic Diffusion and Electrical Conduction 207 9.5.1 Electromigration and Stress-Migration in Al Strips 209 9.6 Irreversible Processes in Thermomigration 211 9.6.1 Thermomigration in Unpowered Composite Solder Joints 212 9.7 Cross-Effect Between Heat Conduction and Electrical Conduction 215 9.7.1 Seebeck Effect 216 9.7.2 Peltier Effect 218 Problems 219 References 219 10 Electromigration 221 10.1 Introduction 221 10.2 To Compare the Parameters in Atomic Diffusion and Electric Conduction 222 10.3 Basic of Electromigration 224 10.3.1 Electron Wind Force 225 10.3.2 Calculation of the Effective Charge Number 227 10.3.3 Atomic Flux Divergence Induced Electromigration Damage 228 10.3.4 Back Stress in Electromigration 230 10.4 Current Crowding and Electromigration in 3-Dimensional Circuits 231 10.4.1 Void Formation in the Low Current Density Region 234 10.4.2 Current Density Gradient Force in Electromigration 238 10.4.3 Current Crowding Induced Pancake-Type Void Formation in Flip-Chip Solder Joints 242 10.5 Joule Heating and Heat Dissipation 243 10.5.1 Joule Heating and Electromigration 244 10.5.2 Joule Heating on Mean-Time-to-Failure in Electromigration 245 Problems 245 References 246 11 Thermomigration 249 11.1 Introduction 249 11.2 Driving Force of Thermomigration 249 11.3 Analysis of Heat of Transport, Q* 250 11.4 Thermomigration Due to Heat Transfer Between Neighboring Pairs of Poweredand Unpowered Solder Joints 253 Problems 255 References 255 12 Stress-Migration 257 12.1 Introduction 257 12.2 Chemical Potential in a Stressed Solid 258 12.3 Stoney’s Equation of Biaxial Stress in Thin Films 260 12.4 Diffusional Creep 264 12.5 Spontaneous Sn Whisker Growth at Room Temperature 267 12.5.1 Morphology 267 12.5.2 Measurement of the Driving Force to Grow a Sn Whisker 271 12.5.3 Kinetics of Sn Whisker Growth 272 12.5.4 Electromigration-Induced Sn Whisker Growth in Solder Joints 275 12.6 Comparison of Driving Forces Among Electromigration, Thermomigration, and Stress-Migration 277 12.6.1 Products of Force 278 Problems 279 References 280 13 Failure Analysis 281 13.1 Introduction 281 13.2 Microstructure Change with or Without Lattice Shift 285 13.3 Statistical Analysis of Failure 287 13.3.1 Black’s Equation of MTTF for Electromigration 287 13.3.2 Weibull Distribution Function and JMA Theory of Phase Transformations 289 13.4 A Unified Model of MTTF for Electromigration, Thermomigration, and Stress-Migration 290 13.4.1 Revisit Black’s Equation of MTTF for Electromigration 290 13.4.2 MTTF for Thermomigration 292 13.4.3 MTTF for Stress-Migration 292 13.4.4 The Link Among MTTF for Electromigration, Thermomigration, and Stress-Migration 293 13.4.5 MTTF Equations for Other Irreversible Processes in Open Systems 293 13.5 Failure Analysis in Mobile Technology 293 13.5.1 Joule Heating Enhanced Electromigration Failure of Weak-Link in 2.5D IC Technology 294 13.5.2 Joule Heating Induced Thermomigration Failure Due to Thermal Crosstalk in 2.5D IC Technology 298 Problems 301 References 302 14 Artificial Intelligence in Electronic Packaging Reliability 303 14.1 Introduction 303 14.2 To Change Time-Dependent Event to Time-Independent Event 304 14.3 To Deduce MTTF from Mean Microstructure Change to Failure 305 14.4 Summary 306 Index 307

Read more less

Book SynopsisRESILIENCY OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS A revolutionary book covering the relevant concepts for resiliency-focused advancements of the distribution power grid Most resiliency and security guidelines for the power industry are focused on power transmission systems. As renewable energy and energy storage increasingly replace fossil-fuel-based power generation over the coming years, geospatially neighboring distributed energy resources will supply a majority of consumers and provide clean power through long transmission lines. These electric power distribution systemsthe final stage in the delivery of electric powercarry electricity from the transmission system to individual consumers. New distributed devices will be essential to the grid to manage this variable power generation and enhance reliability and resilience while keeping electricity affordable as the world seeks solutions to climate change and threats from extreme events. In Resiliency of Power Distribution Systems, readers aTable of ContentsAbout the Editors xv List of Contributors xvii Foreword xxi Part I Foundation 1 1 Concepts of Resiliency 3Sayonsom Chanda, Anurag K. Srivastava, and Chen-Ching Liu 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Resilience of Complex Systems 4 1.3 Related Terms and Definitions for Power System 7 1.4 Need for Grid Resiliency 10 1.5 Resiliency of Power Distribution Systems 12 1.6 Taxonomy of Resiliency 16 1.7 Tools for Enabling Resiliency 23 1.8 Summary 28 2 Measuring Resiliency Using Integrated Decision-Making Approach 35Sayonsom Chanda, Prabodh Bajpai, and Anurag K. Srivastava 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 Feature to Measure Resiliency of Power Distribution System 37 2.3 Integrated Decision-Making Approach 40 2.4 Algorithm to Enable Resilient Power Distribution System 42 2.5 Case Study 45 2.6 Conclusion 57 3 Resilience Indices Using Markov Modeling and Monte Carlo Simulation 61Mohammad Shahidehpour and Zhiyi Li 3.1 Introduction 61 3.2 Cyber-Physical Interdependencies in Power Distribution Systems 62 3.3 Resilience of Power Distribution Systems 66 3.4 Mathematical Model for Resilience Analysis 71 3.5 Simulation Results 86 3.6 Conclusions 96 4 Measuring and Enabling Resiliency for Microgrid Systems Against Cyber-attacks 101Venkatesh Venkataramanan, Adam Hahn, and Anurag K. Srivastava 4.1 Introduction 101 4.2 Testbed Description for Validating Resilience Tools 102 4.3 Test System for Validating Cyber-Physical Resiliency 102 4.4 Dependencies Between Cyber and Physical Systems 106 4.5 Cyber-Attack Implementations 106 4.6 Cyber-Physical Resiliency Metrics and Tools – CyPhyR and CP-SAM 107 4.7 Case Studies for Cyber-Physical Resiliency Analysis 117 4.8 Summary 121 5 Resilience Indicators for Electric Power Distribution Systems 125Julia Phillips and Frédéric Petit 5.1 Introduction 125 5.2 Motivations for Resilience Indicators 126 5.3 Decision Analysis Methodologies for Resilience Indicators 128 5.4 An Application to Electric Power Distribution Systems 134 5.5 FutureWork 138 5.6 Conclusion 138 6 Quantitative Model and Metrics for Distribution System Resiliency 143Alexis Kwasinski 6.1 Power Grids Performance in Recent Natural Disasters 143 6.2 Resilience Modeling Framework 149 6.3 Quantitative Resilience Metrics for Electric Power Distribution Grids 154 7 Frameworks for Analyzing Resilience 163Ted Brekken 7.1 Metrics 163 7.2 Risk Analysis Modeling 171 7.3 Power System Monte Carlo Analysis 180 7.4 Summary 181 Part II Enabling Resiliency 183 8 Resiliency-Driven Distribution Network Automation and Restoration 185Yin Xu, Chen-Ching Liu, and Ying Wang 8.1 Optimal Placement of Remote-Controlled Switches for Restoration Capability Enhancement 185 8.2 Resiliency-Driven Distribution System Restoration Using Microgrids 188 8.3 Service Restoration Using DGs in a Secondary Network 196 8.4 Summary 205 9 Improving the Electricity Network Resilience by Optimizing the Power Grid 207EngTseng Lau, Sandford Bessler, KokKeong Chai, Yue Chen, and Oliver Jung 9.1 Introduction 207 9.2 Microgrid Evaluation Tool 208 9.3 Overall Grid Modeling Tool 216 9.4 Conclusions 226 10 Robust Cyber Infrastructure for Cyber Attack Enabling Resilient Distribution System 231Hyung-Seung Kim, Junho Hong, and Seung-Jae Lee 10.1 Introduction 231 10.2 Cyber Security Analysis of Distribution System 232 10.3 Cyber Attack Scenarios for Distribution System 234 10.4 Designing Cyber Attack Resilient Distribution System 238 10.5 Mitigation Methods Against Cyber Attacks 252 10.6 Summary 257 11 A Hierarchical Control Architecture for Resilient Operation of Distribution Grids 261Ahmad R. Malekpour, Anuradha M. Annaswamy, and Jalpa Shah 11.1 Resilient Control Theory 261 11.2 A Hierarchical Control Strategy 264 11.3 Resilient Operation Using the Hierarchical Architecture 270 11.4 Conclusions 274 Part III Real-World Case Studies 279 12 A Resilience Framework Against Wildfire 281Dimitris Trakas, Nikos Hatziargyriou, Mathaios Panteli, and Pierluigi Mancarella 12.1 Introduction 281 12.2 The Hazard of Wildfires 282 12.3 Modeling and Quantifying the Resilience of Distribution Networks to Wildfires 284 12.4 Case Study Application 291 12.5 Summary 301 13 Super Microgrid in Inner Mongolia 309Jian Xu, Siyang Liao, and Yuanzhang Sun 13.1 Definition and Significance of the Super Microgrid 309 13.2 Applying Load Control Technology to the Super Microgrid 312 13.3 Research on Load–Frequency Control Methods for the Super Microgrid 317 13.4 Implementation of the Load–Frequency Control Method for the Super Microgrid 323 13.5 Operation of the Super Microgrid 325 13.6 Summary 326 14 Technology and Policy Requirements to Deliver Resiliency to Power System Networks 329Mani Vadari, Gerald Stokes, and John (JD) Hammerly 14.1 Introduction 329 14.2 A Broad Perspective on the Need to Apply Technology 332 14.3 Use of Microgrids to Improve Resiliency Response 336 14.4 Use of Drones to Perform Advanced Damage Assessment 339 14.5 Case Study: Lessons Learned and Forgotten. The North American Hurricane Experience 342 14.6 Bringing it All Together – Policy and Practice 344 14.7 Conclusions 346 References 347 Index 351

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive introduction to the fundamentals of design and applications of wireless communications Wireless Communications Systems starts by explaining the fundamentals needed to understand, design, and deploy wireless communications systems. The author, a noted expert on the topic, explores the basic concepts of signals, modulation, antennas, and propagation with a MATLAB emphasis. The book emphasizes practical applications and concepts needed by wireless engineers. The author introduces applications of wireless communications and includes information on satellite communications, radio frequency identification, and offers an overview with practical insights into the topic of multiple input multiple output (MIMO). The book also explains the security and health effects of wireless systems concerns on users and designers. Designed as a practical resource, the text contains a range of examples and pictures that illustrate many different aspects ofTable of ContentsPreface xiii Symbols and Acronyms xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Historical Development of Wireless Communications 1 1.2 Information 4 1.3 Wired Communications 7 1.4 Spectrum 9 1.5 Communication System 12 Problems 13 References 15 2 Signals and Bits 17 2.1 Analog Baseband Signals 17 2.2 Digital Baseband Signals 21 2.3 Source Coding 22 2.4 Line Coding 26 2.5 Bandwidth 27 2.6 Signal Level 28 2.7 Noise and Interference 29 2.8 Converting Analog to Digital 36 2.9 Channel Coding 39 2.10 Repetition 40 2.11 Parity Bits 40 2.12 Redundancy Checking 42 2.13 Error Correcting Codes (ECC) 45 2.13.1 Block Codes 45 2.13.2 Convolutional Codes 47 2.14 Interleaving 48 2.15 Eye Diagram 50 2.16 Intersymbol Interference 51 2.17 Raised-Cosine Filter 54 2.18 Equalization 57 Problems 62 References 67 3 Passband Signals 71 3.1 Carrier 71 3.2 Amplitude-Modulated Signals 72 3.3 Frequency-Modulated Signals 80 3.4 Phase-Modulated Signals 84 3.5 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 90 3.6 Power Spectral Density of Digital Signals 92 3.7 BER of Digital Signals 94 3.8 Multiplexing in Time and Frequency 94 3.8.1 Frequency Division Multiplexing 95 3.8.2 Time Division Multiplexing 96 3.8.3 Multiple Access 97 3.9 Spread Spectrum 100 3.9.1 Interference 101 3.9.2 Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum 101 3.9.3 Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum 103 3.9.4 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 104 Problems 106 References 109 4 Antennas 111 4.1 Signal Properties that Influence Antenna Design 111 4.1.1 Impedance 111 4.1.2 Gain 112 4.1.3 Polarization 113 4.1.4 Bandwidth 115 4.2 Common Antennas 116 4.2.1 Point Sources 116 4.2.2 Wire Antennas 117 4.2.3 Aperture Antennas 125 4.2.4 Microstrip Antennas 128 4.3 Antenna Arrays 130 4.3.1 Element Placement 131 4.3.1.1 Linear Array 131 4.3.1.2 Arbitrary Array Layouts 134 4.4 Electronic Beam Steering 136 4.5 Element Pattern 137 4.6 Low Sidelobes 138 4.7 Moving a Null to Reject Interference 140 4.8 Null Filling 142 4.9 Multiple Beams 144 4.10 Antennas for Wireless Applications 146 4.10.1 Handset Antennas 146 4.10.2 Cellular Base Station Antennas 151 4.10.3 Reflector Antennas 156 4.10.4 Antennas for Microwave Links 159 4.11 Diversity 162 4.11.1 Spatial Diversity 162 4.11.2 Frequency Diversity 165 4.11.3 Polarization Diversity 165 4.11.4 Time Diversity 166 Problems 166 References 170 5 Propagation in the Channel 173 5.1 Free Space Propagation 174 5.2 Reflection and Refraction 175 5.3 Multipath 179 5.4 Antennas over the Earth 181 5.5 Earth Surface 186 5.6 Diffraction 190 5.6.1 Fresnel Diffraction 190 5.6.2 Diffraction from Multiple Obstacles 194 5.6.3 Geometrical Theory of Diffraction 198 5.7 Signal Fading 202 5.7.1 Small-Scale Fading Models 205 5.7.1.1 Rayleigh Fading 205 5.7.1.2 Rician Fading 209 5.7.2 Approximate Channel Models 212 5.7.3 Large-Scale Fading 214 5.7.4 Channel Ray-Tracing Models 217 5.8 Doppler Effects 219 5.9 Fade Margin 223 5.10 Atmospheric Propagation 224 Problems 234 References 238 6 Satellite Communications 241 6.1 Early Development of Satellite Communications 241 6.2 Satellite Orbits 245 6.3 Satellite Link Budget 254 6.4 Bent Pipe Architecture 259 6.5 Multiple Beams 259 6.6 Stabilization 261 Problems 262 References 263 7 RFID 267 7.1 Historical Development 267 7.2 RFID System Overview 270 7.3 Tag Data 273 7.4 Tag Classes 274 7.4.1 Passive Tags 274 7.4.2 Tags with Batteries or Supercapacitors 277 7.4.2.1 Semi-Passive Tags 277 7.4.2.2 Active Tags 278 7.5 Data Encoding and Modulation 279 7.6 Reader-Tag Communication 281 7.6.1 Near Field 281 7.6.2 Far Field 285 7.6.2.1 Multiple Readers in an Interrogation Zone 285 7.6.2.2 Backscatter Communication 288 7.6.2.3 Chipless Tags 293 Problems 295 References 296 8 Direction Finding 301 8.1 Direction Finding with a Main Beam 301 8.1.1 Array Output Power 302 8.1.2 Periodogram 304 8.1.3 Wullenweber Array 305 8.2 Direction Finding with a Null 307 8.3 Adcock Arrays 308 8.4 Eigenbeams 310 8.5 Direction Finding Algorithms 313 8.5.1 Capon’s Minimum Variance 313 8.5.2 Pisarenko Harmonic Decomposition 315 8.5.3 MUSIC Algorithm 316 8.5.4 Root MUSIC 317 8.5.5 Maximum Entropy Method 318 8.5.6 ESPRIT 319 8.5.7 Estimating and Finding Sources 321 Problems 322 References 322 9 Adaptive Arrays 325 9.1 The Need for Adaptive Nulling 325 9.2 Beam Cancellation 327 9.3 Optimum Weights 328 9.4 Least Mean Square (LMS) Algorithm 329 9.5 Sample Matrix Inversion Algorithm 332 9.6 Adaptive Algorithms Based on Power Minimization 334 9.6.1 Random Search Algorithms 335 9.6.2 Output Power Minimization Algorithms 338 9.6.3 Beam Switching 340 9.6.4 Reconfigurable Antennas 340 Problems 342 References 342 10 MIMO 345 10.1 Types of MIMO 345 10.2 The Channel Matrix 349 10.3 Recovering the Transmitted Signal Using the Channel Matrix 352 10.3.1 CSIR and CSIT 352 10.3.2 Waterfilling Algorithm 356 10.3.3 CSIR and No CSIT 360 Problems 361 References 362 11 Security 365 11.1 Wireless Networks 365 11.1.1 Addresses on a Network 365 11.1.2 Types of Wireless Local Area Networks 367 11.1.3 WLAN Examples 370 11.2 Threats 373 11.3 Securing Data 376 11.3.1 Cryptography 376 11.3.2 Secret Key Cryptography 379 11.3.3 Public Key Cryptography 379 11.3.4 Hashing 380 11.4 Defenses 381 Problems 384 References 385 12 Biological Effects of RF Fields 389 12.1 RF Heating 389 12.2 RF Dosimetry 393 12.3 RF Radiation Hazards 396 12.3.1 Base Stations 397 12.3.2 Cell Phones 397 12.3.3 Medical Tests 397 12.4 Modeling RF Interactions with Humans 398 12.5 Harmful Effects of RF Radiation 400 Problems 400 References 401 Appendix A MATLAB Tips 405 A.1 Introduction 405 A.2 Plotting Hint 406 Appendix B OSI Layers 407 B.1 Layer 1: Physical 407 B.2 Layer 2: Data Link 407 B.3 Layer 3: Network 407 B.4 Layer 4: Transport 408 B.5 Layer 5: Session 408 B.6 Layer 6: Presentation 408 B.7 Layer 7: Application 409 Appendix C Cellular Generations 411 References 412 Appendix D Bluetooth 413 References 414 Appendix E Wi-Fi 415 References 416 Appendix F Software-Defined Radios 419 F.1 SDR Basics 419 F.2 SDR Hardware 421 F.3 SDR Software 422 F.4 Cognitive Radio 423 References 423 Index 425

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides technical and scientific descriptions of potential approaches used to achieve indoor positioning, ranging from sensor networks to more advanced radio-based systems This book presents a large technical overview of various approaches to achieve indoor positioning. These approaches cover those based on sensors, cameras, satellites, and other radio-based methods. The book also discusses the simplification of certain implementations, describing ways for the reader to design solutions that respect specifications and follow established techniques. Descriptions of the main techniques used for positioning, including angle measurement, distance measurements, Doppler measurements, and inertial measurements are also given. Indoor Positioning: Technologies and Performance starts with overviews of the first age of navigation, the link between time and space, the radio age, the first terrestrial positioning systems, and the era of artificial satellites. It thenTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii Introduction xv 1 A Little Piece of History… 1 1.1 The First Age of Navigation 1 1.2 Longitude Problem and Importance of Time 2 1.3 Link Between Time and Space 4 1.3.1 A Brief History of the Evolution of the Perception of Time 4 1.3.2 Comparison with the Possible Change in Our Perception of Space 6 1.4 The Radio Age 8 1.5 First Terrestrial Positioning Systems 9 1.6 The Era of Artificial Satellites 11 1.6.1 GPS System 13 1.7 New Problem: Availability and Accuracy of Positioning Systems 14 Bibliography 15 2 What Exactly Is the Indoor Positioning Problem? 17 2.1 General Introduction to Indoor Positioning 18 2.1.1 Basic Problem: Example of the Navigation Application 19 2.1.2 The “Perceived” Needs 20 2.1.3 Wide Range of Possible Technologies 22 2.1.4 Comments on the “Best” Solution 25 2.1.4.1 Local or Global Coverage 26 2.1.4.2 With orWithout Local Infrastructure 27 2.2 Is Indoor Positioning the Next “Longitude Problem”? 27 2.3 Quick Summary of the Indoor Problem 30 Bibliography 31 3 General Introduction to Positioning Techniques and Their Associated Difficulties 33 3.1 Angle-Based Positioning Technique 33 3.1.1 Pure Angle-Based Positioning Technique 33 3.1.2 Triangulation-Based Positioning Technique 34 3.2 Distance-Based Positioning Technique 35 3.2.1 Distances to Known Environment-Based Positioning Technique 35 3.2.2 Radar Method 36 3.2.3 Hyperbolic Method 38 3.2.4 Mobile Telecommunication Networks 38 3.3 Doppler-Based Positioning Approach 40 3.3.1 Doppler Radar Method 40 3.3.2 Doppler Positioning Approach 41 3.4 Physical Quantity-Based Positioning Approaches 42 3.4.1 Luminosity Measurements 42 3.4.2 Local Networks 42 3.4.3 Attitude and Heading Reference System 45 3.4.3.1 Accelerometers 46 3.4.3.2 Gyrometers 47 3.4.3.3 Odometers 47 3.4.3.4 Magnetometers 48 3.5 Image-Based Positioning Approach 49 3.6 ILS, MLS, VOR, and DME 49 3.7 Summary 51 Bibliography 52 4 Various Possible Classifications of Indoor Technologies 55 4.1 Introduction 55 4.2 Parameters to Be Considered 56 4.3 Discussion About These Parameters 57 4.3.1 Parameters Related to the Hardware of the System 57 4.3.2 Parameters Related to the Type and Performances of the System 58 4.3.3 Parameters Related to the Real Implementation of the System 59 4.3.4 Parameters Related to the Physical Aspects of the System 60 4.4 Technologies Considered 63 4.5 Complete Tables 71 4.6 Playing with the Complete Table 79 4.7 Selected Approach for the Rest of the Book 88 Bibliography 99 5 Proximity Technologies: Approaches, Performance, and Limitations 103 5.1 Bar Codes 103 5.2 Contactless Cards and Credit Cards 107 5.3 Image Recognition 109 5.4 Near-Field Communication – NFC 112 5.5 QR Codes 114 5.6 Discussion of Other Technologies 117 Bibliography 118 6 Room-Restricted Technologies: Challenges and Reliability 121 6.1 Image Markers 121 6.2 Infrared Sensors 129 6.3 Laser 130 6.4 Lidar 133 6.5 Sonar 136 6.6 Ultrasound Sensors 138 Bibliography 140 7 “Set of Rooms” Technologies 145 7.1 Radar 145 7.2 RFID 149 7.3 UWB 152 Bibliography 156 8 Building Range Technologies 159 8.1 Accelerometer 159 8.2 Bluetooth and Bluetooth Low Energy 163 8.3 Gyrometer 167 8.4 Image-Relative Displacement 169 8.5 Image SLAM 171 8.6 LiFi 171 8.7 Light Opportunity 174 8.8 Sound 176 8.9 Theodolite 177 8.10 WiFi 180 8.11 Symbolic WiFi 182 Bibliography 187 9 Building Range Technologies: The Specific Case of Indoor GNSS 191 9.1 Introduction 191 9.2 Concept of Local Transmitters 193 9.3 Pseudolites 194 9.4 Repeaters 198 9.4.1 Clock Bias Approach 199 9.4.2 Pseudo Ranges Approach 202 9.4.2.1 Theoretical Aspects 202 9.5 Repealites 206 9.5.1 Proposed System Architecture 206 9.5.2 Advantages 208 9.5.3 Limitations 209 9.6 Grin-Locs 209 9.6.1 Double Antenna 210 9.6.1.1 Angle Approach 210 9.6.1.2 Quadrics Approach 211 9.6.2 Resolution in Case of Several Double Antennas 213 9.6.2.1 Positioning with the Angle Approach 213 9.6.2.2 Positioning with the Quadric Approach 214 Bibliography 216 10 Wide Area Indoor Positioning: Block, City, and County Approaches 223 10.1 Introduction 223 10.2 Amateur Radio 225 10.3 ISM Radio Bands (433/868/…MHz) 226 10.4 Mobile Networks 227 10.4.1 First Networks (GSM) 227 10.4.2 Modern Networks (3G, 4G, and 5G) 232 10.5 LoRa and SigFox 234 10.6 AM/FM Radio 236 10.7 TV 237 Bibliography 239 11 Worldwide Indoor Positioning Technologies: Achievable Performance 241 11.1 Argos and COSPAS-SARSAT Systems 241 11.1.1 Argos System 241 11.1.2 COSPAS-SARSAT System 244 11.2 GNSS 246 11.3 High-Accuracy GNSS 248 11.3.1 HS-GNSS 249 11.3.2 A-GNSS 251 11.4 Magnetometer 253 11.5 Pressure Sensor 256 11.6 Radio Signals of Opportunity 258 11.7 Wired Networks 259 Bibliography 261 12 Combining Techniques and Technologies 267 12.1 Introduction 267 12.2 Fusion and Hybridization 269 12.2.1 Strategies for Combining Technologies 269 12.2.2 Strategies for Choosing the Optimal Data 270 12.2.2.1 Least Squares Method 273 12.2.3 Classification and Estimators 274 12.2.4 Filtering 275 12.3 Collaborative Approaches 276 12.3.1 Approach Using DopplerMeasurements to Estimate Velocities 276 12.3.2 Approach Using DopplerMeasurements in Case Some Nodes Are Fixed 280 12.3.3 Approach Using DopplerMeasurements to Estimate Angles 282 12.3.4 Approach Using Distance Measurements 285 12.3.5 Approach Analyzing the Deformation of the Network 287 12.3.6 Comments 288 12.4 General Discussion 290 Bibliography 291 13 Maps 295 13.1 Map: Not Just an Image 296 13.2 Indoor Poses Specific Problems 297 13.3 Map Representations 298 13.4 Recording Tools 301 13.5 Some Examples of the Use of Indoor Mapping 304 13.5.1 Some Guiding Applications 305 13.5.2 Some Services Associated with Mapping 306 13.6 Synthesis 308 Bibliography 308 14 Synthesis and Possible Forthcoming “Evolution” 311 14.1 Indoor Positioning: Signals of Opportunity or Local Infrastructure? 312 14.1.1 A Few Constrained Selections 312 14.1.2 Comparison of Three Approaches and Discussion 315 14.1.2.1 Inverted GNSS Radar 315 14.1.2.2 NFC-Distributed System and Its Map 316 14.1.2.3 Cooperative Approach Between Communicating Terminals 317 14.2 Discussion 319 14.3 Possible Evolution of Everybody’s Daily Life 321 14.3.1 Student’s Day 321 14.3.1.1 Morning Session at the University 322 14.3.2 Improving an Outpatient’s Visit to Hospital 323 14.3.2.1 Preparation of the “Journeys” 323 14.3.2.2 Displacements of Patients and Automatic Rescheduling 323 14.3.2.3 Reports – Analytics 323 14.3.3 Flow of People in Public Places 325 14.4 Internet of Things and Internet of Everything 326 14.5 Possible Future Approaches 327 14.6 Conclusion 330 Bibliography 331 Index 333

Read more less

Book SynopsisSMART GRID AND ENABLING TECHNOLOGIES Discover foundational topics in smart grid technology as well as an exploration of the current and future state of the industry As the relationship between fossil fuel use and climate change becomes ever clearer, the search is on for reliable, renewable and less harmful sources of energy. Sometimes called the electronet or the energy Internet, smart grids promise to integrate renewable energy, information, and communication technologies with the existing electrical grid and deliver electricity more efficiently and reliably. Smart Grid and Enabling Technologies delivers a complete vision of smart grid technology and applications, including foundational and fundamental technologies, the technology that enables smart grids, the current state of the industry, and future trends in smart energy. The book offers readers thorough discussions of modern smart grid technology, including advanced metering infrastructure, net zero energy buildings, and communicTable of ContentsAbout the Authors Acknowledgements Preface List of Abbreviations 1. Smart Grid Architectural Overview 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Fundamentals of Electric Power system 1.2.1 Electrical Power Generation 1.2.2 Electric Power Transmission 1.2.3 Electric Power Distribution 1.3 More limitations of the traditional power grid 1.3.1 Lack of circuit capacity and aging assets 1.3.2 Operation Constrains 1.3.3 Security of Supply 1.3.4 Respond to national initiatives 1.4 Smart Grid Definition 1.5 Smart Grid Characteristics 1.5.1 Achieve flexibility in the network topology 1.5.2 Improved efficiency 1.5.3 Transportation Electrification 1.5.4 Demand response support 1.5.5 Improvement in Reliability and Power Quality 1.5.6 Market-enabling 1.6 Moving towards Future grid 1.6.1 Electrification 1.6.2 Decentralization 1.6.3 Digitalization 1.7 The transformation from the traditional grid to smart grid 1.8 Smart Grid Enabling Technologies 1.9 Smart Grid Architecture 1.9.1 Distributed Generation 1.9.2 Energy Storage 1.9.3 Demand Response 1.9.4 Integrated communications 1.9.4.1 Communication Networks 1.9.4.2 Power Line Communication (PLC) 1.9.4.3 Standardization 1.9.5 Customer Engagement 1.9.6 Sensors and PMU Units 1.9.7 Smart Meters 1.10Classification of Smart Grid Control 1.11Smart Grid Challenges 1.11.1 Accessibility and acceptability 1.11.2 Accountability 1.11.3 Controllability 1.11.4 Interoperability 1.11.5 Interchangeability 1.11.6 Maintainability 1.11.7 Optimality 1.11.8 Security 1.11.9 Upgradability 1.12Organization of the Book 2. Renewable Energy: Overview, Opportunities and Challenges 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Description of Renewable Energy Sources 2.2.1 Bioenergy Energy 2.2.2 Geothermal Energy 2.2.3 Hydropower Energy 2.2.4 Marine Energy 2.2.5 Solar Energy 2.2.5.1 Photovoltaic 2.2.5.2 Concentrated Solar Power 2.2.5.3 Solar Thermal Heating and Cooling 2.2.6 Wind Energy 2.3 Renewable Energy: Growth, Investment, Benefits and Deployment 2.4 Smart Grid Enable Renewables 2.5 Conclusion 2.6 References 3. Power Electronics Converters for Distributed Generation 3.1 An overview of distributed generation systems with power electronics 3.1.1 Photovoltaic technology 3.1.2 Wind power technology 3.1.3 Energy storage systems 3.2 Power electronics for grid-connected AC smart grid 3.2.1 Voltage-source converters 3.2.2 Multilevel power converters 3.3 Power electronics enabled autonomous AC power systems 3.3.1 Converter level controls in microgrids 3.3.2 System level coordination control 3.4 Power electronics enabled autonomous DC power systems 3.4.1 Converter level controls 3.4.2 System level coordination control 3.5 Conclusion 3.6 References 4. Energy Storage Systems as an Enabling Technology for the Smart Grid 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Structure of Energy Storage System 4.3 Energy Storage Systems Classification and Description 4.4 Current State of Energy Storage Technologies 4.5 Techno-Economic Characteristics of Energy Storage Systems 4.6 Selection of Energy Storage Technology for Certain Application 4.7 Energy Storage Applications 4.8 Barriers to the Deployment of Energy Storage 4.9 Energy Storage Roadmap 4.10Conclusion 4.11References 5. Microgrids: State of the Art and Future Challenges 5.1 Introduction 5.2 DC Versus AC Microgrid 5.2.1 LVAC and LVDC Networks 5.2.2 AC Microgrid 5.2.3 DC Microgrid 5.3 Microgrid Design 5.3.1 Methodology for the Microgrid Design 5.3.2 Design Considerations 5.4 Microgrid Control 5.4.1 Primary Control Level 5.4.2 Secondary Control Level 5.4.3 Tertiary Control Level 5.5 Microgrid Economics 5.5.1 Capacity Planning 5.5.2 Operations Modeling 5.5.3 Financial Modeling 5.5.4 Barriers to Realizing Microgrids 5.6 Operation of Multi-Microgrids 5.7 Microgrid Benefits 5.7.1 Economic Benefits 5.7.2 Technical Benefits 5.7.3 Environmental Benefits 5.8 Challenges 5.9 Conclusion 5.10References 6. Smart Transportation 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Electric Vehicle Topologies 6.2.1 Battery Electric Vehicles 6.2.2 Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles 6.2.3 Hybrid Electric Vehicles 6.2.4 Fuel-Cell Electric Vehicles 6.2.5 Fuel-Cell Electric Vehicles 6.3 Powertrain Architectures 6.3.1 Series HEV Architecture 6.3.2 Parallel HEV Architecture 6.3.3 Series-Parallel HEV Architecture 6.4 Battery Technology 6.4.1 Battery Parameters 6.4.2 Common Battery Chemistries 6.5 Battery Charger Technology 6.5.1 Charging Rates and Options 6.5.2 Wireless Charging 6.6 Vehicle to Grid (V2G) Concept 6.6.1 Unidirectional V2G 6.6.2 Bidirectional V2G 6.7 Barriers to EV Adoption 6.7.1 Technological Problems 6.7.2 Social Problems 6.7.3 Economic Problems 6.8 Trends and Future Developments 6.9 Conclusion 6.10References 7. Net Zero Energy Buildings 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Net Zero Energy Building Definition 7.3 Net Zero Energy Building Design 7.4 Net Zero Energy Building: Modelling, Controlling and Optimization 7.5 Net Zero Energy Community 7.6 Net Zero Energy Building: Trends, Benefits, Barriers and Efficiency Investments 7.7 Conclusion 7.8 Reference 8. Smart Grid Communication Infrastructures 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Advanced Metering Infrastructure 8.3 Smart Grid Communications 8.3.1 Challenges of SG Communications 8.3.2 Requirements of SG Communications 8.3.3 Architecture of SG Communication 8.3.4 SG Communication technologies 8.4 Conclusion 8.5 References 9. Smart Grid Information Security 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Smart Grid Layers 9.2.1 The power system layer 9.2.2 The information layer 9.2.3 The communication layer 9.3 Attacking Smart Grid Network Communication 9.3.1 Physical Layer Attacks. 9.3.2 Data Injection and Replay Attacks. 9.3.3 Network-Based Attacks 9.4 Physical Layer Attacks. 9.4.1 Resilient Industrial Control Systems 9.4.2 Areas of Resilience 9.4.2.1 Human systems 9.4.2.2 Cyber security 9.4.2.3 Complex networks and networked control systems 9.5 Cyber Security Challenges in Smart Grid 9.6 Adopting a Smart Grid Security Architecture Methodology 9.6.1 Smart Grid Security Objectives. 9.6.2 Cyber Security Requirements 9.6.2.1 Attack detection and resilience operations. 9.6.2.2 Identification, and access control. 9.6.2.3 Secure and efficient communication protocols. 9.7 Validating Your Smart Grid 9.8 Threats and Impacts: Consumers and Utility Companies 9.9 Governmental Effort to Secure Smart Grids 9.10Conclusion 9.11References 10. Data Management in Smart Grid 10.1Introduction 10.2 Sources of Data in Smart Grid 10.3Big Data Era 10.4Tools to Manage Big Data 10.4.1 Apache Hadoop 10.4.2 Not Only SQL (NoSQL) 10.4.3 Microsoft HDInsight 10.4.4 Hadoop MapReduce 10.4.5 Cassandra 10.4.6 Storm 10.4.7 Hive 10.4.8 Plotly 10.4.9 Talend 10.4.10 Bokeh 10.4.11 Cloudera 10.5Big Data Integration, Frameworks, and Data Bases 10.6Building the Foundation for Big Data Processing 10.6.1 Big Data Management Platform 10.6.1.1 Acquisition and Recording. 10.6.1.2 Extraction, Cleaning, and Prediction. 10.6.1.3 Big Data Integration 10.6.2 Big Data Analytics Platform 10.6.2.1 Modeling and Analysis 10.6.2.2 Interpretation 10.7Transforming Big Data for High Value Action 10.7.1 Decide what to produce 10.7.2 Source the raw materials 10.7.3 Produce insights with speed 10.7.4 Deliver the goods and act 10.8Privacy Information Impacts on Smart Grid. 10.9Meter Data Management for Smart Grid 10.10 Summary 10.11 References 11. Demand-Management 11.1 Introduction 11.2Demand Response 11.3Demand Response Programs 11.3.1 Load-Response Programs 11.3.2 Price Response Programs 11.4 End User Engagement 11.5Challenges of Demand Response within Smart Grid 11.6Demand-Side Management (DSM) 11.7Demand Side Management Techniques 11.8Demand-Side Management Evaluation 11.9Demand Response Applications 11.10 Summary 11.11 References 12. Business Models for the Smart Grid 12.1The Business Model Concept 12.2The Electricity Value Chain 12.3Electricity Markets 12.4Review of the Previous Proposed Smart Grid Business Models 12.4.1 Timing-Based Business Model 12.4.2 Business Intelligence Model 12.4.3 Business Models for Renewable Energy 12.4.4 Service-oriented Business Models 12.4.5 Prosumer Business Models 12.4.6 Integrated Energy Services Business Model 12.4.7 Future Business Model Levers 12.5Blockchain Based Electricity Market 12.6Conclusion 12.7References 13. Smart Grid Customers’ Acceptance and Engagement 13.1Introduction 13.2Customer as one of the Smart Grid Domains 13.3Understanding the Smart Grid Customer 13.4Smart Grid Customer Acceptance 13.5Customer Engagement in the Smart Grid 13.6Challenges for Consumer Engagement, Policy Recommendation and Research Agenda 13.7Conclusion 14. Cloud Computing for Smart Grid 14.1 Introduction 14.2 Overview of Cloud Computing for Smart Grid 14.3 Cloud Computing 14.4 Cloud computing Architecture 14.4.1 1Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) 14.4.2 2Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS) 14.4.3 Software-as-a-Service (SaaS) 14.5Cloud Computing Applications 14.6Cloud Applications for Smart Grid performance 14.7Cloud Applications for Energy Management 14.8Cloud computing-based power dispatching in smart grid 14.9Cloud computing characteristics in improving SG 14.10 Opportunities and challenges of Cloud Computing in Smart grid 14.11 Multiple perspectives for cloud implementation 14.12 Conclusion 15. On the Pivotal Role of Artificial Intelligence Towards the Evolution of Smart Grids: Advanced Methodologies and Applications 15.1Introduction 15.2Century-old grid and SG transition 15.3AI techniques in smart grid 15.3.1 AI commonly deployed techniques 15.3.1.1 Artificial Neural Networks-based 15.3.1.2 Fuzzy logic-based 15.3.1.3 Ensemble methods-based 15.3.1.4 Genetic algorithms-based 15.3.1.5 Expert Systems-based 15.3.1.6 Support Vector Machines-based 15.3.1.7 Hybrid models-based 15.3.2 Machine Learning Model Evaluation 15.4Major applications of AI in SG 15.4.1 Load forecasting 15.4.2 Alternative energy forecasting 15.4.3 Photovoltaic energy 15.4.4 Wind power 15.4.5 MPPT-based AI 15.4.6 Fault diagnosis-based AI 15.4.7 AI and Cyber smart grid security 15.4.8 Electricity price forecasting 15.5Challenges and future scope 15.6Conclusion 16. Smart Grid Simulation Tools 16.1Introduction 16.2Simulation Approaches 16.2.1 Multi-Domain Simulation 16.2.2 Co-Simulation 16.2.3 Real-Time Simulation and Hardware-in-the-Loop 16.3Review of Smart Grid Planning and Analysis Tools 16.3.1 PSCAD 16.3.2 PowerWorld Simulator 16.3.3 ETAP 16.3.4 DIgSILENT PowerFactory 16.3.5 OpenDSS 16.3.6 GridLab-D 16.3.7 Conclusions 17. Smart Grid Standards and Interoperability 17.1Introduction 17.2Organizations for Smart Grid Standardization 17.2.1 IEC Strategic Group on Smart Grid 17.2.2 Technical Communities and their Subcommittees of IEEE Power and Energy Society (PES) 17.2.3 National Institute of Standards and Technology 17.2.4 National Standard of P.R.C. for Smart Grid 17.3Smart Grid Policies for Standard Developments 17.3.1 United States 17.3.2 Germany 17.3.3 Europe 17.3.4 South Korea 17.3.5 Australia 17.3.6 Canada 17.3.7 Japan 17.3.8 China 17.4Smart Grid Standards 17.4.1 Revenue Metering Information Model 17.4.2 Building Automation 17.4.3 Substation Automation 17.4.4 Powerline Networking 17.4.5 Energy Management Systems 17.4.6 Interoperability Center Communications 17.4.7 Cyber Security 17.4.8 Electric Vehicles 17.5Conclusion 17.6References 18. Smart Grid Challenges and Barriers, Critical Success Factors and Future Vision 18.1Introduction 18.2Structure of modern smart-grids 18.3Concept of reliability in power systems 18.4Smart-grid challenges and barriers 18.4.1 Low inertia issues – Frequency support 18.4.2 Moving towards full/more renewable energies 18.4.3 Protection issues 18.4.4 Control dynamic interactions. 18.4.5 Reliability issues 18.4.6 Marketing 18.5New reliability paradigm in smart-grids 18.5.1 Adequacy 18.5.2 Security 18.5.3 Static security 18.5.4 Dynamic/transient security 18.5.5 Cyber-security 18.6Summary 18.7References Index [not supplied to follow later

Read more less

Book SynopsisA systems-level approach to reducing liability through process improvement Forensic Systems Analysis: Evaluating Operations by Discovery presents a systematic framework for uncovering and resolving problematic process failures. Carefully building the causal relationship from process to product, the discussion lays out in significant detail the appropriate and tactical approaches necessary to the pursuit of litigation with respect to corporate operations. Systemic process failures are addressed by flipping process improvement models to study both improvement and failure, resulting in arguments and methodologies relevant to any product or service industry. Guidance on risk analysis of operations combines evaluation of process control, stability, capability, verification, validation, specification, product reliability, serial dependence, and more, providing a robust framework with which to target large-scale nonconforming products and services. RelevaTable of ContentsPreface xix 1 What Is Forensic Systems Engineering? 1 1.1 Systems and Systems Engineering 1 1.2 Forensic Systems Engineering 2 References 4 2 Contracts, Specifications, and Standards 7 2.1 General 7 2.2 The Contract 9 2.2.1 Considerations 9 2.2.2 Contract Review 10 2.3 Specifications 12 2.4 Standards 14 Credits 16 References 16 3 Management Systems 17 3.1 Management Standards 18 3.1.1 Operations and Good Business Practices 18 3.1.2 Attributes of Management Standards 18 3.2 Effective Management Systems 19 3.2.1 Malcolm Baldrige 19 3.2.2 Total Quality Management 20 3.2.3 Six Sigma 20 3.2.4 Lean 21 3.2.5 Production Part Approval Process 22 3.3 Performance and Performance 23 3.4 Addendum 23 Credits 24 References 24 4 Performance Management: ISO 9001 25 4.1 Background of ISO 9000 26 4.1.1 ISO 9001 in the United States 27 4.1.2 Structure of ISO 9000: 2005 27 4.1.3 The Process Approach 28 4.2 Form and Substance 32 4.2.1 Reference Performance Standards 33 4.2.2 Forensics and the Paper Trail 34 Credits 35 References 35 5 The Materiality of Operations 37 5.1 Rationale for Financial Metrics 38 5.1.1 Sarbanes–Oxley 38 5.1.1.1 Title III: Corporate Responsibility 38 5.1.1.2 Title IV: Enhanced Financial Disclosures 39 5.1.2 Internal Control 39 5.1.3 The Materiality of Quality 41 5.2 Mapping Operations to Finance 41 5.2.1 The Liability of Quality 43 5.2.2 The Forensic View 44 Credits 44 References 44 6 Process Liability 47 6.1 Theory of Process Liability 48 6.1.1 Operations and Process Liability 50 6.1.2 Process Liability and Misfeasance 51 6.2 Process Liability and the Law 52 Credits 52 References 52 7 Forensic Analysis of Process Liability 55 7.1 Improper Manufacturing Operations 57 7.1.1 Verification and Validation 57 7.1.1.1 Nonstandard Design Procedures 57 7.1.1.2 Unverified or Unvalidated Design 58 7.1.1.3 Tests Waived by Management 58 7.1.1.4 Altered Test Procedures and Results 58 7.1.2 Resource Management 59 7.1.2.1 Unmonitored Outsourcing 59 7.1.2.2 Substandard Purchased Parts 60 7.1.2.3 Ghost Inventory 60 7.1.2.4 Ineffective Flow Down 61 7.1.3 Process Management 61 7.1.3.1 Forced Production 61 7.1.3.2 Abuse and Threats by Management 62 7.2 Management Responsibility 62 7.2.1 Effective Internal Controls 62 7.2.2 Business Standards of Care 63 7.2.3 Liability Risk Management 64 7.2.4 Employee Empowerment 65 7.2.5 Effective Management Review 65 7.2.6 Closed]Loop Processes 66 References 67 8 Legal Trends to Process Liability 71 8.1 An Idea Whose Time Has Come 71 8.2 Some Court Actions Thus Far 72 8.2.1 QMS Certified Organizations 73 8.2.2 QMS Noncertified Organizations 74 References 75 9 Process Stability and Capability 77 9.1 Process Stability 77 9.1.1 Stability and Stationarity 78 9.1.2 Stability Conditions 79 9.1.3 Stable Processes 80 9.1.4 Measuring Process Stability 82 9.2 Process Capability 83 9.2.1 Measuring Capability 83 9.2.2 A Limit of Process Capability 85 9.3 The Rare Event 85 9.3.1 Instability and the Rare Event 85 9.3.2 Identifying the Rare Event 86 9.4 Attribute Testing 87 References 88 10 Forensic Issues in Product Reliability 91 10.1 Background in Product Reliability 91 10.2 Legal Issues in the Design of Reliability 94 10.2.1 Good Design Practices 95 10.2.2 Design Is Intrinsic to Manufacturing and Service 95 10.2.3 Intended Use 95 10.2.4 Paper Trail of Evidence 96 10.2.5 Reliability Is an Implied Design Requirement 97 10.3 Legal Issues in Measuring Reliability 97 10.3.1 Failure Modes 97 10.3.2 Estimation of MTTF 98 10.3.3 The More Failure Data the Better 99 10.3.4 The Paper Trail of Reliability Measurement 99 10.4 Legal Issues in Testing for Reliability 100 10.4.1 Defined and Documented Life Test Procedures 100 10.4.2 Life Test Records and Reports 101 10.4.3 Test Procedures 101 10.5 When Product Reliability Is not in the Contract 102 10.5.1 Product Liability 102 10.5.2 ISO 9001 and FAR 103 10.6 Warranty and Reliability 104 References 105 11 Forensic View of Internal Control 107 11.1 Internal Controls 108 11.1.1 Purpose of Control 108 11.1.2 Control Defined 109 11.1.3 Control Elements in Operations 109 11.2 Control Stability 110 11.2.1 Model of a Continuous System 111 11.2.2 Transfer Functions 112 11.3 Implementing Controls 115 11.4 Control of Operations 117 11.4.1 Proportional (Gain) Control 118 11.4.2 Controlling the Effect of Change 119 11.4.2.1 Integral Control 120 11.4.2.2 Derivative (Rate) Control 121 11.4.3 Responsibility, Authority, and Accountability 121 References 123 12 Case Study: Madelena Airframes Corporation 125 12.1 Background of the Case 126 12.2 Problem Description 127 12.2.1 MAC Policies and Procedures (Missile Production) 127 12.2.2 Missile Test 127 12.3 Examining the Evidence 128 12.3.1 Evidence: The Players 129 12.3.2 Evidence: E]mails 129 12.4 Depositions 132 12.4.1 Deposition of the General Manager 132 12.4.2 Deposition of the Senior Test Engineer 132 12.4.3 Deposition of the Production Manager 132 12.4.4 Deposition of the Chief Design Engineer 133 12.4.5 Deposition of the Test Programs Manager 133 12.5 Problem Analysis 133 12.5.1 Review of the Evidence 133 12.5.2 Nonconformities 134 12.5.2.1 Clause 7.3.1(b) Design and Development Planning 134 12.5.2.2 Clause 7.3.5 Design and Development Verification 135 12.5.2.3 Clause 7.3.6 Design and Development Validation 135 12.5.2.4 Clause 8.1 General Test Requirements 135 12.5.2.5 Clause 8.2.4 Monitoring and Measurement of Product 135 12.5.2.6 Clause 4.1 General QMS Requirements 135 12.5.2.7 Clause 5.6.1 General Management Review Requirements 135 12.6 Arriving at the Truth 136 12.7 Damages 137 12.7.1 Synthesis of Damages 137 12.7.2 Costs of Correction 137 References 138 13 Examining Serially Dependent Processes 139 13.1 Serial Dependence: Causal Correlation 140 13.2 Properties of Serial Dependence 142 13.2.1 Work Station Definition 142 13.2.2 Assumptions 142 13.2.2.1 Assumption 1 143 13.2.2.2 Assumption 2 143 13.2.2.3 Assumption 3 143 13.2.3 Development of the Conditional Distribution 144 13.2.4 Process Stability 145 13.3 Serial Dependence: Noncausal Correlation 147 13.4 Forensic Systems Analysis 147 Credits 148 References 148 14 Measuring Operations 149 14.1 ISO 9000 as Internal Controls 151 14.2 QMS Characteristics 152 14.3 The QMS Forensic Model 154 14.3.1 Estimating Control Risk 155 14.3.2 Cost of Liability 156 14.4 The Forensic Lab and Operations 157 14.5 Conclusions 158 Credits 159 References 159 15 Stability Analysis of Dysfunctional Processes 161 15.1 Special Terms 162 15.1.1 Dysfunction 162 15.1.2 Common and Special Causes 163 15.1.3 Disturbances and Interventions 163 15.1.4 Cause and Effect 163 15.2 Literature Review 165 15.3 Question Before the Law 168 15.4 Process Stability 169 15.4.1 Internal Control 170 15.4.2 Mathematical Model for Correlation 170 15.5 Conclusions 173 Credits 174 References 174 16 Verification and Validation 179 16.1 Cause and Effect 180 16.1.1 An Historical View 180 16.1.2 Productivity versus Quality 182 16.2 What Is in a Name? 185 16.2.1 Verification and Validation Defined 186 16.2.2 Inspection and Test 187 16.2.3 Monitor and Measure 188 16.2.4 Subtle Transitions 189 16.3 The Forensic View of Measurement 190 16.3.1 Machine Tools and Tooling 190 16.3.2 Measurement 191 16.3.3 Control Charting 192 16.3.4 First Pass Yield 192 16.3.5 First Article Inspection 193 16.3.6 Tool Try 194 References 194 17 Forensic Sampling of Internal Controls 197 17.1 Populations 198 17.1.1 Sample Population 199 17.1.2 Homogeneity 199 17.1.3 Population Size 200 17.1.4 One Hundred Percent Inspection 201 17.2 Sampling Plan 201 17.2.1 Objectives 201 17.2.2 Statistical and Nonstatistical Sampling 202 17.2.3 Fixed Size and Stop]or]Go 203 17.2.4 Sample Selection and Size 204 17.3 Attribute Sampling 204 17.3.1 Internal Control Sampling 204 17.3.2 Deviation Rates 206 17.3.2.1 Acceptable Deviation Rate 206 17.3.2.2 System Deviation Rate 207 17.3.3 Sampling Risks 207 17.3.3.1 Control Risk 207 17.3.3.2 Alpha and Beta Risks 208 17.3.4 Confidence Level 208 17.3.5 Evaluation 209 17.4 Forensic System Caveats 209 References 210 18 Forensic Analysis of Supplier Control 211 18.1 Outsourcing 213 18.2 Supply Chain Management 215 18.3 Forensic Analysis of Supply Systems 216 18.3.1 Basic Principles of Supplier Control 216 18.3.2 The Forensic Challenge 216 18.3.2.1 Ensure that Purchased Units Conform to Contracted Specifications 217 18.3.2.2 Assessment of the Supplier Process 218 18.3.2.3 Tracking 218 18.3.2.4 Customer Relations 219 18.3.2.5 Verification and Storage of Supplies 221 18.3.2.6 Identification and Traceability 222 18.4 Supplier Verification: A Case Study 223 18.4.1 Manufacture 224 18.4.2 V50 Testing 224 18.4.3 V50 Test Results 226 18.5 Malfeasant Supply Systems 226 References 227 19 Discovering System Nonconformity 229 19.1 Identifying Nonconformities 231 19.1.1 Reporting Nonconformities 232 19.1.2 Disputes 233 19.2 The Elements of Assessment 234 19.2.1 Measures of Performance 234 19.2.2 Considerations in Forensic Analysis of Systems 235 19.3 Forming Decisions 236 19.4 Describing Nonconformities 238 19.5 A Forensic View of Documented Information 240 19.5.1 Requirements in Documented Information 241 19.5.2 The Quality Manual 241 19.5.3 Documented Information Control 243 19.5.4 Records 244 Acknowledgment 246 References 246 Appendix A The Engineering Design Process: A Descriptive View 247 A.1 Design and Development 248 A.1.1 The Design Process 248 A.1.2 Customer Requirements 249 A.1.3 Interactive Design 249 A.1.4 Intermediate Testing 249 A.1.5 Final Iteration 251 A.2 Forensic Analysis of the Design Process 252 References 253 Appendix B Introduction to Product Reliability 255 B.1 Reliability Characteristics 256 B.1.1 Reliability Metrics 256 B.1.2 Visual Life Cycle 257 B.2 Weibull Analysis 259 B.2.1 Distributions 259 B.2.2 Shape and Scale 260 B.2.2.1 Shape 260 B.2.2.2 Scale 262 B.2.3 The B]Percentile 262 B.3 Design for Reliability 263 B.4 Measuring Reliability 265 B.4.1 On Reliability Metrics 265 B.4.2 Graphing Failure Data 266 B.5 Testing for Reliability 269 References 271 Appendix C Brief Review of Probability and Statistics 273 C.1 Measures of Location 274 C.1.1 Average: The Mean Value 274 C.1.2 Average: The Median 275 C.1.3 Average: The Mode 275 C.2 Measures of Dispersion 276 C.2.1 Variance 276 C.2.2 Range 276 C.3 Distributions 277 C.3.1 Continuous Distributions 277 C.3.2 Discrete Distributions 279 C.4 Tests of Hypotheses 281 C.4.1 Estimating Parametric Change 281 C.4.2 Confidence Level 284 C.5 Ordered Statistics 284 References 285 Appendix D Sampling of Internal Control Systems 287 D.1 Populations 288 D.1.1 Sample Populations 289 D.1.2 Population Size 290 D.1.3 Homogeneity 290 D.2 Attribute Sampling 291 D.2.1 Acceptable Deviation Rate 292 D.2.2 System Deviation Rate 293 D.2.3 Controls 293 D.3 Sampling Risks 294 D.3.1 Control Risk 294 D.3.2 Consumer and Producer Risks 294 D.3.3 Alpha and Beta Errors 295 D.4 Sampling Analysis 297 D.4.1 Statistical Inference 297 D.4.2 Sample Distributions 298 D.4.3 Sample Size 299 D.4.4 Estimating the SDR 299 D.4.5 Confidence Interval 300 References 302 Appendix E Statistical Sampling Plans 305 E.1 Fixed]Size Attribute Sampling Plan 306 E.1.1 Determine the Objectives 306 E.1.2 Define Attribute and Deviation Conditions 306 E.1.2.1 Acceptable Deviation Rate 306 E.1.2.2 System Deviation Rate 307 E.1.3 Define the Population 307 E.1.4 Determine the Method of Sample Selection 307 E.1.5 Determine the Sample Size 308 E.1.6 Perform the Sampling Plan 312 E.1.7 Evaluate Sample Results 312 E.2 Stop]or]Go Sampling 313 E.2.1 Acceptable Deviation Rate 313 E.2.2 Sample Size 314 E.2.3 Evaluation 316 E.3 One Hundred Percent Inspection 316 E.4 Application: An Attribute Sampling Plan 317 References 318 Appendix F Nonstatistical Sampling Plans 321 F.1 Sampling Format 322 F.1.1 Frame of the Sampling Plan 322 F.1.2 Attribute and Deviation Conditions 323 F.1.3 The Population 323 F.1.4 Nonstatistical Sample Selection 324 F.1.5 Sample Size 325 F.1.6 The Effect of Sample Size on Beta Error 326 F.1.7 Evaluating Sample Results 327 F.2 Nonstatistical Estimations 327 References 328 Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn authoritative guide to the latest developments for the design of low-cost smart antennas Traditional smart antenna systems are costly, consume great amounts of power and are bulky size. Low-cost Smart Antennas offers a guide to designing smart antenna systems that are low cost, low power, and compact in size and can be applied to satellite communications, radar and mobile communications. The authors noted experts on the topic provide introductions to the fundamental concepts of antennas, array antennas and smart antennas. The book fills a gap in the literature by presenting the design techniques of low-cost radio frequency (RF) smart antennas as well as approaches for implementing the hardware of the antenna and the beamforming network (BFN). A comprehensive and accessible book, Low-cost Smart Antennas not only presents an up-to-date review of the topic but includes illustrative case studies that contain in-depth explorations of the theory andTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgement xi List of Abbreviations xiii 1 Introduction to Smart Antennas 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Antenna Fundamentals 2 1.2.1 Antenna Impedance and Bandwidth 2 1.2.2 Radiation Patterns and Efficiency 4 1.2.3 Polarisations 8 1.3 Antenna Array Fundamentals 9 1.3.1 Array Performance Analysis 12 1.3.2 Active Reflection Coefficient and Mutual Coupling 12 1.3.3 Directivity and Beamwidth 14 1.3.4 Grating Lobe 15 1.3.5 Scan Blindness 16 1.4 Smart Antenna Architecture and Hardware Implementation 17 1.4.1 ADC and DAC 20 1.4.2 Digital Down-Converter (DDC) 20 1.4.3 Digital Signal Processor 20 1.4.4 Field-programmable Gate Array 21 1.5 Overview of the Book 22 References 23 2 Beamforming Algorithms for Smart Antennas 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Basic Concepts for Beamforming 27 2.3 Fixed Beamformer Design 30 2.3.1 FIR Filter Based Design 30 2.3.2 Least Squares Based Design 32 2.3.3 Beam Steering 33 2.4 Adaptive Beamforming Algorithms 36 2.4.1 Reference Signal Based Beamformer 36 2.4.2 The Capon Beamformer 38 2.5 Blind Beamforming Algorithms 40 2.5.1 The Power Minimisation Algorithm 40 2.5.2 The Constant Modulus Algorithm 42 2.6 Low-cost Adaptive Beamforming 43 2.6.1 Analogue and Digital Hybrid Beamforming 43 2.6.2 Robust Adaptive Beamforming 45 2.7 Summary of the Chapter 50 References 50 3 Electronically Steerable Parasitic Array 59 3.1 Introduction 59 3.2 Theory and Operation Principle 59 3.3 Low-cost Folded-monopole ESPAR 63 3.4 ESPAR Antenna with Low Control Voltage 70 3.4.1 FM-ESPAR using PIN diodes 70 3.4.2 Link Quality Test 72 3.5 Planar ESPAR Antennas 75 3.6 Case Studies 86 3.6.1 ESPAR using Monopole 86 3.6.2 Planar Ultra-thin ESPAR 90 3.7 Summary of the Chapter 98 References 99 4 Beam-Reconfigurable Antennas Using Active Frequency Selective Surfaces 103 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 FSS Fundamentals and Active FSSs 104 4.2.1 FSS Elements 104 4.2.2 Dielectric Loading Effects 105 4.2.3 FSS Analysis Techniques 106 4.2.4 Active Metal Strip FSS 107 4.2.5 Active Slot FSS 111 4.2.6 Active FSS Biasing Techniques 113 4.3 Monopole-fed Beam-switching Antenna using AFSS 114 4.4 Dual-Band Beam-Switching Antenna using AFSS 120 4.5 3D Beam Coverage of Electronic Beam-Switching Antenna using FSS 125 4.6 Frequency-agile Beam-switchable Antenna 138 4.7 Continuous Beam-steering Antennas using FSSs 145 4.8 Case Study 153 4.9 Summary of the Chapter 159 References 160 5 Beam Reconfigurable Reflectarrays and Transmitarrays 165 5.1 Introduction 165 5.2 Reflectarray and Transmitarray Design Fundamentals 166 5.2.1 Reflectarrays 166 5.2.2 Transmitarrays 169 5.3 Beam Reconfigurable Reflectarrays 171 5.3.1 Multi-feed Reflectarray 171 5.3.2 Reflectarray with RF Switches 174 5.3.3 Reflectarray with Tunable Components 177 5.4 Beam Reconfigurable Transmitarray 181 5.5 Circularly Polarised Beam-steerable Reflectarrays and Transmitarrays 185 5.6 Case Study 189 5.7 Summary of the Chapter 195 References 196 6 Compact MIMO Antenna Systems 199 6.1 Introduction 199 6.2 MIMO Antennas 199 6.2.1 Isolation 200 6.2.2 Envelope Correlation Coefficient 201 6.2.3 Total Active Reflection Coefficient 202 6.3 Compact MIMO Antenna with High Isolation 203 6.3.1 Neutralisation Technique 203 6.3.2 Metamaterial 205 6.3.3 Decoupling Network 209 6.4 Compact MIMO Antenna with Adaptive Radiation Patterns 215 6.5 Case Studies 218 6.5.1 Increase the Physical Separation 220 6.5.2 Change the Antenna Orientation 220 6.5.3 Modify the Ground Plane 222 6.5.4 Summary 224 6.6 Summary of the Chapter 225 References 225 7 Other Types of Low-cost Smart Antennas 229 7.1 Introduction 229 7.2 Lens Antennas 229 7.2.1 Lens Antenna Basics 229 7.2.2 Millimetre-wave Lens Antenna Design 231 7.3 Retrodirective Array Antenna 236 7.3.1 Van Altta Array 237 7.3.2 Phase Conjugating Array 239 7.4 Fabry–Perot Resonator Antennas 243 7.5 Array-fed Reflector 246 7.5.1 Operation Principle 246 7.5.2 Beam-switching Performance 251 7.6 Multibeam Antennas based on BFN 253 7.6.1 Butler Matrix 253 7.6.2 Rotman Lens 257 7.6.3 Blass and Nolen matrices 259 7.7 Summary of the Chapter 261 References 262 Index 267

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsContributor List xvii Foreword 1 xxiii Foreword 2 xxv Acknowledgments xxvii List of Abbreviations xxix Part 1 Introduction and Basics 1 1 Introduction and Motivation 3Patrick Marsch, Ömer Bulakçı, Olav Queseth and Mauro Boldi 1.1 5th Generation Mobile and Wireless Communications 3 1.2 Timing of this Book and Global 5G Developments 5 1.3 Scope of the 5G System Described in this Book 8 1.4 Approach and Structure of this Book 10 References 12 2 Use Cases, Scenarios, and their Impact on the Mobile Network Ecosystem 15Salah Eddine Elayoubi, Michał Maternia, Jose F. Monserrat, Frederic Pujol, Panagiotis Spapis, Valerio Frascolla and Davide Sorbara 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Main Service Types Considered for 5G 16 2.3 5G Service Requirements 17 2.4 Use Cases Considered in NGMN and 5G PPP Projects 18 2.5 Typical Use Cases Considered in this Book 25 2.6 Envisioned Mobile Network Ecosystem Evolution 28 2.7 Summary and Outlook 33 References 34 3 Spectrum Usage and Management 35Thomas Rosowski, Rauno Ruismaki, Luis M. Campoy, Giovanna D’Aria, Du Ho Kang and Adrian Kliks 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Spectrum Authorization and Usage Scenarios 36 3.3 Spectrum Bandwidth Demand Determination 39 3.4 Frequency Bands for 5G 41 3.5 Spectrum Usage Aspects at High Frequencies 44 3.6 Spectrum Management 49 3.7 Summary and Outlook 53 References 54 4 Channel Modeling 57Shangbin Wu, Sinh L. H. Nguyen and Raffaele D’Errico 4.1 Introduction 57 4.2 Core Features of New Channel Models 59 4.3 Additional Features of New Channel Models 65 4.4 Summary and Outlook 74 References 75 Part 2 5G System Architecture and E2E Enablers 79 5 E2E Architecture 81Marco Gramaglia, Alexandros Kaloxylos, Panagiotis Spapis, Xavier Costa, Luis Miguel Contreras, Riccardo Trivisonno, Gerd Zimmermann, Antonio de la Oliva, Peter Rost and Patrick Marsch 5.1 Introduction 81 5.2 Enablers and Design Principles 82 5.3 E2E Architecture Overview 88 5.4 Novel Concepts and Architectural Extensions 97 5.5 Internetworking, Migration and Network Evolution 104 5.6 Summary and Outlook 112 References 112 6 RAN Architecture 115Patrick Marsch, Navid Nikaein, Mark Doll, Tao Chen and Emmanouil Pateromichelakis 6.1 Introduction 115 6.2 Related Work 116 6.3 RAN Architecture Requirements 118 6.4 Protocol Stack Architecture and Network Functions 119 6.5 Multi‐Connectivity 129 6.6 RAN Function Splits and Resulting Logical Network Entities 133 6.7 Deployment Scenarios and Related Physical RAN Architectures 141 6.8 RAN Programmability and Control 144 6.9 Summary and Outlook 147 References 148 7 Transport Network Architecture 151Anna Tzanakaki, Markos Anastasopoulos, Nathan Gomes, Philippos Assimakopoulos, Josep M. Fàbrega, Michela Svaluto Moreolo, Laia Nadal, Jesús Gutiérrez, Vladica Sark, Eckhard Grass, Daniel Camps‐Mur, Antonio de la Oliva, Nuria Molner, Xavier Costa Perez, Josep Mangues, Ali Yaver, Paris Flegkas, Nikos Makris, Thanasis Korakis and Dimitra Simeonidou 7.1 Introduction 151 7.2 Architecture Definition 153 7.3 Technology Options and Protocols 158 7.4 Self‐Backhauling 165 7.5 Technology Integration and Interfacing 168 7.6 Transport Network Optimization and Performance Evaluation 170 7.7 Summary 178 References 178 8 Network Slicing 181Alexandros Kaloxylos, Christian Mannweiler, Gerd Zimmermann, Marco Di Girolamo, Patrick Marsch, Jakob Belschner, Anna Tzanakaki, Riccardo Trivisonno, Ömer Bulakçı, Panagiotis Spapis, Peter Rost, Paul Arnold and Navid Nikaein 8.1 Introduction 181 8.2 Slice Realization in the Different Network Domains 183 8.3 Operational Aspects 196 8.4 Summary and Outlook 202 References 204 9 Security 207Carolina Canales‐Valenzuela, Madalina Baltatu, Luciana Costa, Kai Habel, Volker Jungnickel, Geza Koczian, Felix Ngobigha, Michael C. Parker, Muhammad Shuaib Siddiqui, Eleni Trouva and Stuart D. Walker 9.1 Introduction 207 9.2 Threat Landscape 208 9.3 5G Security Requirements 209 9.4 5G Security Architecture 211 9.5 Summary 224 References 224 10 Network Management and Orchestration 227Luis M. Contreras, Víctor López, Ricard Vilalta, Ramon Casellas, Raúl Muñoz, Wei Jiang, Hans Schotten, Jose Alcaraz‐Calero, Qi Wang, Balázs Sonkoly and László Toka 10.1 Introduction 227 10.2 Network Management and Orchestration Through SDN and NFV 228 10.3 Enablers of Management and Orchestration 233 10.4 Orchestration in Multi‐Domain and Multi‐Technology Scenarios 238 10.5 Software‐Defined Networking for 5G 245 10.6 Network Function Virtualization in 5G Environments 251 10.7 Autonomic Network Management in 5G 252 10.8 Summary 258 References 259 Part 3 5G Functional Design 263 11 Antenna, PHY and MAC Design 265Frank Schaich, Catherine Douillard, Charbel Abdel Nour, Malte Schellmann, Tommy Svensson, Hao Lin, Honglei Miao, Hua Wang, Jian Luo, Milos Tesanovic, Nuno Pratas, Sandra Roger and Thorsten Wild 11.1 Introduction 265 11.2 PHY and MAC Design Criteria and Harmonization 267 11.3 Waveform Design 269 11.4 Coding Approaches and HARQ 283 11.5 Antenna Design, Analog, Digital and Hybrid Beamforming 293 11.6 PHY/MAC Design for Multi‐Service Support 300 11.7 Summary and Outlook 310 References 311 12 Traffic Steering and Resource Management 315Ömer Bulakçı, Klaus Pedersen, David Gutierrez Estevez, Athul Prasad, Fernando Sanchez Moya, Jan Christoffersson, Yang Yang, Emmanouil Pateromichelakis, Paul Arnold, Tommy Svensson, Tao Chen, Honglei Miao, Martin Kurras, Samer Bazzi, Stavroula Vassaki, Evangelos Kosmatos, Kwang Taik Kim, Giorgio Calochira, Jakob Belschner, Sergio Barberis and Taylan Şahin 12.1 Motivation and Role of Resource Management in 5G 315 12.2 Service Classification: A First Step Towards Efficient RM 317 12.3 Dynamic Multi‐Service Scheduling 321 12.4 Fast‐Timescale Dynamic Traffic Steering 328 12.5 Network‐based Interference Management 335 12.6 Multi‐Slice RM 350 12.7 Energy‐efficient RAN Moderation 354 12.8 UE Context Management 359 12.9 Summary and Outlook 360 References 361 13 Initial Access, RRC and Mobility 367Mårten Ericson, Panagiotis Spapis, Mikko Säily, Klaus Pedersen, Yinan Qi, Nicolas Barati, Tommy Svensson, Mehrdad Shariat, Marco Giordani, Marco Mezzavilla, Mark Doll, Honglei Miao and Chan Zhou 13.1 Introduction 367 13.2 Initial Access 369 13.3 States and State Handling 381 13.4 Mobility 391 13.5 Summary and Outlook 404 References 404 14 D2D and V2X Communications 409Shubhranshu Singh, Ji Lianghai, Daniel Calabuig, David Garcia‐Roger, Nurul H. Mahmood, Nuno Pratas, Tomasz Mach and Maria Carmela De Gennaro 14.1 Introduction 409 14.2 Technical Status and Standardization Overview 412 14.3 5G Air Interface Candidate Waveforms for Sidelink Support 418 14.4 Device Discovery on the Sidelink 424 14.5 Sidelink Mobility Management 427 14.6 V2X Communications for Road Safety Applications 430 14.7 Industrial Implementation of V2X in the Automotive Domain 434 14.8 Further Evolution of D2D Communications 438 14.9 Summary and Outlook 445 References 446 Part 4 Performance Evaluation and Implementation 451 15 Performance, Energy Efficiency and Techno‐Economic Assessment 453Michał Maternia, Jose F. Monserrat, David Martín‐Sacristán, Yong Wu, Changqing Yang, Mauro Boldi, Yu Bao, Frederic Pujol, Giuseppe Piro, Gennaro Boggia, Alessandro Grassi, Hans‐Otto Scheck, Ioannis‐Prodromos Belikaidis, Andreas Georgakopoulos, Katerina Demesticha and Panagiotis Demestichas 15.1 Introduction 453 15.2 Performance Evaluation Framework 454 15.3 Network Energy Efficiency 467 15.4 Techno‐Economic Evaluation and Analysis of 5G Deployment 473 15.5 Summary 478 References 479 16 Implementation of Hardware and Software Platforms 483Chia‐Yu Chang, Dario Sabella, David García‐Roger, Dieter Ferling, Fredrik Tillman, Gian Michele Dell’Aera, Leonardo Gomes Baltar, Michael Färber, Miquel Payaró, Navid Nikaein, Pablo Serrano,Raymond Knopp, Sandra Roger, Sylvie Mayrargue and Tapio Rautio 16.1 Introduction 483 16.2 Solutions for Radio Frontend Implementation 484 16.3 Solutions for Digital HW Implementation 492 16.4 Flexible HW/SW Partitioning Solutions for 5G 502 16.5 Implementation of SW Platforms 504 16.6 Implementation Example: vRAN/C‐RAN Architecture in OAI 506 16.7 Summary 516 References 517 17 Standardization, Trials, and Early Commercialization 521Terje Tjelta, Olav Queseth, Didier Bourse, Yves Bellego, Raffaele de Peppe, Hisham Elshaer, Frederic Pujol, Chris Pearson, Chen Xiaobei, Takehiro Nakamura, Akira Matsunaga, Hitoshi Yoshino, Yukihiko Okumura, Dong Ku Kim, Jinhyo Park and Hong Beom Jeon 17.1 Introduction 521 17.2 Standardization Roadmap 522 17.3 Early Deployments 526 17.4 Summary 547 References 547 Index 551

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplores key challenges and solutions to assured cloud computing today and provides a provocative look at the face of cloud computing tomorrow This book offers readers a comprehensive suite of solutions for resolving many of the key challenges to achieving high levels of assurance in cloud computing. The distillation of critical research findings generated by the Assured Cloud Computing Center of Excellence (ACC-UCoE) of the University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign, it provides unique insights into the current and future shape of robust, dependable, and secure cloud-based computing and data cyberinfrastructures. A survivable and distributed cloud-computing-based infrastructure can enable the configuration of any dynamic systems-of-systems that contain both trusted and partially trusted resources and services sourced from multiple organizations. To assure mission-critical computations and workflows that rely on such systems-of-systems it is necessary to ensure that a given configuratTable of ContentsPreface xiii Editors’ Biographies xvii List of Contributors xix 1 Introduction 1Roy H. Campbell 1.1 Introduction 1 1.1.1 Mission-Critical Cloud Solutions for the Military 2 1.2 Overview of the Book 3 2 Survivability: Design, Formal Modeling, and Validation of Cloud Storage Systems Using Maude 10Rakesh Bobba, Jon Grov, Indranil Gupta, Si Liu, José Meseguer,Peter Csaba Ölveczky, and Stephen Skeirik 2.1 Introduction 10 2.1.1 State of the Art 11 2.1.2 Vision: Formal Methods for Cloud Storage Systems 12 2.1.3 The Rewriting Logic Framework 13 2.1.4 Summary: Using Formal Methods on Cloud Storage Systems 15 2.2 Apache Cassandra 17 2.3 Formalizing, Analyzing, and Extending Google’s Megastore 23 2.3.1 Specifying Megastore 23 2.3.2 Analyzing Megastore 25 2.3.2.1 Megastore-CGC 29 2.4 RAMP Transaction Systems 30 2.5 Group Key Management via ZooKeeper 31 2.5.1 ZooKeeper Background 32 2.5.2 System Design 33 2.5.3 Maude Model 34 2.5.4 Analysis and Discussion 35 2.6 How Amazon Web Services Uses Formal Methods 37 2.6.1 Use of Formal Methods 37 2.6.2 Outcomes and Experiences 38 2.6.3 Limitations 39 2.7 Related Work 40 2.8 Concluding Remarks 42 2.8.1 The Future 43 3 Risks and Benefits: Game-Theoretical Analysis and Algorithm for Virtual Machine Security Management in the Cloud 49Luke Kwiat, Charles A. Kamhoua, Kevin A. Kwiat, and Jian Tang 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Vision: Using Cloud Technology in Missions 51 3.3 State of the Art 54 3.4 System Model 57 3.5 Game Model 59 3.6 Game Analysis 61 3.7 Model Extension and Discussion 67 3.8 Numerical Results and Analysis 71 3.8.1 Changes in User 2’s Payoff with Respect to L2 71 3.8.2 Changes in User 2’s Payoff with Respect to e 72 3.8.3 Changes in User 2’s Payoff with Respect to π 73 3.8.4 Changes in User 2’s Payoff with Respect to qI 74 3.8.5 Model Extension to n = 10 Users 75 3.9 The Future 78 4 Detection and Security: Achieving Resiliency by Dynamic and Passive System Monitoring and Smart Access Control 81Zbigniew Kalbarczyk 4.1 Introduction 82 4.2 Vision: Using Cloud Technology in Missions 83 4.3 State of the Art 84 4.4 Dynamic VM Monitoring Using Hypervisor Probes 85 4.4.1 Design 86 4.4.2 Prototype Implementation 88 4.4.3 Example Detectors 90 4.4.3.1 Emergency Exploit Detector 90 4.4.3.2 Application Heartbeat Detector 91 4.4.4 Performance 93 4.4.4.1 Microbenchmarks 93 4.4.4.2 Detector Performance 94 4.4.5 Summary 95 4.5 Hypervisor Introspection: A Technique for Evading Passive Virtual Machine Monitoring 96 4.5.1 Hypervisor Introspection 97 4.5.1.1 VMI Monitor 97 4.5.1.2 VM Suspend Side-Channel 97 4.5.1.3 Limitations of Hypervisor Introspection 98 4.5.2 Evading VMI with Hypervisor Introspection 98 4.5.2.1 Insider Attack Model and Assumptions 98 4.5.2.2 Large File Transfer 99 4.5.3 Defenses against Hypervisor Introspection 101 4.5.3.1 Introducing Noise to VM Clocks 101 4.5.3.2 Scheduler-Based Defenses 101 4.5.3.3 Randomized Monitoring Interval 102 4.5.4 Summary 103 4.6 Identifying Compromised Users in Shared Computing Infrastructures 103 4.6.1 Target System and Security Data 104 4.6.1.1 Data and Alerts 105 4.6.1.2 Automating the Analysis of Alerts 106 4.6.2 Overview of the Data 107 4.6.3 Approach 109 4.6.3.1 The Model: Bayesian Network 109 4.6.3.2 Training of the Bayesian Network 110 4.6.4 Analysis of the Incidents 112 4.6.4.1 Sample Incident 112 4.6.4.2 Discussion 113 4.6.5 Supporting Decisions with the Bayesian Network Approach 114 4.6.5.1 Analysis of the Incidents 114 4.6.5.2 Analysis of the Borderline Cases 116 4.6.6 Conclusion 118 4.7 Integrating Attribute-Based Policies into Role-Based Access Control 118 4.7.1 Framework Description 119 4.7.2 Aboveground Level: Tables 119 4.7.2.1 Environment 120 4.7.2.2 User-Role Assignments 120 4.7.2.3 Role-Permission Assignments 121 4.7.3 Underground Level: Policies 121 4.7.3.1 Role-Permission Assignment Policy 122 4.7.3.2 User-Role Assignment Policy 123 4.7.4 Case Study: Large-Scale ICS 123 4.7.4.1 RBAC Model-Building Process 124 4.7.4.2 Discussion of Case Study 127 4.7.5 Concluding Remarks 128 4.8 The Future 128 5 Scalability, Workloads, and Performance: Replication, Popularity, Modeling, and Geo-Distributed File Stores 133Roy H. Campbell, Shadi A. Noghabi, and Cristina L. Abad 5.1 Introduction 133 5.2 Vision: Using Cloud Technology in Missions 134 5.3 State of the Art 136 5.4 Data Replication in a Cloud File System 137 5.4.1 MapReduce Clusters 138 5.4.1.1 File Popularity, Temporal Locality, and Arrival Patterns 142 5.4.1.2 Synthetic Workloads for Big Data 144 5.4.2 Related Work 147 5.4.3 Contribution from Our Approach to Generating Big Data Request Streams Using Clustered Renewal Processes 149 5.4.3.1 Scalable Geo-Distributed Storage 149 5.4.4 Related Work 151 5.4.5 Summary of Ambry 152 5.5 Summary 153 5.6 The Future 153 6 Resource Management: Performance Assuredness in Distributed Cloud Computing via Online Reconfigurations 160Mainak Ghosh, Le Xu, and Indranil Gupta 6.1 Introduction 161 6.2 Vision: Using Cloud Technology in Missions 163 6.3 State of the Art 164 6.3.1 State of the Art: Reconfigurations in Sharded Databases/Storage 164 6.3.1.1 Database Reconfigurations 164 6.3.1.2 Live Migration 164 6.3.1.3 Network Flow Scheduling 164 6.3.2 State of the Art: Scale-Out/Scale-In in Distributed Stream Processing Systems 165 6.3.2.1 Real-Time Reconfigurations 165 6.3.2.2 Live Migration 165 6.3.2.3 Real-Time Elasticity 165 6.3.3 State of the Art: Scale-Out/Scale-In in Distributed Graph Processing Systems 166 6.3.3.1 Data Centers 166 6.3.3.2 Cloud and Storage Systems 166 6.3.3.3 Data Processing Frameworks 166 6.3.3.4 Partitioning in Graph Processing 166 6.3.3.5 Dynamic Repartitioning in Graph Processing 167 6.3.4 State of the Art: Priorities and Deadlines in Batch Processing Systems 167 6.3.4.1 OS Mechanisms 167 6.3.4.2 Preemption 167 6.3.4.3 Real-Time Scheduling 168 6.3.4.4 Fairness 168 6.3.4.5 Cluster Management with SLOs 168 6.4 Reconfigurations in NoSQL and Key-Value Storage/Databases 169 6.4.1 Motivation 169 6.4.2 Morphus: Reconfigurations in Sharded Databases/Storage 170 6.4.2.1 Assumptions 170 6.4.2.2 MongoDB System Model 170 6.4.2.3 Reconfiguration Phases in Morphus 171 6.4.2.4 Algorithms for Efficient Shard Key Reconfigurations 172 6.4.2.5 Network Awareness 175 6.4.2.6 Evaluation 175 6.4.3 Parqua: Reconfigurations in Distributed Key-Value Stores 179 6.4.3.1 System Model 180 6.4.3.2 System Design and Implementation 181 6.4.3.3 Experimental Evaluation 183 6.5 Scale-Out and Scale-In Operations 185 6.5.1 Stela: Scale-Out/Scale-In in Distributed Stream Processing Systems 186 6.5.1.1 Motivation 186 6.5.1.2 Data Stream Processing Model and Assumptions 187 6.5.1.3 Stela: Scale-Out Overview 187 6.5.1.4 Effective Throughput Percentage (ETP) 188 6.5.1.5 Iterative Assignment and Intuition 190 6.5.1.6 Stela: Scale-In 191 6.5.1.7 Core Architecture 191 6.5.1.8 Evaluation 193 6.5.1.9 Experimental Setup 193 6.5.1.10 Yahoo! Storm Topologies and Network Monitoring Topology 193 6.5.1.11 Convergence Time 195 6.5.1.12 Scale-In Experiments 196 6.5.2 Scale-Out/Scale-In in Distributed Graph Processing Systems 197 6.5.2.1 Motivation 197 6.5.2.2 What to Migrate, and How? 199 6.5.2.3 When to Migrate? 201 6.5.2.4 Evaluation 203 6.6 Priorities and Deadlines in Batch Processing Systems 204 6.6.1 Natjam: Supporting Priorities and Deadlines in Hadoop 204 6.6.1.1 Motivation 204 6.6.1.2 Eviction Policies for a Dual-Priority Setting 206 6.6.1.3 Natjam Architecture 209 6.6.1.4 Natjam-R: Deadline-Based Eviction 215 6.6.1.5 Microbenchmarks 216 6.6.1.6 Natjam-R Evaluation 221 6.7 Summary 223 6.8 The Future 224 7 Theoretical Considerations: Inferring and Enforcing Use Patterns for Mobile Cloud Assurance 237Gul Agha, Minas Charalambides, Kirill Mechitov, Karl Palmskog,Atul Sandur, and Reza Shiftehfar 7.1 Introduction 237 7.2 Vision 239 7.3 State of the Art 240 7.3.1 Code Offloading 241 7.3.2 Coordination Constraints 241 7.3.3 Session Types 242 7.4 Code Offloading and the IMCM Framework 243 7.4.1 IMCM Framework: Overview 244 7.4.2 Cloud Application and Infrastructure Models 244 7.4.3 Cloud Application Model 245 7.4.4 Defining Privacy for Mobile Hybrid Cloud Applications 247 7.4.5 A Face Recognition Application 247 7.4.6 The Design of an Authorization System 249 7.4.7 Mobile Hybrid Cloud Authorization Language 250 7.4.7.1 Grouping, Selection, and Binding 252 7.4.7.2 Policy Description 252 7.4.7.3 Policy Evaluation 253 7.4.8 Performance- and Energy-Usage-Based Code Offloading 254 7.4.8.1 Offloading for Sequential Execution on a Single Server 254 7.4.8.2 Offloading for Parallel Execution on Hybrid Clouds 255 7.4.8.3 Maximizing Performance 255 7.4.8.4 Minimizing Energy Consumption 256 7.4.8.5 Energy Monitoring 257 7.4.8.6 Security Policies and Energy Monitoring 258 7.5 Coordinating Actors 259 7.5.1 Expressing Coordination 259 7.5.1.1 Synchronizers 260 7.5.1.2 Security Issues in Synchronizers 260 7.6 Session Types 264 7.6.1 Session Types for Actors 265 7.6.1.1 Example: Sliding Window Protocol 265 7.6.2 Global Types 266 7.6.3 Programming Language 268 7.6.4 Local Types and Type Checking 269 7.6.5 Realization of Global Types 270 7.7 The Future 271 Acknowledgments 272 8 Certifications Past and Future: A Future Model for Assigning Certifications that Incorporate Lessons Learned from Past Practices 277Masooda Bashir, Carlo Di Giulio, and Charles A. Kamhoua 8.1 Introduction 277 8.1.1 What Is a Standard? 279 8.1.2 Standards and Cloud Computing 281 8.2 Vision: Using Cloud Technology in Missions 283 8.3 State of the Art 284 8.3.1 The Federal Risk Authorization Management Program 286 8.3.2 SOC Reports and TSPC 288 8.3.3 ISO/IEC 27001 291 8.3.4 Main Differences among the Standards 292 8.3.5 Other Existing Frameworks 293 8.3.5.1 PCI-DSS 293 8.3.5.2 C5 294 8.3.5.3 STAR 294 8.3.6 What Protections Do Standards Offer against Vulnerabilities in the Cloud? 294 8.4 Comparison among Standards 296 8.4.1 Strategy for Comparing Standards 298 8.4.2 Patterns, Anomalies, and Discoveries 299 8.5 The Future 302 8.5.1 Current Challenges 304 8.5.2 Opportunities 305 9 Summary and Future Work 312Roy H. Campbell 9.1 Survivability 312 9.2 Risks and Benefits 313 9.3 Detection and Security 314 9.4 Scalability, Workloads, and Performance 316 9.5 Resource Management 319 9.6 Theoretical Considerations: Inferring and Enforcing Use Patterns for Mobile Cloud Assurance 321 9.7 Certifications 322 Index 327

Read more less

Book SynopsisA detailed account of various applications and uses of transparent ceramics and the future of the industry In Transparent Ceramics: Materials, Engineering, and Applications, readers will discover the necessary foundation for understanding transparent ceramics (TCs) and the technical and economic factors that determine the overall worth of TCs. This book provides readers with a thorough history of TCs, as well as a detailed account of the materials, engineering and applications of TC in its various forms; fabrication and characterization specifics are also described. With this book, researchers, engineers, and students find a definitive guide to past and present use cases, and a glimpse into the future of TC materials. The book covers a variety of TC topics, including: ? The methods employed for materials produced in a transparent state ? Detailed applications of TCs for use in lasers, IR domes, armor-windows, and various medical prosthetics<Trade Review"... this work can be unreservedly recommended to anyone who works or wants to become active in the field of transparent ceramics. Due to its autonomy in the relevant literature - in relation to both physics and materials science - it should definitely be purchased by libraries and companies in the field of technical ceramics. With its value as a source for facts, background information, connections and data, anyone doing research in this area will hardly be able to put this book down and should, thus, purchase it personally."—Prof. Rainer Telle, RWTH Aachen, cfi Ceramic Forum International / Ber. DKG 98 (2021) 4, D8-D9 (translated from the original article in German)Table of ContentsForeword xiii Acknowledgments xv General Abbreviations xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Importance of Transparent Ceramics: The Book’s Rationale Topic and Aims 1 1.2 Factors Determining the Overall Worth of Transparent Ceramics 2 1.2.1 Technical Characteristics 2 1.2.2 Fabrication and Characterization Costs 3 1.2.3 Overview of Worth 3 1.3 Spectral Domain for Ceramics High Transmission Targeted in This Book 3 1.3.1 High Transmission Spectral Domain 3 1.3.2 Electromagnetic Radiation/Solid Interaction in the Vicinity of the Transparency Domain 4 1.4 Definition of Transparency Levels 4 1.5 Evolution of Transmissive Ability Along the Ceramics Development History 6 1.5.1 Ceramics with Transparency Conferred by Glassy Phases 6 1.5.2 The First Fully Crystalline Transparent Ceramic 7 1.5.3 A Brief Progress History of All-Crystalline Transparent Ceramics 8 2 Electromagnetic Radiation: Interaction with Matter 11 2.1 Electromagnetic Radiation: Phenomenology and Characterizing Parameters 11 2.2 Interference and Polarization 13 2.3 Main Processes which Disturb Electromagnetic Radiation After Incidence on a Solid 13 2.3.1 Refraction 14 2.3.2 Reflection 17 2.3.3 Birefringence 20 2.3.4 Scattering 22 2.3.4.1 Scattering by Pores 22 2.3.4.2 Scattering Owed to Birefringence 24 2.3.5 Absorption 27 2.3.5.1 Transition Metal and Rare-Earth Cations in Transparent Ceramic Hosts 27 2.3.5.2 Absorption Spectra of Metal and Rare-Earth Cations Located in TC Hosts 28 2.3.5.2.1 Transition Metal and Rare-Earth Cations’ Electronic Spectra: Theoretical Basis 29 2.3.5.2.1.1 Electronic States of a Cation in Free Space 29 2.3.5.2.2 Absorption Spectra of Transition Metal and Rare-Earth Cations: Examples 50 2.3.5.2.2.1 The Considered Solid Hosts 50 2.4 Physical Processes Controlling Light Absorption in the Optical Window Vicinity 54 2.4.1 High Photon Energy Window Cutoff: Ultraviolet Light Absorption in Solids 54 2.4.2 Low Photon Energy Window Cutoff: Infrared Light Absorption in Solids 58 2.4.2.1 Molecular Vibrations 58 2.4.2.2 Solid Vibrations 59 2.4.2.3 Acoustic Modes 61 2.4.2.4 Optical Modes 62 2.5 Thermal Emissivity 66 2.6 Color of Solids 67 2.6.1 Quantitative Specification of Color 67 2.6.2 Coloration Mechanisms: Coloration Based on Conductive Colloids 71 3 Ceramics Engineering: Aspects Specific to Those Transparent 73 3.1 Processing 73 3.1.1 List of Main Processing Approaches 73 3.1.2 Powder Compacts Sintering 73 3.1.2.1 Configuration Requirements for High Green Body Sinterability: Factors of Influence 73 3.1.2.2 Powder Processing and Green-Body Forming 77 3.1.2.2.1 Agglomerates 77 3.1.2.2.2 Powder Processing 80 3.1.2.2.3 Forming Techniques 81 3.1.2.2.3.1 Press Forming 81 3.1.2.2.3.2 Liquid-Suspensions Based Forming 84 3.1.2.2.3.3 Slip-Casting Under Strong Magnetic Fields 86 3.1.2.2.3.4 Gravitational Deposition, Centrifugal-Casting, and Filter-Pressing 88 3.1.2.3 Sintering 89 3.1.2.3.1 Low Relevancy of Average Pore Size 89 3.1.2.3.2 Pore Size Distribution Dynamics During Sintering 89 3.1.2.3.3 Grain Growth 93 3.1.2.3.4 Methods for Pores Closure Rate Increase 93 3.1.2.3.4.1 Liquid Assisted Sintering 94 3.1.2.3.4.2 Pressure Assisted Sintering 94 3.1.2.3.4.3 Sintering Under Electromagnetic Radiation 96 3.1.2.3.4.4 Sintering Slip-Cast Specimens Under Magnetic Field 97 3.1.2.3.4.5 Reaction-Preceded Sintering 97 3.1.2.3.4.6 Use of Sintering Aids 98 3.1.3 Bulk Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) 98 3.1.4 Glass-Ceramics Fabrication by Controlled Glass Crystallization 98 3.1.4.1 Introduction 98 3.1.4.2 Glass Crystallization: Basic Theory 100 3.1.4.2.1 Nucleation 100 3.1.4.2.2 Crystal Growth 102 3.1.4.2.3 Phase Separation in Glass 102 3.1.4.2.4 Crystal Morphologies 103 3.1.4.3 Requirements for the Obtainment of Performant Glass-Ceramics 103 3.1.4.3.1 Nucleators 103 3.1.4.4 Influence of Controlled Glass Crystallization on Optical Transmission 104 3.1.4.4.1 Full Crystallization 105 3.1.5 Bulk Sol–Gel 105 3.1.6 Polycrystalline to Single Crystal Conversion via Solid-State Processes 107 3.1.7 Transparency Conferred to Non-cubic Materials by Limited Lattice Disordering 109 3.1.8 Transparent Non-cubic Nanoceramics 109 3.1.9 Grinding and Polishing 109 3.2 Characterization 111 3.2.1 Characterization of Particles, Slurries, Granules, and Green Bodies Relevant in Some Transparent Ceramics Fabrication 111 3.2.1.1 Powder Characterization 112 3.2.1.2 Granules Measurement and Slurry Characterization 113 3.2.1.3 Green-Body Characterization 114 3.2.2 Scatters Topology Illustration 115 3.2.2.1 Laser-Scattering Tomography (LST) 116 3.2.3 Discrimination Between Translucency and High Transmission Level 116 3.2.4 Bulk Density Determination from Optical Transmission Data 117 3.2.5 Lattice Irregularities: Grain Boundaries, Cations Segregation, Inversion 118 3.2.6 Parasitic Radiation Absorbers’ Identification and Spectral Characterization 123 3.2.6.1 Absorption by Native Defects of Transparent Hosts 123 3.2.7 Detection of ppm Impurity Concentration Levels 124 3.2.8 Mechanical Issues for Windows and Optical Components 126 4 Materials and Their Processing 131 4.1 Introduction 131 4.1.1 General 131 4.1.2 List of Materials and Their Properties 131 4.2 Principal Materials Description 131 4.2.1 Mg and Zn Spinels 131 4.2.1.1 Mg-Spinel 131 4.2.1.1.1 Structure 131 4.2.1.1.2 Fabrication 136 4.2.1.1.3 Properties of Spinel 146 4.2.1.2 Zn-Spinel 152 4.2.2 γ-Al-oxynitride 152 4.2.2.1 Composition and Structure 152 4.2.2.2 Processing 154 4.2.2.2.1 Fabrication Approaches 154 4.2.2.2.2 Powder Synthesis 155 4.2.2.2.3 Green Parts Forming. Sintering 155 4.2.2.3 Characteristics of Densified Parts 156 4.2.3 Transparent and Translucent Alumina 157 4.2.3.1 Structure 158 4.2.3.1.1 Utility of T-PCA 158 4.2.3.2 Processing of Transparent Ceramic Alumina 159 4.2.3.2.1 Raw Materials 159 4.2.3.2.2 Processing 159 4.2.3.3 Properties of Transparent Alumina 163 4.2.4 Transparent Magnesia and Calcia 163 4.2.4.1 Structure 164 4.2.4.2 Raw Materials and Processing 165 4.2.4.3 Properties 167 4.2.4.4 Transparent Calcium Oxide 169 4.2.5 Transparent YAG and Other Garnets 169 4.2.5.1 Structure, Processing, and Properties of YAG 170 4.2.5.1.1 Processing 170 4.2.5.1.2 Properties of YAG 174 4.2.5.2 LuAG 177 4.2.5.3 Garnets Based on Tb 178 4.2.5.4 Garnets Based on Ga 179 4.2.5.5 Other Materials Usable for Magneto-Optical Components 179 4.2.6 Transparent Yttria and Other Sesquioxides 180 4.2.6.1 Structure of Y2O3 180 4.2.6.2 Processing of Y2O3 181 4.2.6.2.1 Y2O3 Powders 181 4.2.6.2.2 Processing Approaches 181 4.2.6.2.3 Discussion of Processing 185 4.2.6.3 Properties of Y2O3 187 4.2.6.4 Other Sesquioxides with Bixbyite Lattice 187 4.2.6.4.1 Sc2O3 188 4.2.6.4.2 Lu2O3 189 4.2.7 Transparent Zirconia 190 4.2.7.1 Structure: Polymorphism, Effect of Alloying 190 4.2.7.2 Processing–Transparency Correlation in Cubic Zirconia Fabrication 192 4.2.7.2.1 Zirconia Powders 192 4.2.7.2.2 Forming and Sintering 193 4.2.7.3 Properties 194 4.2.7.3.1 Density of Zirconias 194 4.2.7.4 Types of Transparent Zirconia 195 4.2.7.4.1 TZPs 195 4.2.7.4.2 Cubic ZrO2 195 4.2.7.4.3 Monoclinic Zirconia 196 4.2.7.4.4 Electronic Absorption 197 4.2.8 Transparent Metal Fluoride Ceramics 198 4.2.8.1 Crystallographic Structure 199 4.2.8.2 Processing of Transparent-Calcium Fluoride 199 4.2.8.3 Properties 200 4.2.9 Transparent Chalcogenides 201 4.2.9.1 Composition and Structure 201 4.2.9.2 Processing 201 4.2.9.3 Properties 203 4.2.10 Ferroelectrics 203 4.2.10.1 Ferroelectrics with Perovskite-Type Lattice 203 4.2.10.2 PLZTs: Fabrication and Properties 204 4.2.10.2.1 Electro-optic Properties of PLZTs 207 4.2.10.3 Other Perovskites Including Pb 207 4.2.10.4 Perovskites Free of Pb 208 4.2.10.4.1 Ba Metatitanate 208 4.2.10.4.2 Materials Based on the Potassium Niobate-sodium Niobate System 209 4.2.11 Transparent Glass-Ceramics 210 4.2.11.1 Transparent Glass Ceramics Based on Stuffed β-Quartz Solid Solutions 210 4.2.11.2 Transparent Glass Ceramics Based on Crystals Having a Spinel-Type Lattice 212 4.2.11.3 Mullite-Based Transparent Glass-Ceramics 213 4.2.11.4 Other Transparent Glass-Ceramics Derived from Polinary Oxide Systems 214 4.2.11.5 Oxyfluoride Matrix Transparent Glass-Ceramics 214 4.2.11.6 Transparent Glass-Ceramics Including Very High Crystalline Phase Concentration 216 4.2.11.6.1 Materials of Extreme Hardness (Al2O3–La2O3, ZrO2) 216 4.2.11.6.2 TGCs of High Crystallinity Including Na3Ca Silicates 216 4.2.11.6.3 Materials for Scintillators 217 4.2.11.7 Pyroelectric and Ferroelectric Transparent Glass-Ceramics 217 4.2.12 Cubic Boron Nitride 222 4.2.13 Ultrahard Transparent Polycrystalline Diamond Parts 222 4.2.13.1 Structure 222 4.2.13.2 Fabrication 224 4.2.13.3 Properties 225 4.2.14 Galium Phosphide (GaP) 225 4.2.15 Transparent Silicon Carbide and Nitride and Aluminium Oxynitride 226 5 TC Applications 227 5.1 General Aspects 227 5.2 Brief Description of Main Applications 227 5.2.1 Envelopes for Lighting Devices 227 5.2.2 Transparent Armor Including Ceramic Layers 229 5.2.2.1 Armor: General Aspects 229 5.2.2.1.1 The Threats Armor Has to Defeat (Projectiles) 229 5.2.2.1.2 The Role of Armor 230 5.2.2.1.3 Processes Generated by the Impact of a Projectile on a Ceramic Strike-Face (Small Arm Launchers) 231 5.2.2.1.4 Final State of the Projectile/Armor Impact Event Participants 234 5.2.2.1.4.1 Armor Performance Descriptors 235 5.2.2.1.5 Characteristics which Influence Armor Performance 236 5.2.2.1.6 Ceramic Armor Study and Design 236 5.2.2.2 Specifics of the Transparent-Ceramic Based Armor 239 5.2.2.3 Materials for Transparent Armor 243 5.2.2.3.1 Ceramics 243 5.2.2.3.2 Single Crystals 245 5.2.2.3.3 Glass-Ceramics 246 5.2.2.3.4 Glasses 248 5.2.2.4 Examples of Transparent Ceramics Armor Applications 248 5.2.3 Infrared Windows 249 5.2.3.1 The Infrared Region 249 5.2.3.2 Background Regarding Heavy Duty Windows 249 5.2.3.2.1 Threats to Missile IR Domes: Material Characteristics Relevant for Their Protection 249 5.2.3.2.1.1 Impact of Particulates (Erosion) 249 5.2.3.2.1.2 Thermal Shock 250 5.2.3.3 Applications of infrared transparent ceramics 251 5.2.3.3.1 Missile Domes and Windows for Aircraft-Sensor Protection 251 5.2.3.3.2 Laser Windows: Igniters, Cutting Tools, LIDARs 251 5.2.3.3.2.1 Igniters 251 5.2.3.3.2.2 LIDAR-Windows 252 5.2.3.3.3 Windows for Vacuum Systems 252 5.2.3.4 Ceramic Materials Optimal for the Various IR Windows Applications 252 5.2.3.4.1 Competitor Materials: Glasses and Single Crystals 253 5.2.3.4.2 Glasses 253 5.2.3.4.3 Single Crystals 253 5.2.3.4.4 Sapphire 254 5.2.3.4.5 Crystals for the 8–12 μm Window 254 5.2.3.5 Radomes 254 5.2.4 Transparent Ceramics for Design, Decorative Use, and Jewelry 254 5.2.5 Components of Imaging Optic Devices (LENSES) 258 5.2.6 Dental Ceramics 260 5.2.7 Applications of Transparent Ferroelectric and Pyroelectric Ceramics 262 5.2.7.1 Flash Goggles 263 5.2.7.2 Color Filter 263 5.2.7.3 Stereo Viewing Device 264 5.2.7.4 Applications of Second-Generation (Non-PLZT) Ferroelectric Ceramics 265 5.2.8 Applications of Ceramics with Magnetic Properties 265 5.2.9 Products Based on Ceramic Doped with Transition and/or Rare-Earth Cations 267 5.2.9.1 Gain Media for Solid-State Lasers 267 5.2.9.1.1 Lasers: Definition and Functioning Mechanisms 267 5.2.9.1.1.1 Lasing Mechanisms 267 5.2.9.1.2 Laser Systems Efficiency: Characterizing Parameters 277 5.2.9.1.3 Laser Oscillators and Amplifiers 277 5.2.9.1.4 Device Operation Related Improvements Allowing Increase of Ceramic Lasers Performance 278 5.2.9.1.4.1 Diode Lasers as Pumping Sources 278 5.2.9.1.4.2 Cryogenic Operation 278 5.2.9.1.4.3 Cavity-Loss Control 279 5.2.9.1.4.4 Laser Output Signal Manipulation 280 5.2.9.1.4.5 Lasing Device Configuration Optimization 281 5.2.9.1.4.6 ThinZag Configuration 281 5.2.9.1.4.7 Virtual Point Source Pumping 282 5.2.9.1.5 Ceramic Gain Media (Host+Lasant Ion) Improvements 283 5.2.9.1.5.1 The Hosts 283 5.2.9.1.5.2 Principal Lasing Cations Operating in Ceramic Hosts 289 5.2.9.1.6 Applications of Ceramic Lasers 299 5.2.9.1.6.1 Materials Working 299 5.2.9.1.6.2 Laser Weapons 300 5.2.9.1.6.3 Combustion Ignitors: Cars and Guns 300 5.2.9.1.6.4 Other Applications 300 5.2.9.2 Q-switches 303 5.2.9.2.1 General 303 5.2.9.2.2 Transition Metal Cations Usable for Switching 304 5.2.9.2.2.1 Co2+ 304 5.2.9.2.2.2 Cr4+,5+ 306 5.2.9.2.2.3 V3+ 308 5.2.9.2.2.4 Cr2+ (d4), Fe2+ (d6) 309 5.2.9.3 Ceramic Phosphors for Solid State Lighting Systems 309 5.2.9.3.1 Artificial Light Sources: General Considerations 309 5.2.9.3.1.1 Conventional Light Sources Powered by Electricity 310 5.2.9.3.1.2 Incandescent Lamps 311 5.2.9.3.1.3 Discharge Lamps 311 5.2.9.3.1.4 Fluorescent Lamps 313 5.2.9.3.1.5 Solid-State Lighting Sources 313 5.2.9.3.2 Transparent Bulk Ceramics Based Phosphors for Light Sources Based on LEDs 314 5.2.9.3.2.1 Ce3+:YAG and Ce3+, RE3+:YAG Phosphors 314 5.2.9.3.2.2 Bathochrome Moving (Redshifting) of Ce3+ Emission by YAG Lattice Straining 318 5.2.9.3.2.3 Summary of SSLSs 321 5.2.9.4 Scintillators 321 6 Future Developments 325 7 Conclusions 327 References 329 Index 357

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to the fundamental chemistry and recent advances of battery materials In one comprehensive volume, Inorganic Battery Materials explores the basic chemistry principles, recent advances, and the challenges and opportunities of the current and emerging technologies of battery materials. With contributions from an international panel of experts, this authoritative resource contains information on the fundamental features of battery materials, discussions on material synthesis, structural characterizations and electrochemical reactions. The book explores a wide range of topics including the state-of-the-art lithium ion battery chemistry to more energy-aggressive chemistries involving lithium metal. The authors also include a review of sulfur and oxygen, aqueous battery chemistry, redox flow battery chemistry, solid state battery chemistry and environmentally beneficial carbon dioxide battery chemistry. In the context of renewable energy utilization and transportation electrificatTable of ContentsContributors ix Series Preface xiii Volume Preface xv Part 1: Chemistry of Li-Ion Battery Materials 1 Silicon-Based Anodes for Advanced Lithium-Ion Batteries 3Junhua Song, Xiaolin Li and Ji-Guang Zhang Surface Chemistry of Alkali-Ion Battery Cathode Materials 15Muhammad M. Rahman and Feng Lin Part 2: Lithium Metal Battery Materials 39 Li–CO2 Batteries 41Zhaojun Xie and Zhen Zhou S Electrode Materials 59Feng Li Lithium Metal Anode 75Siyuan Li, Jixiang Yang and Yingying Lu Lithium Oxygen Battery 97Raymond A. Wong, Hye Ryung Byon, Morgan L. Thomas, Kaoru Dokko and Masayoshi Watanabe Structural Engineering of Cathode Materials for Lithium–Sulfur Batteries 121Ligui Li, Jingping Yu, Nan Wang, Jun Zhao, Bin Fan, Shuaibo Zeng and Shaowei Chen Part 3: Materials and Chemistry of Non-Lithium Batteries 151 How to Maximize the Potential of Zn–Air Battery: Toward Acceptable Rechargeable Technology with or without Electricity 153Joohyuk Park, Jang-Soo Lee and Jaephil Cho Solid State and Materials Chemistry for Sodium-Ion Batteries 161Divya Sehrawat, Neeraj Sharma and Jennifer H. Stansby Multivalent Metallic Anodes for Rechargeable Batteries 197Jennifer L. Schaefer and Laura C. Merrill Redox-Active Inorganic Materials for Redox Flow Batteries 211Bo Hu, Jian Luo, Camden DeBruler, Maowei Hu, Wenda Wu and T. Leo Liu Electrode and Electrolyte Interaction in Aqueous Electrochemical Energy Storage 237Xiaowei Teng Na-Ion Batteries: Positive Electrode Materials 253Elizabeth H. Driscoll, Laura L. Driscoll and Peter R. Slater Part 4: Electrolyte Chemistry for Rechargeable Batteries 267 Solid-State Electrolyte 269Wei Luo, Chuang Yu and Liangbing Hu Chemistry of Soft Matter Battery Electrolytes 279Jelena Popovic Modeling Solid State Batteries 291Ting Hei Wan, Ziheng Lu and Francesco Ciucci Part 5: Advanced Characterizations of Inorganic Battery Materials 309 TEM Studies on Electrode Materials for Secondary Ion Batteries 311Sooyeon Hwang and Dong Su Synchrotron-Based Soft X-Ray Spectroscopy for Battery Material Studies 339Wanli Yang Solid Electrolyte Interphase in Lithium-Based Batteries 359Feifei Shi and Philip N. Ross Application of In Situ Electrochemical-Cell Transmission Electron Microscopy for the Study of Rechargeable Batteries 377Wentao Yao and Reza Shahbazian-Yassar Index 387

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn important contribution to the literature that introduces powerful new methods for modeling and simulating radio wave propagation A thorough understanding of electromagnetic wave propagation is fundamental to the development of sophisticated communication and detection technologies. The powerful numerical methods described in this book represent a major step forward in our ability to accurately model electromagnetic wave propagation in order to establish and maintain reliable communication links, to detect targets in radar systems, and to maintain robust mobile phone and broadcasting networks. The first new book on guided wave propagation modeling and simulation to appear in nearly two decades, Radio Wave Propagation and Parabolic Equation Modeling addresses the fundamentals of electromagnetic wave propagation generally, with a specific focus on radio wave propagation through various media. The authors explore an array of new applications, and detail various virtual electromagnetic tTable of ContentsPreface ix Acronyms xi Matlab Codes xiii Chapter 1: INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Electromagnetic Problems and Classification 1 1.2 Maxwell Equations 3 1.3 Guided Waves and Transverse/Longitudinal Decomposition 4 1.4 Two Dimensional Helmholtz's Equation 5 1.5 Validation, Verification, and Calibration Procedure 6 1.6 Fourier Transform, DFT and FFT 7 Chapter 2: WAVE PROPAGATION OVER FLAT EARTH 15 2.1 Flat Earth and GO Two-Ray Model 15 2.2 Single Knife Edge Problem and Four-Ray Model 16 2.3 Vertical Linear Refractivity Profile and Mode Summation 19 Chapter 3: PARABOLIC EQUATION MODELING 23 3.1 Introduction 23 3.2 Parabolic Wave Equation Form 24 3.3 Dirichlet, Neumann, and Cauchy Boundary Conditions 27 3.4 Antenna/Source Injection 28 3.5 Split-Step Parabolic Equation (SSPE) Model 29 3.5.1 Narrow-Angle and Wide-Angle SSPE 30 3.5.2 A MATLAB-Based Simple SSPE Code 30 3.6 FEM-Based Parabolic Equation Model 32 3.7 Atmospheric Refractivity Effects 40 Chapter 4: WAVE PROPAGATION AT SHORT RANGES 43 4.1 Introduction 43 4.2 Accurate Source Modeling 44 4.3 Wave Propagators in Two Dimensions 47 4.3.1 Flat Earth and Two-Ray Model 47 4.3.2 FEM-Based PE Wave Propagator 49 4.3.3 SSPE-Based PE Wave Propagator 49 4.3.4 Method of Moments Modeling 49 4.4 Knife Edge and Four Ray Model 49 4.5 Canonical Tests and Calibration 50 Chapter 5: PE AND TERRAIN MODELING 53 5.1 Irregular PEC Terrain 53 5.2 PE and Impedance Boundary Modeling 54 5.2.1 Discrete Mixed Fourier Transform (DMFT) 56 5.3 Numerical Results and Comparison 57 Chapter 6: ANALYTICAL EXACT AND APPROXIMATE MODELS 65 6.1 Wave Propagation in a Parallel Plate Waveguide 65 6.2 Green's Function in Terms of Mode Summation 68 6.3 Mode Summation for a Tilted Gaussian Source 70 6.4 A Hybrid Ray + Image Method 71 6.5 Numerical Models 73 6.5.1 Parabolic Equation Models: SSPE and FEMPE 73 6.5.2 Method of Moments 75 Chapter 7: WAVE PROPAGATION INSIDE THREE-DIMENSIONAL RECTANGULAR WAVEGUIDE 79 7.1 Introduction 79 7.2 Three-Dimensional Rectangular Waveguide Model 80 7.3 Three-Dimensional Parabolic Equation Models 81 7.3.1 SSPE Model 81 7.3.2 FEMPE Model 82 7.3.3 ADIPE Model 82 7.4 Tests and Calibration 83 Chapter 8: TWO WAY PE MODELS 89 8.1 Formulation of Two Way FEMPE Method 89 8.2 Formulation of Two Way SSPE Method 91 8.3 Flat Earth with Infinite Wall 91 8.4 Flat Earth with Single and Double Knife Edges 91 8.5 Two Way Propagation Modeling in Waveguides 96 8.6 Three-Dimensional Split-Step- and Finite-Element-Based Parabolic Equation Models 96 8.7 Tests and Calibration 97 Chapter 9: PETOOL VIRTUAL PROPAGATION PACKAGE 101 9.1 Introduction 101 9.2 PETOOL Software 103 9.3 Characteristic Examples 107 Chapter 10: FEMIX VIRTUAL PROPAGATION PACKAGE 113 10.1 Introduction 113 10.2 Analytical Surface-Wave Model 115 10.2.1 Path Loss 115 10.2.2 Norton's Model 115 10.2.3 Wait's Model 116 10.2.4 Millington's Curve Fitting Approach 117 10.3 Numerical Surface-Wave Model 118 10.4 FEMIX Package 119 10.5 Characteristic Examples 122 References 127 Index 135

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe third edition of the landmark book on power system stability and control, revised and updated with new material The revised third edition of Power System Control and Stability continues to offer a comprehensive text on the fundamental principles and concepts of power system stability and control as well as new material on the latest developments in the field. The third edition offers a revised overview of power system stability and a section that explores the industry convention of q axis leading d axis in modeling of synchronous machines. In addition, the third edition focuses on simulations that utilize digital computers and commercial simulation tools, it offers an introduction to the concepts of the stability analysis of linear systems together with a detailed formulation of the system state matrix. The authors also include a revised chapter that explores both implicit and explicit integration methods for transient stability. PoweTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv About the Authors xvii Part I Introduction Chapter 1 Power System Stability 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Requirements of a Reliable Electrical Power Service 4 1.3 Statement of the Problem 5 1.3.1 Definition of Stability 5 1.3.2 Classification of Stability Problems 6 1.3.3 Description of Stability Phenomenon 6 1.4 Effect of Impact on System Components 7 1.4.1 Loss of Synchronism 8 1.4.2 Synchronous Machine During a Transient 8 1.5 Methods of Simulation 10 1.5.1 Linearized System Equations 10 1.5.2 Large System with Nonlinear Equations 11 1.6 Planning and Operating Standards 11 Chapter 2 The Elementary Mathematical Model 19 2.1 Swing Equation 19 2.2 Units 21 2.3 Mechanical Torque 22 2.3.1 Unregulated Machines 22 2.3.2 Regulated Machines 24 2.4 Electrical Torque 26 2.4.1 Synchronous Torque 26 2.4.2 Other Electrical Torques 27 2.5 Power-Angle Curve of a Synchronous Machine 27 2.5.1 Classical Representation of a Synchronous Machine in Stability Studies 28 2.5.2 Synchronizing Power Coefficients 29 2.6 Natural Frequencies of Oscillation of a Synchronous Machine 30 2.7 System of One Machine Against an Infinite Bus: The Classical Model 31 2.8 Equal Area Criterion 37 2.8.1 Critical Clearing Angle 38 2.8.2 Application to a One-Machine System 39 2.8.3 Equal Area Criterion for a Two-Machine System 39 2.9 Classical Model of a Multimachine System 40 2.10 Classical Stability Study of a Nine-Bus System 42 2.10.1 Data Preparation 43 2.10.2 Preliminary Calculations 45 2.11 Shortcomings of the Classical Model 51 2.12 Block Diagram of One Machine 53 Chapter 3 System Response to Small Disturbances 61 3.1 Introduction 61 3.2 Types of Problems Studied 62 3.2.1 System Response to Small Impacts 62 3.2.2 Distribution of Power Impacts 62 3.3 The Unregulated Synchronous Machine 63 3.3.1 Demagnetizing Effect of Armature Reaction 64 3.3.2 Effect of Small Changes of Speed 65 3.4 Modes of Oscillation of an Unregulated Multimachine System 66 3.5 Regulated Synchronous Machine 73 3.5.1 Voltage Regulator with One Time Lag 73 3.5.2 Governor with One Time Lag 75 3.6 Distribution of Power Impacts 76 3.6.1 Linearization 77 3.6.2 A Special Case: t = 0+ 78 3.6.3 Average Behavior Prior to Governor Action (t = t1) 79 Part II Electrical and Electromagnetic Dynamic Performance Chapter 4 The Synchronous Machine 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Park’s Transformation 91 4.3 Flux Linkage Equations 94 4.3.1 Stator Self-Inductances 94 4.3.2 Rotor Self-Inductances 95 4.3.3 Stator Mutual Inductances 95 4.3.4 Rotor Mutual Inductances 95 4.3.5 Stator-to-Rotor Mutual Inductances 95 4.3.6 Transformation of Inductances 96 4.4 Voltage Equations 97 4.5 Formulation of State-Space Equations 99 4.6 Current Formulation 100 4.7 Per-Unit Conversion 101 4.7.1 Choosing a Base for Stator Quantities 102 4.7.2 Choosing a Base for Rotor Quantities 103 4.7.3 Comparison with Other Per-Unit Systems 104 4.7.4 The Correspondence of Per-Unit Stator EMF to Rotor Quantities 107 4.8 Normalizing the Voltage Equations 108 4.9 Normalizing the Torque Equations 113 4.9.1 The Normalized Swing Equation 114 4.9.2 Forms of the Swing Equation 114 4.10 Torque and Power 115 4.11 Equivalent Circuit of a Synchronous Machine 117 4.12 The Flux Linkage State-Space Model 119 4.12.1 The Voltage Equations 120 4.12.2 The Torque Equation 120 4.12.3 Machine Equations with Saturation Neglected 121 4.12.4 Treatment of Saturation 123 4.13 Load Equations 124 4.13.1 Synchronous Machine Connected to an Infinite Bus 124 4.13.2 Current Model 126 4.13.3 The Flux Linkage Model 127 4.14 Subtransient and Transient Inductances and Time Constants 131 4.14.1 Time Constants 133 4.15 Simplified Models of the Synchronous Machine 136 4.15.1 Neglecting Damper Windings: The E’q (One-Axis) Model 137 4.15.2 Voltage Behind Subtransient Reactance: The E” Model 142 4.15.3 Neglecting λd and λq for a Cylindrical Rotor Machine: The Two-Axis Model 150 4.15.4 Neglecting Amortisseur Effects and λd and λq Terms: The One-Axis Model 153 4.15.5 Assuming Constant Flux Linkage in the Main Field Winding 154 4.16 Parameter Determination for Generator Dynamic Models 155 Chapter 5 The Simulation of Synchronous Machines 165 5.1 Introduction 165 5.2 Steady-State Equations and Phasor Diagrams 165 5.3 Machine Connected to an Infinite Bus Through a Transmission Line 168 5.4 Machine Connected to an Infinite Bus with Local Load at Machine Terminal 169 5.4.1 Special Case: The Resistive Load, ZL = RL + j0 170 5.4.2 General Case: ZL Arbitrary 171 5.5 Determining Steady-State Conditions 172 5.5.1 Machine Connected to an Infinite Bus with Local Load 173 5.6 Examples 174 5.7 Initial Conditions for a Multimachine System 182 5.8 Determination of Machine Parameters from Manufacturers’ Data 183 5.9 Digital Simulation of Synchronous Machines 188 5.9.1 Digital Computation of Saturation 189 5.9.2 Updating λAD 192 Chapter 6 Load Modeling 199 6.1 Introduction 199 6.2 Static Load Models 200 6.3 Induction Motor Loads 203 6.3.1 Model Development of a Three-Phase Induction Machine 203 6.3.2 Representing Induction Machines in Stability Simulations 213 6.3.3 Stalled Motor Operation 215 6.4 Single-Phase Motors 216 6.4.1 Scroll Compressors 218 6.4.2 Point-on-Wave Effects 219 6.4.3 Dynamic Phasors 219 6.5 Power Electronic Loads 221 6.6 Self-Restoring Loads 224 6.7 Distributed Energy Resources 225 6.8 Composite Load Models 227 6.9 Data Development 229 6.9.1 Component Based 230 6.9.2 Measurement Based 232 Chapter 7 Simulation of Multimachine Systems 239 7.1 Introduction 239 7.2 Statement of the Problem 239 7.3 Matrix Representation of a Passive Network 240 7.3.1 Network in the Transient State 242 7.3.2 Converting to a Common Reference Frame 243 7.4 Converting Machine Coordinates to System Reference 244 7.5 Relation Between Machine Currents and Voltages 245 7.6 System Order 249 7.7 Machines Represented by Classical Methods 249 7.8 Linearized Model for the Network 252 7.9 Hybrid Formulation 258 7.10 Network Equations with Flux Linkage Model 260 7.11 Total System Equations 262 7.12 Alternating Solution Method 264 7.12.1 Nonlinear Loads 265 7.12.2 Network–Machine Interface 268 7.13 Simultaneous Solution Method 275 7.14 Design of Numerical Solvers 277 Chapter 8 Small-Signal Stability Analysis 281 8.1 Introduction 281 8.2 Fundamentals of Linear System Stability 282 8.3 Linearization of the Generator State-Space Current Model 284 8.4 Linearization of the Load Equation for the One-Machine Problem 288 8.5 Linearization of the Flux Linkage Model 293 8.6 State Matrix for Multimachine Systems 298 8.6.1 Formulation of the State Matrix 298 8.6.2 Representation of Static Loads in the State Matrix 300 8.7 Simplified Linear Model 312 8.7.1 The E' Equation 312 8.7.2 Electrical Torque Equation 313 8.7.3 Terminal Voltage Equation 314 8.7.4 Summary of Equations 315 8.7.5 Effect of Loading 318 8.7.6 Comparison with Classical Model 320 8.8 Block Diagrams 321 8.9 State-Space Representation of Simplified Model 322 Chapter 9 Excitation Systems 325 9.1 Simplified View of Excitation Control 325 9.2 Control Configurations 327 9.3 Typical Excitation Configurations 328 9.3.1 Primitive Systems 328 9.3.2 Type DC Excitation Control Systems with DC Generator-Commutator Exciters 332 9.3.3 Type AC Excitation Control Systems with Alternator-Rectifier Exciters 332 9.3.4 Type AC Excitation Control Systems with Alternator-SCR Exciter Systems 334 9.3.5 Type ST Excitation Control Systems with Compound-Rectifier Exciter Systems 335 9.3.6 Type ST Excitation Control System with Compound-Rectifier Exciter Plus Potential-Source-Rectifier Exciter 336 9.3.7 Type ST Excitation Control Systems with Potential-Source-Rectifier Exciter 336 9.4 Excitation Control System Definitions 337 9.4.1 Voltage Response Ratio 339 9.4.2 Exciter Voltage Ratings 341 9.4.3 Other Specifications 342 9.5 Voltage Regulator 344 9.5.1 Electromechanical Regulators 344 9.5.2 Early Electronic Regulators 345 9.5.3 Rotating Amplifier Regulators 345 9.5.4 Magnetic Amplifier Regulators 346 9.5.5 Digital Excitation Systems 348 9.6 Exciter Buildup 348 9.6.1 The DC Generator Exciter 348 9.6.2 Linear Approximations for DC Generator Exciters 356 9.6.3 The AC Generator Exciters 358 9.6.4 Solid-State Exciters 359 9.6.5 Buildup of a Loaded DC Exciter 360 9.6.6 Normalization of Exciter Equations 360 9.7 Limiting and Protection for Excitation Control Systems 361 9.7.1 Modeling Amplifier Limits 361 9.7.2 Control Limiters and Associated Protection 362 9.7.3 Volts per Hertz Protection 365 9.8 Excitation System Response 365 9.8.1 Noncontinuously Regulated Systems 365 9.8.2 Continuously Regulated Systems 369 9.9 State-Space Description of the Excitation System 379 9.9.1 Simplified Linear Model 381 9.9.2 Complete Linear Model 382 9.10 Computer Representation of Excitation Systems 389 9.10.1 Type DC1: DC Commutator Exciter 390 9.10.2 Type AC Systems: Alternator Supplied Rectifier Excitation Systems 393 9.10.3 Type AC1 System: Field-Controlled Alternator-Rectifier Excitation System 394 9.10.4 Type ST1 System: Controlled Rectifier System with Terminal Potential Supply Only 395 9.10.5 Type ST2 System: Static with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies 397 9.10.6 Type DC3 System: Noncontinuous Acting 399 9.11 Typical System Constants 400 9.12 The Effect of Excitation on Generator Performance 400 Chapter 10 The Effect of Excitation on Stability 409 10.1 Introduction 409 10.1.1 Transient Stability and Small-Signal Stability Considerations 410 10.2 Effect of Excitation on Generator Power Limits 411 10.3 Effect of the Excitation System on Transient Stability 415 10.3.1 The Role of the Excitation System in Classical Model Studies 415 10.3.2 Increased Reliance on Excitation Control to Improve Stability 417 10.3.3 Parametric Study 419 10.3.4 Reactive Power Demand During System Emergencies 421 10.4 Effect of Excitation on Small-Signal Stability 421 10.4.1 Examination of Small-Signal Stability by Routh’s Criterion 421 10.4.2 Further Considerations of the Regulator Gain and Time Constant 424 10.4.3 Effect on the Electrical Torque 425 10.5 Root-Locus Analysis of a Regulated Machine Connected to an Infinite Bus 426 10.6 Approximate System Representation 432 10.6.1 Approximate Excitation System Representation 432 10.6.2 Estimate of Gx(s) 433 10.6.3 The Inertial Transfer Function 437 10.7 Supplementary Stabilizing Signals 439 10.7.1 Block Diagram of the Linear System 439 10.7.2 Approximate Model of the Complete Exciter-Generator System 440 10.7.3 Lead Compensation 442 10.8 Linear Analysis of the Stabilized Generator 446 10.9 PSS Tuning in Multimachine Power Systems 448 10.10 Alternate Types of PSS 449 10.11 Digital Computer Transient Stability Studies 450 10.11.1 Effect of Fault Duration 452 10.11.2 Effect of the Power System Stabilizer 457 10.12 Some General Comments on the Effect of Excitation on Stability 459 Chapter 11 Dynamic Modeling and Representation of Renewable Energy Resources 463 11.1 Wind Turbine Generators 463 11.1.1 Type 1 WTGs 465 11.1.2 Type 2 WTGs 466 11.1.3 Type 3 WTGs 467 11.1.4 Type 4 WTGs 479 11.2 Photovoltaic Solar Plant Modeling 480 11.2.1 Generic Model of PV Solar Plant 480 11.2.2 Modified Generic Model of PV Solar Plant 481 Chapter 12 Voltage Stability 487 12.1 Modeling Requirements for Voltage Instability Analysis 487 12.2 Voltage Instability Analysis Using Time Domain Simulation 489 12.3 Dynamic VAr Planning and Optimization 493 12.3.1 Trajectory Sensitivity Analysis 493 12.3.2 Formulation of the VAr Optimization Problem 495 12.3.3 Implementation of the Dynamic VAr Optimization Approach 497 12.3.4 Application of Dynamic VAr Optimization Approach 499 Chapter 13 Dynamic Performance and Modeling of Flexible AC Transmission System(Facts) Components 503 13.1 Introduction 503 13.2 Static VAr System 503 13.2.1 Stability Characteristics of an SVS 506 13.2.2 Positive-Sequence Transient Stability Model for SVS 509 13.3 Thyristor-Controlled Series Compensation 511 13.3.1 Operating Modes of a TCSC 512 13.3.2 Equipment Characteristics and Limiting Conditions 513 13.3.3 TCSC Model for Transient Stability Studies 515 13.4 Static Synchronous Compensator 517 13.4.1 Statcom Model for Transient Stability Studies 519 13.5 High Voltage DC Transmission 519 Chapter 14 Power System Protection and Monitoring Associated With Power System Stability 525 14.1 Introduction 525 14.2 Power System Protection Functions Associated with Transient Stability Analysis 527 14.2.1 Bulk Transmission Line Out-of-Step Protection 527 14.2.2 Generator Out-of-Step Protection 533 14.2.3 Undervoltage Load Shedding 533 14.2.4 Underfrequency Load Shedding 534 14.3 Special Protection Schemes 535 14.3.1 Generation Rejection and Load Shedding 535 14.3.2 Controlled Islanding and Load Shedding 535 14.4 Synchrophasor-Based Monitoring of Power System Stability 537 14.4.1 Online Dynamic Security Assessment Using Synchrophasor Measurements and Decision Trees 537 14.4.2 Island Formation Prediction Scheme Supported by PMU Measurements 539 14.4.3 Real-Time Voltage Security and Oscillation Monitoring Using PMU Measurements 540 Part III Mechanical Dynamic Performance Chapter 15 Speed Governing 545 15.1 The Flyball Governor 546 15.2 The Isochronous Governor 551 15.3 Incremental Equations of the Turbine 553 15.4 The Speed Droop Governor 556 15.5 The Floating Lever Speed Droop Governor 561 15.6 The Compensated Governor 564 15.7 Electronic Governors 570 15.8 Governor Models for Transient Stability Simulations 571 Chapter 16 Steam Turbine Prime Movers 577 16.1 Introduction 577 16.2 Power Plant Control Modes 579 16.2.1 The Turbine-Following Control Mode 579 16.2.2 The Boiler-Following Control Mode 579 16.2.3 The Coordinated Control Mode 580 16.3 Thermal Generation 581 16.4 A Steam Power Plant Model 582 16.5 Steam Turbines 583 16.6 Steam Turbine Control Operations 590 16.7 Steam Turbine Control Functions 592 16.8 Steam Generator Control 604 16.9 Fossil-Fueled Boilers 605 16.9.1 Drum-Type Boilers 606 16.9.2 Once-Through Boilers 613 16.9.3 Computer Models of Fossil-Fueled Boilers 617 16.10 Nuclear Steam Supply Systems 620 16.10.1 Boiling Water Reactors 620 16.10.2 Pressurized Water Reactors 620 Chapter 17 Hydraulic Turbine Prime Movers 627 17.1 Introduction 627 17.2 The Impulse Turbine 627 17.3 The Reaction Turbine 629 17.4 Propeller-Type Turbines 631 17.5 The Deriaz Turbine 632 17.6 Conduits, Surge Tanks, and Penstocks 633 17.7 Hydraulic System Equations 639 17.8 Hydraulic System Transfer Function 644 17.9 Simplifying Assumptions 647 17.10 Block Diagram for a Hydro System 649 17.11 Pumped-Storage Hydro Systems 650 17.12 Representation of Hydro Turbines and Governors in Stability Studies 651 Chapter 18 Combustion Turbine and Combined-Cycle Power Plants 655 18.1 Introduction 655 18.2 The Combustion Turbine Prime Mover 655 18.2.1 Combustion Turbine Control 657 18.2.2 Off-Nominal Frequency and Voltage Effects 658 18.2.3 Nonlinear Governor Droop Characteristic 659 18.2.4 Recent Advances in Modeling Gas Turbines 660 18.3 The Combined-Cycle Prime Mover 663 18.3.1 Fuel and Air Controls 664 18.3.2 The Gas Turbine Power Generation 668 18.3.3 The Steam Turbine Power Generation 669 18.3.4 Recent Development in Modeling Combined-Cycle Plants 671 Appendix A 673 Appendix B 675 Appendix C 685 Appendix D 695 Appendix E 727 Appendix F 737 Appendix G 759 Appendix H 767 Appendix I 775 Appendix J 783 Index 793

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn important text that offers an in-depth guide to how information theory sets the boundaries for data communication In an accessible and practical style, Information and Communication Theory explores the topic of information theory and includes concrete tools that are appropriate for real-life communication systems.The text investigates the connection between theoretical and practical applications through a wide-variety of topics including an introduction to the basics of probability theory, information, (lossless) source coding, typical sequences as a central concept, channel coding, continuous random variables, Gaussian channels, discrete input continuous channels, and a brief look at rate distortion theory. The author explains the fundamental theory together with typical compression algorithms and how they are used in reality. He moves on to review source coding and how much a source can be compressed, and also explains algorithms such as the LZ family with applications to e.g. Table of ContentsPreface ix Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Chapter 2 Probability Theory 5 2.1 Probabilities 5 2.2 Random Variable 7 2.3 Expectation and Variance 9 2.4 The Law of Large Numbers 17 2.5 Jensen’s Inequality 21 2.6 Random Processes 25 2.7 Markov Process 28 Problems 33 Chapter 3 Information Measures 37 3.1 Information 37 3.2 Entropy 41 3.3 Mutual Information 48 3.4 Entropy of Sequences 58 Problems 63 Chapter 4 Optimal Source Coding 69 4.1 Source Coding 69 4.2 Kraft Inequality 71 4.3 Optimal Codeword Length 80 4.4 Huffman Coding 84 4.5 Arithmetic Coding 95 Problems 101 Chapter 5 Adaptive Source Coding 105 5.1 The Problem with Unknown Source Statistics 105 5.2 Adaptive Huffman Coding 106 5.3 The Lempel–Ziv Algorithms 112 5.4 Applications of Source Coding 125 Problems 129 Chapter 6 Asymptotic Equipartition Property and Channel Capacity 133 6.1 Asymptotic Equipartition Property 133 6.2 Source Coding Theorem 138 6.3 Channel Coding 141 6.4 Channel Coding Theorem 144 6.5 Derivation of Channel Capacity for DMC 155 Problems 164 Chapter 7 Channel Coding 169 7.1 Error-Correcting Block Codes 170 7.2 Convolutional Code 188 7.3 Error-Detecting Codes 203 Problems 210 Chapter 8 Information Measures For Continuous Variables 213 8.1 Differential Entropy and Mutual Information 213 8.2 Gaussian Distribution 224 Problems 232 Chapter 9 Gaussian Channel 237 9.1 Gaussian Channel 237 9.2 Parallel Gaussian Channels 244 9.3 Fundamental Shannon Limit 256 Problems 260 Chapter 10 Discrete Input Gaussian Channel 265 10.1 M-PAM Signaling 265 10.2 A Note on Dimensionality 271 10.3 Shaping Gain 276 10.4 SNR Gap 281 Problems 285 Chapter 11 Information Theory and Distortion 289 11.1 Rate-Distortion Function 289 11.2 Limit For Fix Pb 300 11.3 Quantization 302 11.4 Transform Coding 306 Problems 319 Appendix A Probability Distributions 323 A.1 Discrete Distributions 323 A.2 Continuous Distributions 327 Appendix B Sampling Theorem 337 B.1 The Sampling Theorem 337 Bibliography 343 Index 347

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroduces readers to micro and local power markets and their use for local initiatives, grid integration, and future applications This book provides the basis for understanding micro power markets, emphasizing its application for local initiatives, the grid integration of renewable-based generation, and facilitating the decarbonization of the future electrical networks. It gives readers a comprehensive overview of the market operation, and highlights the basis of the design of local and micro markets. Micro and Local Power Markets starts by covering the economics and basic principle of power markets, including the fundamentals of the power trading (for both wholesale and local markets). Following a definition of both micro and local (technical and economic aspects) power markets, the book then looks at the organization of such markets. It describes the design of those power markets, isolated from the wholesale markets, and examines the methodologies of the interaction between theseTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Foreword xiii Preface xv 1 Power Market Fundamentals 1Íngrid Munné-Collado, Pol Olivella-Rosell and Andreas Sumper 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Basic Design of Power Markets 5 1.2.1 Organization 5 1.2.1.1 Monopoly 5 1.2.1.2 Purchasing Agency 5 1.2.1.3 Wholesale Market 5 1.2.1.4 Retail Competition 7 1.2.2 Bilateral Contracts and Auctions 7 1.2.3 Clearing 10 1.2.4 Settlement or Pricing 10 1.2.5 Example 11 1.3 Mechanism for Auctions 13 1.3.1 Why Auctions in Energy Markets? 13 1.3.2 Auction Basics 13 1.3.2.1 The Revenue Equivalence Theorem 14 1.3.3 Types of Auctions 15 1.3.3.1 The English or Ascending-Bid Auction 15 1.3.3.2 The Dutch or Descending-Bid Auction 15 1.3.3.3 The First-Price Sealed-Bid Auction 15 1.3.3.4 The Second-Price Sealed-Bid Auction 16 1.3.4 Auction Mechanisms Applied to Electricity Products 16 1.3.4.1 Sealed-Bid Auctions 16 1.3.4.2 Descending Clock Auction 17 1.3.4.3 Hybrid Auctions 18 1.3.4.4 Combinatorial Auctions 19 1.3.4.5 Two-Sided Auction Mechanisms 19 1.3.5 Auction Characteristics in Power Markets 19 1.3.6 Auction Design 20 1.3.6.1 Objectives Establishment 20 1.3.6.2 Object Identification 20 1.3.6.3 Participation Encouragement 21 1.3.6.4 Vulnerabilities in the Auction Mechanism 21 1.3.7 Example 23 1.4 Markets for Futures, Energy, and Balancing 27 1.4.1 Forward and Futures Markets 27 1.4.2 Spot Markets 28 1.4.3 Day-Ahead Markets 29 1.4.4 Intraday Markets 30 1.4.5 Balancing Markets 32 1.5 Conclusions and Further Reading 33 References 34 2 Local and Micro Power Markets 37Íngrid Munné-Collado, Eduard Bullich-Massagué, Mònica Aragüés-Peñalba and Pol Olivella-Rosell 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Why Local and Micro? 38 2.3 The Evolution of Power Systems 40 2.4 Introduction to Microgrids 41 2.4.1 Microgrid Definition 41 2.4.2 Microgrid Components 43 2.4.3 Microgrid Operation Modes 45 2.4.3.1 Microgrid Connected to an External Distribution Grid 45 2.4.3.2 Microgrid Connected to Another Microgrid 46 2.4.3.3 Isolated Microgrid 48 2.5 Local and Micro Power Market Concepts 49 2.5.1 Local and Micro Power Market Definitions 49 2.5.2 Comparative Analysis 52 2.6 Local Market Design 59 2.6.1 Involved Agents and Stakeholders 60 2.6.2 Approach 63 2.6.2.1 Centralized (Pool-based) Approach 64 2.6.2.2 Peer-To-Peer 66 2.6.3 Services 68 2.6.3.1 Energy 68 2.6.3.2 Flexibility 70 2.6.4 Local Market Services and Approach Review 77 2.6.5 Local Market Interaction 81 2.7 Conclusions and Discussion 84 References 85 3 Micro Markets in Microgrids 97Bernt Bremdal and Iliana Ilieva 3.1 Introduction 97 3.2 Basic Definitions of Micro Market Functions in Microgrids 99 3.2.1 Island Mode Versus Connected Mode 99 3.2.2 Market Approach for Resource Allocations 101 3.2.3 The Importance of Ownership, Business Focus, and Responsibilities 102 3.2.4 Capacity Design and Physical Laws 105 3.2.5 Resource Efficiency 105 3.2.6 Prerequisites for a Liberal Market 108 3.2.7 Basic Organizational Structures 109 3.2.8 Single Seller–Single Buyer 110 3.2.9 Multiple Sellers–Single Buyer 110 3.2.10 Single Seller–Multiple Buyers 112 3.2.11 Multiple Sellers–Multiple Buyers 112 3.3 Operational Characteristics of Microgrid-based Micro Markets 113 3.3.1 Types of Microgrid 114 3.3.2 Degree of Connectivity to Main Supply 114 3.3.3 Geography 119 3.3.4 Ownership 120 3.3.5 Business Models 120 3.3.6 Physical Control and Communication System 121 3.3.7 Management of the Microgrid 122 3.3.8 Number of Independent Buyers and Sellers 123 3.3.9 Type of Supply 123 3.3.10 Type of Loads 124 3.3.11 Storage Capacity and Reserve Power 124 3.3.12 Exchange and Trade Concepts 125 3.3.13 Pricing and Settlement 126 3.3.14 Contract Types 127 3.3.15 Market Efficiency and Economic Welfare Considerations 129 3.3.16 The Role of ICT 129 3.4 Market Models 130 3.4.1 Introduction 130 3.4.2 Model 1: Central Control and Optimization 130 3.4.3 Model 2: Central Control – Distributed Decision Making 132 3.4.4 Model 3: Central Market Management and Double Auction 136 3.4.5 Model 4: Distributed Control – Peer-to-Peer Trade 142 3.4.6 Model 5: Non-competitive Allocation of Energy 150 3.5 Conclusions 158 References 160 4 Coupled Local Power Markets 165Pol Olivella-Rosell, Shahab Shariat Torbaghan and Madeleine Gibescu 4.1 Introduction 165 4.2 Local and Wholesale Market Coupling 167 4.2.1 Flexibility Definition 169 4.2.2 Services and Products Traded 171 4.2.3 Market Participants 172 4.2.3.1 The Local Market Operator 173 4.2.3.2 BRP and Local Markets 175 4.2.3.3 DSO and Local Markets 176 4.2.3.4 Prosumers and Local Markets 176 4.2.4 LFM Interaction Timeline 177 4.3 Local Market Clearing Mechanism in Coupled Markets 178 4.3.1 Day-ahead Scheduling 180 4.3.2 Intraday Scheduling 183 4.3.3 Quarterly Scheduling 186 4.4 Conclusions and Discussion 186 References 188 5 Digital Business Models for Local and Micro Power Markets 193Emmanuelle Reuter, Moritz Loock and Julia Cousse 5.1 What are Digital Business Models? 193 5.1.1 Digital Technology Enables Value and Money Flow to be Decoupled 194 5.1.2 Prosumption as Co-creation 194 5.2 Local Power Markets and Digital Business Models 196 5.2.1 Decentralization and Local Power Markets 196 5.2.2 Digitalization and the Rise of Platform Business Models 199 5.2.3 Case Examples of Platform Business Models 201 5.2.3.1 Case Example 1: Next Kraftwerke 202 5.2.3.2 Case Example 2: LichtBlick 202 5.2.3.3 Case Example 3: Piclo 202 5.2.3.4 Case Example 4: Change38 203 5.3 The EMPOWER Platform and Business Models 204 5.4 Social Acceptance of Local Power Markets 206 5.4.1 Citizen-level Acceptance 207 5.4.1.1 Key Drivers for Participation 208 5.4.1.2 Key Means for Participation 209 5.4.1.3 Key Barriers for Participation 212 5.4.2 Utility-Level Acceptance 213 5.4.3 Cooperative-Level Acceptance 215 5.5 Conclusion 219 References 220 6 Regulation of Micro and Local Power Markets 223Dirk Kuiken 6.1 Power Market Regulation 223 6.1.1 Definition: What and Why 224 6.1.2 Development 225 6.1.3 Regulators 227 6.1.4 Forms, Instruments, and Types 228 6.2 Common Power Market Regulation 230 6.2.1 Generation (Production) 231 6.2.2 Networks (Transportation and Distribution) 232 6.2.3 Trade 233 6.2.4 Consumption 234 6.3 Regulation of Micro and Local Power Markets 235 6.3.1 Definition 237 6.3.2 Isolated vs Interconnected Markets 238 6.3.2.1 Isolated Markets 239 6.3.2.2 Interconnected Markets 241 6.3.3 General Requirements 242 6.3.4 Existing Legal Frameworks 243 6.4 Trade Settings 245 6.4.1 Bilateral Agreements 245 6.4.1.1 Parties 245 6.4.1.2 Services 246 6.4.1.3 Terms and Conditions 247 6.4.2 Market Platforms 249 6.4.2.1 Market Operator 249 6.4.2.2 Market Rules 249 6.5 Further Discussion 253 Acknowledgements 254 References 255 Index 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisWhat every electrical engineering student and technical professional needs to know about data exchange across networks While most electrical engineering students learn how the individual components that make up data communication technologies work, they rarely learn how the parts work together in complete data communication networks. In part, this is due to the fact that until now there have been no texts on data communication networking written for undergraduate electrical engineering students. Based on the author's years of classroom experience, Fundamentals of Data Communication Networks fills that gap in the pedagogical literature, providing readers with a much-needed overview of all relevant aspects of data communication networking, addressed from the perspective of the various technologies involved. The demand for information exchange in networks continues to grow at a staggering rate, and that demand will continue to mount exponentially as the number of interconnected IoT-enaTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xix 1 Overview of Data Communication Networks 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Data Communication Network Model 1 1.3 Classification of Data Communication Networks 3 1.3.1 Transmission Method 3 1.3.2 Data Flow Direction 3 1.3.3 Network Topology 4 1.3.4 Geographical Coverage 7 1.3.5 Transmission Medium 8 1.3.6 Data Transfer Technique 8 1.3.7 Network Access Technique 9 1.3.8 Media Sharing Technique 9 1.4 Data Network Architecture 11 1.4.1 The OSI Protocol Reference Model 11 1.4.2 The Internet Architecture 12 1.5 Summary 14 2 Physical Layer 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Classification of Signals 17 2.3 Periodic Signals 18 2.4 Fourier Analysis of Periodic Signals 18 2.4.1 Reconstructing a Function from its Fourier Series 20 2.4.2 Fourier Analysis of Even and Odd Functions 21 2.4.3 Parseval’sTheorem 22 2.4.4 Complex Form of Fourier Series 23 2.5 Fourier Transform of Nonperiodic Signals 23 2.6 Filters 24 2.7 Line Coding 26 2.8 Modulation 28 2.8.1 Trigonometric Refresher Course 30 2.8.2 Amplitude Modulation 31 2.8.2.1 Overmodulation and Distortion 34 2.8.2.2 Single-Sideband Suppressed-Carrier Amplitude Modulation 34 2.8.3 Frequency Modulation 36 2.8.4 Phase Modulation 38 2.9 SamplingTheorem 38 2.9.1 Analyzing Impulse Train Sampling 39 2.9.2 Reconstruction of the Continuous-Time Signal 40 2.9.3 Statement of the SamplingTheorem 42 2.9.4 Proof of the SamplingTheorem 42 2.10 Analog-to-Digital Conversion: From PAM to PCM 44 2.10.1 Pulse Code Modulation 44 2.10.2 Quantization Noise 45 2.11 Basic DigitalModulation Schemes 46 2.11.1 Amplitude-Shift Keying 46 2.11.2 Frequency-Shift Keying 47 2.11.3 Phase-Shift Keying 48 2.12 Media Sharing Schemes 50 2.12.1 Frequency Division Multiplexing 50 2.12.1.1 Wavelength Division Multiplexing 52 2.12.2 Time Division Multiplexing 52 2.12.2.1 Synchronous Versus Asynchronous TDM 52 2.13 Modems 54 2.14 Transmission Media 54 2.14.1 Twisted Pair 55 2.14.2 Coaxial Cable 55 2.14.3 Optical Fiber 56 2.14.3.1 Fiber Modes 58 2.14.4 Wireless Medium 59 2.15 Channel Impairments 61 2.15.1 Attenuation 61 2.15.2 Noise 61 2.15.2.1 Concept of Decibel 63 2.15.2.2 Signal-to-Noise Ratio 64 2.15.3 Distortion 65 2.15.4 Equalization 66 2.16 Summary 68 3 Data Link Layer Protocols 73 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 Framing 73 3.3 Bit Stuffing 74 3.4 Flow Control 74 3.4.1 The Stop-and-Wait Protocol 75 3.4.2 The SlidingWindow Flow Control 75 3.5 Error Detection 76 3.5.1 Parity Checking 76 3.5.2 Two-Dimensional Parity 77 3.5.3 Cyclic Redundancy Checking 78 3.6 Error Control Protocols 80 3.6.1 Stop-and-Wait ARQ 81 3.6.2 Go-Back-N ARQ 81 3.6.3 Selective Repeat ARQ 82 3.7 Data Link Control Protocols 82 3.7.1 High-level Data Link Control 83 3.7.1.1 HDLC Frame Format 84 3.7.1.2 Control Field Format 85 3.7.2 Point-to-Point Protocol 86 3.7.2.1 PPP Components 87 3.7.2.2 PPP Frame Format 87 3.7.2.3 PPP Link Control 88 3.8 Summary 89 4 Multiple Access Schemes 91 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Multiplexing Schemes Revisited 92 4.2.1 FDM 93 4.2.2 TDM 93 4.2.3 CDM 93 4.3 Orthogonal Access Schemes 93 4.3.1 FDMA 94 4.3.2 TDMA 94 4.3.3 CDMA 95 4.4 Controlled Access Schemes 96 4.4.1 Centralized Polling 96 4.4.2 Token Passing 96 4.4.3 Service Policies 96 4.5 Random Access Schemes 97 4.5.1 Aloha System 97 4.5.2 Slotted Aloha 98 4.5.3 CSMA 98 4.5.4 CSMA/CD 99 4.5.4.1 Why Listen While Transmitting in CSMA/CD 100 4.5.5 CSMA/CA 102 4.6 Summary 102 5 Local Area Networks 105 5.1 Introduction 105 5.2 Ethernet 105 5.2.1 Ethernet Frame Structure 106 5.2.2 IEEE 802.3 LAN Types 107 5.2.3 Ethernet Topologies 108 5.2.4 LAN Switching 110 5.2.5 Classification of Ethernet Switching 111 5.2.6 Frame Forwarding Methods 112 5.2.6.1 Store-and-Forward Switching 112 5.2.6.2 Cut-Through Switching 113 5.2.6.3 Fragment-Free Switching 113 5.2.7 Highest Layer used for Forwarding 113 5.2.7.1 Layer 2 Switching 114 5.2.7.2 Layer 3 Switching 114 5.2.7.3 Layer 4 Switching 115 5.3 Virtual LANs 115 5.3.1 Advantages of VLANs 115 5.3.2 Types of VLANs 117 5.3.2.1 Port-Based VLAN 117 5.3.2.2 MAC Address-Based VLAN 118 5.3.2.3 Protocol-Based VLANs 119 5.3.3 VLAN Tagging 120 5.3.4 Comments 121 5.4 Gigabit Ethernet 122 5.4.1 Frame Bursting 123 5.5 Wireless LANs 123 5.5.1 IEEE 802.11bWLAN 125 5.5.2 IEEE 802.11aWLAN 125 5.5.3 IEEE 802.11gWLAN 125 5.5.4 Architecture of the IEEE 802.11WLAN 126 5.5.5 Ad Hoc Mode Deployment 126 5.5.6 Infrastructure Mode Deployment 126 5.5.7 IEEE 802.11WLAN Timers 127 5.5.8 IEEE 802.11WLAN Operation 127 5.5.9 DCF Mechanism 128 5.5.10 PCF Mechanism 128 5.5.11 Range and Data Rate Comparison in the PCF Environment 129 5.6 Token Ring Network 129 5.6.1 Token Frame Fields 130 5.6.2 Token-Passing Access Method 130 5.6.3 Data/Command Frame Fields 131 5.6.4 Token Access Priority 132 5.6.5 Logical and Physical Implementation 133 5.7 Summary 134 6 Network Layer Part I – IP Addressing 137 6.1 Introduction 137 6.2 IP Address 137 6.3 Maximum Transmission Unit 139 6.4 IP Version 4 Addressing 140 6.4.1 Class A IPv4 Addresses 141 6.4.2 Class B IPv4 Addresses 141 6.4.3 Class C IPv4 Addresses 142 6.4.4 Class D IPv4 Addresses 142 6.4.5 Class E IPv4 Addresses 142 6.5 IP Subnetting 143 6.6 Variable Length Subnet Mask Networks 145 6.7 IP Quality of Service 147 6.8 Operation of the Explicit Congestion Notification 149 6.9 Address Resolution Protocol 149 6.9.1 Source and Sink in Same LAN 150 6.9.2 Source and Sink in Different LANs: Proxy ARP 150 6.9.3 Source and Sink in Different Remote LANs 151 6.10 Dealing with Shortage of IPv4 Addresses 152 6.10.1 Private Internets 152 6.10.2 Network Address Translation 153 6.10.3 Classless Inter-Domain Routing 153 6.11 IPv6 154 6.11.1 IPv6 Header 156 6.11.2 Concept of Flexible Addressing in IPv6 157 6.12 Summary 157 7 Network Layer Part II – Routing 159 7.1 Introduction 159 7.2 Routing Principle 159 7.3 Routing Algorithms 159 7.4 Static Versus Dynamic Routing 160 7.5 Link-State Versus Distance–Vector Routing 160 7.6 Flat Versus Hierarchical Routing 161 7.7 Host-Based Versus Router-Intelligent Routing 161 7.8 Centralized Versus Distributed Routing 162 7.9 Routing Metrics 162 7.9.1 Path Length 163 7.9.2 Reliability 163 7.9.3 Delay 163 7.9.4 Bandwidth 163 7.9.5 Load 164 7.9.6 Communication Cost 164 7.10 Flooding Algorithm 164 7.11 Distance–Vector Routing Algorithms 164 7.12 Link-State Routing Algorithms 165 7.13 Routing Protocols 166 7.14 Routing Information Protocol 168 7.15 Routing Information Protocol Version 2 168 7.16 Open Shortest Path First Protocol 169 7.16.1 OSPF Routing Hierarchy 169 7.16.2 OSPF Routers 169 7.16.3 OSPF Routing 170 7.16.4 Maintaining the Topological Database 171 7.17 Advantages of OSPF Over RIP 172 7.18 The Dijkstra’s Algorithm 172 7.19 Multicast Routing 176 7.20 Types of Multicast Systems 177 7.21 Host-Router Signaling 177 7.22 Multicast Routing Protocols 178 7.22.1 Opt-In Protocols 179 7.22.2 Opt-Out Protocols 180 7.22.3 Source-Based Tree Protocols 180 7.22.4 Shared Tree Protocols 180 7.23 Multicast Forwarding 181 7.24 Summary 183 8 Transport Layer – TCP and UDP 187 8.1 Introduction 187 8.2 TCP Basics 189 8.2.1 TCP Ports 189 8.2.2 TCP Sockets 190 8.2.3 TCP Segment Format 191 8.3 How TCPWorks 193 8.3.1 TCP Connection Establishment 193 8.3.2 TCP Connection Release 194 8.3.3 TCP Connection Management 195 8.4 TCP Flow Control 196 8.4.1 Slow Start 198 8.4.2 Congestion Avoidance 200 8.4.3 Fast Retransmit 201 8.4.4 Fast Recovery 202 8.5 TCP and Explicit Congestion Notification 203 8.6 The SYN Flood DoS Attach 205 8.7 UDP 206 8.8 Summary 208 9 Transport Layer – SCTP and DCCP 209 9.1 Introduction 209 9.2 Stream Control Transmission Protocol 209 9.2.1 Motivation for a New Transport Protocol 210 9.2.2 Illustration of the HOL Blocking 211 9.2.3 Summary of Features of SCTP 211 9.2.4 SCTP Packet 212 9.2.5 SCTP Header 212 9.2.6 Association Establishment 213 9.2.7 Four-Way Handshake and the SYN Flood DoS Attach 214 9.2.8 Multihoming 214 9.2.9 Multistreaming 216 9.2.10 SCTP Graceful Shutdown Feature 217 9.2.11 Selective Acknowledgments 218 9.3 Datagram Congestion Control Protocol 218 9.3.1 DCCP Packet Structure 219 9.3.2 DCCP Connection 221 9.3.3 DCCP Congestion Management 223 9.3.3.1 CCID 2–TCP-Like Congestion Control 224 9.3.3.2 CCID 3–TCP Friendly Rate Control 224 9.4 Summary 225 10 Application Layer Services 229 10.1 Introduction 229 10.2 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 230 10.2.1 DHCP Basics 230 10.2.2 Discovery Phase 231 10.2.3 Offer Phase 231 10.2.4 Request Phase 231 10.2.5 Acknowledgment Phase 232 10.2.6 Example of Configuration Process Timeline 232 10.2.7 Address Lease Time 232 10.2.8 Static Addresses 233 10.3 Domain Name System 233 10.3.1 Structure of the DNS 234 10.3.2 DNS Queries 236 10.3.3 Name-to-Address Resolution Process 237 10.3.4 DNS Zones 238 10.3.5 DNS Zone Updates 239 10.3.5.1 Full Zone Transfer 239 10.3.5.2 Incremental Zone Transfer 239 10.3.5.3 Notify 240 10.3.6 Dynamic Update 240 10.3.7 Root Servers 241 10.4 Summary 241 11 Introduction to Mobile Communication Networks 243 11.1 Introduction 243 11.2 Radio Communication Basics 243 11.3 Model of Radio Communication System 244 11.4 RadioWave Propagation 246 11.4.1 Free-Space Propagation 246 11.4.2 Reflection 247 11.4.3 Diffraction 248 11.4.4 Scattering 249 11.5 Multipath Fading 250 11.6 Introduction to Cellular Communication 252 11.6.1 Frequency Reuse 252 11.6.2 Cellular System Architecture 253 11.7 Clusters and Frequency Reuse 256 11.8 Co-Channel Interference 258 11.9 Cell Splitting 258 11.10 Introduction to Mobile Cellular Networks 258 11.11 Mobile Cellular Network Architecture 259 11.12 Mobility Management: Handoff 260 11.12.1 Handoff Schemes 261 11.12.2 Hard Handoff versus Soft Handoff 261 11.13 Generations of Mobile Communication Networks 261 11.13.1 First-Generation Networks 262 11.13.2 Second-Generation Networks 262 11.13.3 Introduction to the GSM Network 263 11.13.4 GSM Channels 265 11.13.5 Power Control 266 11.13.6 Overview of IS-136 TDMA Networks 266 11.13.7 Overview of IS-95 CDMA Networks 266 11.13.8 Third-Generation Networks 269 11.13.9 Fourth-Generation Networks 270 11.13.10 Fifth-Generation Networks 271 11.14 A Note on Internet-of-Things 274 11.15 Summary 274 12 Introduction to Network Security 277 12.1 Introduction 277 12.2 Types of Network Attacks 277 12.3 Security Services 280 12.4 Data Encryption Terminology 281 12.5 Cryptographic Systems 281 12.5.1 Symmetric Cryptosystems 281 12.5.2 Public-Key Cryptosystems 281 12.5.3 Comparing Symmetric and Public-Key Cryptosystems 282 12.5.4 A Hybrid Encryption Scheme 283 12.6 Technical Summary of Public-Key Cryptography 283 12.6.1 Introduction to NumberTheory 283 12.6.2 Congruences 284 12.6.3 The Square and Multiply Algorithm 284 12.6.4 Euclid’s Algorithm 285 12.6.5 Extended Euclid’s Algorithm 286 12.6.6 Euler’s Phi Function (Euler’s Totient Function) 287 12.6.7 The RSA Algorithm 287 12.7 Digital Signatures 289 12.7.1 Generating a Digital Signature 289 12.7.2 Verifying a Digital Signature 290 12.8 IP Security Protocols 291 12.8.1 IPSec Modes 291 12.8.2 Security Association 292 12.8.3 Authentication Header 292 12.8.4 Encapsulating Security Payload 292 12.8.5 Key Distribution 293 12.9 Summary 294 Bibliography 295 Index 297

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to intelligent decision and pervasive computing paradigms for healthcare analytics systems with a focus on the use of bio-sensors Intelligent Pervasive Computing Systems for Smarter Healthcare describes the innovations in healthcare made possible by computing through bio-sensors. The pervasive computing paradigm offers tremendous advantages in diversified areas of healthcare research and technology.The authorsnoted experts in the fieldprovide the state-of-the-art intelligence paradigm that enables optimization of medical assessment for a healthy, authentic, safer, and more productive environment. Today's computers are integrated through bio-sensors and generate a huge amount of information that can enhance our ability to process enormous bio-informatics data that can be transformed into meaningful medical knowledge and help with diagnosis, monitoring and tracking health issues, clinical decision making, early detection of infectious disease prevention, and rapid analysis of Table of ContentsList of Contributors xvii 1 Intelligent Sensing and Ubiquitous Systems (ISUS) for Smarter and Safer Home Healthcare 1 Rui Silva Moreira, José Torres, Pedro Sobral, and Christophe Soares 1.1 Introduction to Ubicomp for Home Healthcare 1 1.2 Processing and Sensing Issues 3 1.2.1 Remote Patient Monitoring in Home Environments 4 1.2.1.1 Hardware Device 5 1.2.1.2 Sensed Data Processing and Analysis 6 1.2.2 Indoor Location Using Bluetooth Low Energy Beacons 8 1.2.2.1 Bluetooth Low Energy 9 1.2.2.2 Distance Estimation 9 1.3 Integration and Management Issues 14 1.3.1 Cloud-Based Integration of Personal Healthcare Systems 15 1.3.2 SNMP-Based Integration and Interference Free Approach to Personal Healthcare 17 1.4 Communication and Networking Issues 19 1.4.1 Wireless Sensor Network for Home Healthcare 21 1.4.1.1 Home Healthcare System Architecture 21 1.4.1.2 Wireless Sensor Network Evaluation 25 1.5 Intelligence and Reasoning Issues 26 1.5.1 Intelligent Monitoring and Automation in Home Healthcare 26 1.5.2 Personal Activity Detection During Daily Living 30 1.6 Conclusion 32 Bibliography 33 2 PeMo-EC: An Intelligent, Pervasive and Mobile Platform for ECG Signal Acquisition, Processing, and Pre-Diagnostic Extraction 37 Angelo Brayner, José Maria Monteiro, and João Paulo Madeiro 2.1 Electrical System of the Heart 37 2.2 The Electrocardiogram Signal: A Gold Standard for Monitoring People Suffering from Heart Diseases 38 2.3 Pervasive and Mobile Computing: Basic Concepts 40 2.4 Ubiquitous Computing and Healthcare Applications: State of the Art 42 2.5 PeMo-EC: Description of the Proposed Framework 44 2.5.1 Acquisition Module: Biosensors and ECG Data Conditioning 44 2.5.2 Patient’s Smartphone Application: ECG Signal Processing Module 49 2.5.3 Physician’s Smartphone Application: Query/Alarm Module 54 2.5.4 The Collaborative Database: Data Integration Module 55 2.5.4.1 Motivation 55 2.5.4.2 The Design of the Collaborative Database 57 2.5.4.3 Data Mining and Pattern Recognition 59 2.6 Conclusions 61 Acknowledgements 61 Bibliography 62 3 The Impact of Implantable Sensors in Biomedical Technology on the Future of Healthcare Systems 67 Ashraf Darwish, Gehad Ismail Sayed, and Aboul Ella Hassanien 3.1 Introduction 67 3.2 Related Work 71 3.3 Motivation and Contribution 74 3.4 Fundamentals of IBANs for Healthcare Monitoring 75 3.4.1 ISs in Biomedical Systems 75 3.4.2 Applications of ISs in Biomedical Systems 78 3.4.2.1 Brain Stimulator 78 3.4.2.2 Heart Failure Monitoring 78 3.4.2.3 Blood Glucose Level 80 3.4.3 Security in Implantable Biomedical Systems 80 3.5 Challenges and Future Trends 82 3.6 Conclusion and Recommendation 85 Bibliography 86 4 Social Network’s Security Related to Healthcare 91 Fatna Elmendili, Habiba Chaoui, and Younés El Bouzekri El Idrissi 4.1 The Use of Social Networks in Healthcare 91 4.2 The Social Media Respond to a Primary Need of Security 92 4.3 The Type of Medical Data 95 4.3.1 Security of Medical Data 96 4.4 Problematic 97 4.5 Presentation of the Honeypots 98 4.5.1 Principle of Honeypots 98 4.6 Proposal System for Detecting Malicious Profiles on the Health Sector 99 4.6.1 Proposed Solution 100 4.6.1.1 Deployment of Social Honeypots 100 4.6.1.2 Data Collection 103 4.6.1.3 Classification of Users 104 4.7 Results and Discussion 108 4.8 Conclusion 111 Bibliography 111 5 Multi-Sensor Fusion for Context-Aware Applications 115 Veeramuthu Venkatesh, Ponnuraman Balakrishnan, and Pethru Raj 5.1 Introduction 115 5.1.1 What Is an Intelligent Pervasive System? 115 5.1.2 The Significance of Context Awareness for Next-Generation Smarter Environments 117 5.1.2.1 Context-Aware Characteristics 118 5.1.2.2 Context Types and Categorization Schemes 119 5.1.2.3 Context Awareness Management Design Principles 121 5.1.2.4 Context Life Cycle 122 5.1.2.5 Interval (Called Occasionally) 124 5.1.3 Pervasive Healthcare-Enabling Technologies 125 5.1.3.1 Bio-Signal Acquisition 126 5.1.3.2 Communication Technologies 126 5.1.3.3 Data Classification 128 5.1.3.4 Intelligent Agents 128 5.1.3.5 Location-Based Technologies 128 5.1.4 Pervasive Healthcare Challenges 128 5.2 Ambient Methods Used for E-Health 130 5.2.1 Body Area Networks (BANs) 130 5.2.2 Home M2M Sensor Networks 131 5.2.3 Microelectromechanical System (MEMS) 132 5.2.4 Cloud-Based Intelligent Healthcare 132 5.3 Algorithms and Methods 133 5.3.1 Behavioral Pattern Discovery 133 5.3.2 Decision Support System 134 5.4 Intelligent Pervasive Healthcare Applications 134 5.4.1 Health Information Management 134 5.4.2 Location and Context-Aware Services 136 5.4.3 Remote Patient Monitoring 136 5.4.4 Waze: Community-Based Navigation App 138 5.5 Conclusion 138 Bibliography 139 6 IoT-Based Noninvasive Wearable and Remote Intelligent Pervasive Healthcare Monitoring Systems for the Elderly People 141 Stela Vitorino Sampaio 6.1 Introduction 141 6.2 Internet of Things (IoT) and Remote Health Monitoring 141 6.3 Wearable Health Monitoring 143 6.3.1 Wearable Sensors 143 6.4 Related Work 145 6.4.1 Existing Status 146 6.5 Architectural Prototype 147 6.5.1 Data Acquisition and Processing 150 6.5.2 Pervasive and Intelligence Monitoring 151 6.5.3 Communication 153 6.5.4 Predictive Analytics 153 6.5.5 Edge Analytics 154 6.5.6 Ambient Intelligence 155 6.5.7 Privacy and Security 155 6.6 Summary 156 Bibliography 156 7 Pervasive Healthcare System Based on Environmental Monitoring 159 Sangeetha Archunan and Amudha Thangavel 7.1 Introduction 159 7.2 Intelligent Pervasive Computing System 160 7.2.1 Applications of Pervasive Computing 163 7.3 Biosensors for Environmental Monitoring 163 7.3.1 Environmental Monitoring 165 7.3.1.1 Influence of Environmental Factors on Health 167 7.4 IPCS for Healthcare 167 7.4.1 Healthcare System Architecture Based on Environmental Monitoring 171 7.5 Conclusion 174 Bibliography 174 8 Secure Pervasive Healthcare System and Diabetes Prediction Using Heuristic Algorithm 179 Patitha Parameswaran and Rajalakshmi Shenbaga Moorthy 8.1 Introduction 179 8.2 Related Work 181 8.3 System Design 182 8.3.1 Data Collector 183 8.3.2 Security Manager 183 8.3.2.1 Proxy Re-encryption Algorithm 183 8.3.2.2 Key Generator 184 8.3.2.3 Patient 185 8.3.2.4 Proxy Server 185 8.3.2.5 Healthcare Professional 185 8.3.3 Clusterer 186 8.3.3.1 Hybrid Particle Swarm Optimization K-Means (HPSO-K) Algorithm 186 8.3.4 Predictor 191 8.3.4.1 Hidden Markov Model-Based Viterbi Algorithm (HMM-VA) 191 8.4 Implementation 193 8.5 Results and Discussions 196 8.5.1 Analyzing the Performance of PRA 196 8.5.1.1 Time Taken for Encryption 196 8.5.1.2 Storage Space for Re-encrypted Data 196 8.5.1.3 Time Take for Decryption 196 8.5.2 Analyzing the Performance of HPSO-K Algorithm 197 8.5.2.1 Number of Iterations (Generations) to Cluster Patients 198 8.5.2.2 Comparison of Intra-cluster Distance 198 8.5.2.3 Comparison of Inter-cluster Distance 199 8.5.2.4 Number of Patients in Cluster 200 8.5.2.5 Comparison of Time Complexity 201 8.5.3 Analyzing the Performance of HMM-VA 201 8.5.3.1 Forecasting Diabetes 201 8.5.3.2 Comparison of Error Rate 203 8.6 Conclusion 203 Nomenclatures Used 203 Bibliography 204 9 Threshold-Based Energy-Efficient Routing Protocol for Critical Data Transmission to Increase Lifetime in Heterogeneous Wireless Body Area Sensor Network 207 Deepalakshmi Perumalsamy and Navya Venkatamari 9.1 Introduction 207 9.2 Related Works 209 9.3 Proposed Protocol: Threshold-Based Energy-Efficient Routing Protocol for Critical Data Transmission (EERPCDT) 213 9.3.1 Background and Motivation 213 9.3.2 Basic Communication Radio Model 214 9.4 System Model 215 9.4.1 Initialization Phase 216 9.4.2 Routing Phase Selection of Forwarder Node 217 9.4.3 Scheduling Phase 217 9.4.4 Data Transmission Phase 218 9.5 Analysis of Energy Consumption 218 9.6 Simulation Results and Discussions 219 9.6.1 Network Lifetime and Stability Period 219 9.6.2 Residual Energy 220 9.6.3 Throughput 221 9.7 Conclusion and Future Work 222 Bibliography 223 10 Privacy and Security Issues on Wireless Body Area and IoT for Remote Healthcare Monitoring 227 Prabha Selvaraj and Sumathi Doraikannan 10.1 Introduction 227 10.2 Healthcare Monitoring System 227 10.2.1 Evolution of Healthcare Monitoring System 227 10.3 Healthcare Monitoring System 228 10.3.1 Sensor Network 230 10.3.2 Wireless Sensor Network 230 10.3.3 Wireless Body Area Network 230 10.4 Privacy and Security 233 10.4.1 Privacy and Security Issues in Wireless Body Area Network 234 10.5 Attacks and Measures 237 10.5.1 Security Models for Various Levels 241 10.5.1.1 Security Models for Data Collection Level 241 10.5.1.2 Security Models for Data Transmission Level 242 10.5.1.3 Security Models for Data Storage and Access Level 242 10.5.2 Privacy and Security Issues Pertained to Healthcare Applications 243 10.5.3 Issues Related to Health Information Held by an Individual Organization 243 10.5.4 Categorization of Organizational Threats 244 10.6 Internet of Things 248 10.6.1 WBAN Using IoT 248 10.7 Projects and Related Works in Healthcare Monitoring System 249 10.8 Summary 251 Bibliography 251 11 Remote Patient Monitoring: A Key Management and Authentication Framework for Wireless Body Area Networks 255 Padma Theagarajan and Jayashree Nair 11.1 Introduction 255 11.2 RelatedWork 256 11.3 Proposed Framework for Secure Remote Patient Monitoring 258 11.3.1 Proposed Security Framework 259 11.3.2 Key Generation Algorithm: PQSG 260 11.3.3 Key Establishment in NetAMS: KEAMS 262 11.3.3.1 Initiation of Communication by HPA 262 11.3.3.2 Establishment of Key by HMS 263 11.3.3.3 Authentication of HMS 263 11.3.4 Key Establishment in NetSHA: KESHA 265 11.3.4.1 Initiation of Communication by WSH 265 11.3.4.2 Establishment of Key by the HPA 266 11.3.4.3 Acknowledgment by HPA 266 11.4 Performance Analysis 267 11.4.1 Randomness 267 11.4.2 Distinctiveness 268 11.4.3 Complexity 269 11.5 Discussion 271 11.6 Conclusion 272 Bibliography 273 12 Image Analysis Using Smartphones for Medical Applications: A Survey 275 Rajeswari Rajendran and Jothilakshmi Rajendiran 12.1 Introduction 275 12.2 Pervasive Healthcare Using Image-Based Smartphone Applications 276 12.3 Smartphone-Based Image Diagnosis 277 12.3.1 Diagnosis Using Built-In Camera 278 12.3.2 Diagnosis Using External Sensors/Devices 280 12.4 Libraries and Tools for Smartphone-Based Image Analysis 284 12.4.1 Open-Source Libraries for Image Analysis in Smartphones 284 12.4.2 Tools for Cross-Platform Smartphone Application Development 286 12.5 Challenges and Future Perspectives 286 12.6 Conclusion 288 Bibliography 288 13 Bounds of Spreading Rate of Virus for a Network Through an Intuitionistic Fuzzy Graph 291 Deepa Ganesan, Praba Bashyam, Chandrasekaran Vellankoil Marappan, Rajakumar Krishnan, and Krishnamoorthy Venkatesan 13.1 Intuitionistic Fuzzy Matrices Using Incoming and Outgoing Links 292 13.2 Virus Spreading Rate Between Outgoing and Incoming Links 302 13.3 Numerical Examples 305 Bibliography 310 14 Data Mining Techniques for the Detection of the Risk in Cardiovascular Diseases 313 Dinakaran Karunakaran, Vishnu Priya, and Valarmathie Palanisamy 14.1 Introduction 313 14.2 PPG Signal Analysis 315 14.2.1 Pulse Width 315 14.2.2 Pulse Area 315 14.2.3 Peak-to-Peak Interval 316 14.2.4 Pulse Interval 316 14.2.5 Augmentation Index 317 14.2.6 Large Artery Stiffness Index 317 14.2.7 Types of Photoplethysmography 319 14.3 Related Works 319 14.4 Methodology 322 14.4.1 PPG Design and Recording Setup 322 14.5 Preprocessing in PPG Signal 323 14.6 Results and Discussion 325 14.7 Conclusion 327 Bibliography 328 15 Smart Sensing System for Cardio Pulmonary Sound Signals 331 Nersisson Ruban and A.Mary Mekala 15.1 Introduction 331 15.2 Background Theory 332 15.2.1 Human Heart 333 15.2.2 Heart Sounds 334 15.2.3 Origin of Sounds 334 15.2.4 Significance of Detection 334 15.3 Heart Sound Detection 335 15.3.1 Stethoscope 335 15.4 Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) 336 15.4.1 Properties of PVDF 337 15.4.2 PVDF as Thin Film Piezoelectric Sensor 337 15.4.3 Placement of the Sensor 338 15.4.4 Development of PVDF Sensor 339 15.4.4.1 Steps Involved in the Development of Sensor 340 15.5 Hardware Implementation 341 15.5.1 Charge Amplifier 341 15.5.2 Signal Conditioning Circuits for PVDF Sensor 342 15.5.3 Hardware Circuits 343 15.5.3.1 Design of Charge Amplifier 343 15.5.3.2 Filter Design 344 15.6 LabVIEW Design 346 15.6.1 Signal Acquisition 346 15.6.1.1 Data Acquisition with LabVIEW 347 15.6.2 Fixing of the Threshold Value 348 15.6.3 Fixing the Threshold for Real-Time Signal 349 15.6.4 Fixing the Threshold in Time Scale 350 15.6.5 Separation of Peaks from Resultant Signal (Sample 1) 351 15.6.6 Separation of Peaks from Resultant Signal (Sample 2) 351 15.7 Heart Sound Segmentation 353 15.7.1 Algorithm for Signal Separation 354 15.7.1.1 Case Structure Algorithm 354 15.7.2 Segmented S1 and S2 Sounds 354 15.8 Conclusion 356 Bibliography 357 16 Anomaly Detection and Pattern Matching Algorithm for Healthcare Application: Identifying Ambulance Siren in Traffic 361 Gowthambabu Karthikeyan, Sasikala Ramasamy, and Suresh Kumar Nagarajan 16.1 Introduction 361 16.2 Related Work 364 16.2.1 Role of Sound Detection in Existing Systems 366 16.2.2 Input and Output Parameters 367 16.2.3 Features of Pattern Matching 367 16.3 Pattern Matching Algorithm for Ambulance Siren Detection 368 16.3.1 Sensors 368 16.3.2 Sensor Deviations 368 16.3.3 Traffic Signal 369 16.3.3.1 How Do Traffic Signals Work? 369 16.3.3.2 Traffic Signal 370 16.3.3.3 Sound-Detecting Sensor 370 16.3.4 Pattern Matching Algorithm: Anomaly Detection 372 16.3.4.1 Algorithm and Implementation 374 16.3.4.2 Sound Detection Module 375 16.4 Results and Conclusion 375 Bibliography 376 17 Detecting Diabetic Retinopathy from Retinal Images Using CUDA Deep Neural Network 379 Ricky Parmar, Ramanathan Lakshmanan, Swarnalatha Purushotham, and Rajkumar Soundrapandiyan 17.1 Introduction 379 17.2 Proposed Method 381 17.2.1 Preprocessing 382 17.2.2 Architecture 383 17.2.3 Digital Artifacts 386 17.2.4 Pseudo-classification 387 17.3 Experimental Results 387 17.3.1 Dataset 387 17.3.2 Performance Evaluation Measures 388 17.3.3 Validation of Datasets Using Exponential Power Distribution 388 17.3.4 Ensemble 390 17.3.5 Accuracy and Stats 390 17.4 Conclusion and Future Work 393 Bibliography 394 18 An Energy-Efficient Wireless Body Area Network Design in Health Monitoring Scenarios 397Kannan Shanmugam and Karthik Subburathinam 18.1 Wireless Body Area Network 397 18.1.1 Overview 397 18.1.2 Architectures of Wireless Body Area Network 398 18.1.2.1 Tier 1: Intra-WBAN Communication 398 18.1.2.2 Tier 2: Inter-WBAN Communication 398 18.1.2.3 Tier 3: Beyond-WBAN Communication 399 18.1.3 Challenges Faced in System Design 399 18.1.3.1 Energy Constraint 401 18.1.3.2 Interference in Communication 401 18.1.3.3 Security 401 18.1.4 Research Problems 401 18.2 Proposed Opportunistic Scheduling 402 18.2.1 Introduction 402 18.2.2 System Model and Problem Formulation 403 18.2.2.1 System Model 403 18.2.2.2 Problem Formulation 404 18.2.3 Heuristic Scheduling 404 18.2.4 Dynamic Super-Frame Length Adjustment 407 18.2.4.1 Problem Formulation 407 18.3 Performance Analysis Environment and Metrics 408 18.3.1 Heuristic Scheduling with Fixed Super-Frame Length 409 18.3.2 Heuristic Scheduling with Dynamic Super-Frame Length 410 18.4 Summary 410 Bibliography 411 Index 413

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents the mathematical framework, technical language, and control systems know-how needed to design, develop, and instrument micro-scale whole-angle gyroscopes This comprehensive reference covers the technical fundamentals, mathematical framework, and common control strategies for degenerate mode gyroscopes, which are used in high-precision navigation applications. It explores various energy loss mechanisms and the effect of structural imperfections, along with requirements for continuous rate integrating gyroscope operation. It also provides information on the fabrication of MEMS whole-angle gyroscopes and the best methods of sustaining oscillations. Whole-Angle Gyroscopes: Challenges and Opportunities begins with a brief overview of the two main types of Coriolis Vibratory Gyroscopes (CVGs): non-degenerate mode gyroscopes and degenerate mode gyroscopes. It then introduces readers to the Foucault Pendulum analogy and a review of MEMS whole angle mode gyroscopTable of ContentsList of Abbreviations ix Preface xi About the Authors xiii Part I Fundamentals of Whole-Angle Gyroscopes 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Types of Coriolis Vibratory Gyroscopes 3 1.1.1 Nondegenerate Mode Gyroscopes 4 1.1.2 Degenerate Mode Gyroscopes 5 1.2 Generalized CVG Errors 5 1.2.1 Scale Factor Errors 7 1.2.2 Bias Errors 7 1.2.3 Noise Processes 7 1.2.3.1 Allan Variance 7 1.3 Overview 9 2 Dynamics 11 2.1 Introduction to Whole-Angle Gyroscopes 11 2.2 Foucault Pendulum Analogy 11 2.2.1 Damping and Q-factor 12 2.2.1.1 Viscous Damping 13 2.2.1.2 Anchor Losses 14 2.2.1.3 Material Losses 15 2.2.1.4 Surface Losses 16 2.2.1.5 Mode Coupling Losses 16 2.2.1.6 Additional Dissipation Mechanisms 16 2.2.2 Principal Axes of Elasticity and Damping 16 2.3 Canonical Variables 18 2.4 Effect of Structural Imperfections 18 2.5 Challenges of Whole-Angle Gyroscopes 20 3 Control Strategies 23 3.1 Quadrature and Coriolis Duality 23 3.2 Rate Gyroscope Mechanization 24 3.2.1 Open-loop Mechanization 24 3.2.1.1 Drive Mode Oscillator 24 3.2.1.2 Amplitude Gain Control 26 3.2.1.3 Phase Locked Loop/Demodulation 26 3.2.1.4 Quadrature Cancellation 26 3.2.2 Force-to-rebalance Mechanization 27 3.2.2.1 Force-to-rebalance Loop 27 3.2.2.2 Quadrature Null Loop 29 3.3 Whole-Angle Mechanization 29 3.3.1 Control System Overview 30 3.3.2 Amplitude Gain Control 32 3.3.2.1 Vector Drive 32 3.3.2.2 Parametric Drive 33 3.3.3 Quadrature Null Loop 34 3.3.3.1 AC Quadrature Null 34 3.3.3.2 DC Quadrature Null 34 3.3.4 Force-to-rebalance and Virtual Carouseling 35 3.4 Conclusions 35 Part II 2-D Micro-Machined Whole-Angle Gyroscope Architectures 37 4 Overview of 2-D Micro-Machined Whole-Angle Gyroscopes 39 4.1 2-D Micro-Machined Whole-Angle Gyroscope Architectures 39 4.1.1 Lumped Mass Systems 39 4.1.2 Ring/Disk Systems 40 4.1.2.1 Ring Gyroscopes 40 4.1.2.2 Concentric Ring Systems 41 4.1.2.3 Disk Gyroscopes 42 4.2 2-D Micro-Machining Processes 42 4.2.1 Traditional Silicon MEMS Process 43 4.2.2 Integrated MEMS/CMOS Fabrication Process 43 4.2.3 Epitaxial Silicon Encapsulation Process 44 5 Example 2-D Micro-Machined Whole-Angle Gyroscopes 47 5.1 A Distributed Mass MEMS Gyroscope – Toroidal Ring Gyroscope 47 5.1.1 Architecture 48 5.1.1.1 Electrode Architecture 49 5.1.2 Experimental Demonstration of the Concept 49 5.1.2.1 Fabrication 49 5.1.2.2 Experimental Setup 50 5.1.2.3 Mechanical Characterization 51 5.1.2.4 Rate Gyroscope Operation 52 5.1.2.5 Comparison of Vector Drive and Parametric Drive 53 5.2 A Lumped Mass MEMS Gyroscope – Dual Foucault Pendulum Gyroscope 54 5.2.1 Architecture 56 5.2.1.1 Electrode Architecture 57 5.2.2 Experimental Demonstration of the Concept 57 5.2.2.1 Fabrication 57 5.2.2.2 Experimental Setup 58 5.2.2.3 Mechanical Characterization 60 5.2.2.4 Rate Gyroscope Operation 60 5.2.2.5 Parameter Identification 60 Part III 3-D Micro-Machined Whole-Angle Gyroscope Architectures 65 6 Overview of 3-D Shell Implementations 67 6.1 Macro-scale Hemispherical Resonator Gyroscopes 67 6.2 3-D Micro-Shell Fabrication Processes 69 6.2.1 Bulk Micro-Machining Processes 69 6.2.2 Surface-Micro-Machined Micro-Shell Resonators 74 6.3 Transduction of 3-D Micro-Shell Resonators 79 6.3.1 Electromagnetic Excitation 79 6.3.2 Optomechanical Detection 80 6.3.3 Electrostatic Transduction 81 7 Design and Fabrication of Micro-glassblown Wineglass Resonators 87 7.1 Design of Micro-Glassblown Wineglass Resonators 88 7.1.1 Design of Micro-Wineglass Geometry 90 7.1.1.1 Analytical Solution 90 7.1.1.2 Finite Element Analysis 92 7.1.1.3 Effect of Stem Geometry on Anchor Loss 94 7.1.2 Design for High Frequency Symmetry 96 7.1.2.1 Frequency Symmetry Scaling Laws 97 7.1.2.2 Stability of Micro-Glassblown Structures 101 7.2 An Example Fabrication Process for Micro-glassblown Wineglass Resonators 102 7.2.1 Substrate Preparation 103 7.2.2 Wafer Bonding 103 7.2.3 Micro-Glassblowing 104 7.2.4 Wineglass Release 105 7.3 Characterization of Micro-Glassblown Shells 106 7.3.1 Surface Roughness 107 7.3.2 Material Composition 108 8 Transduction of Micro-Glassblown Wineglass Resonators 111 8.1 Assembled Electrodes 111 8.1.1 Design 111 8.1.2 Fabrication 112 8.1.2.1 Experimental Characterization 113 8.2 In-plane Electrodes 115 8.3 Fabrication 115 8.4 Experimental Characterization 118 8.5 Out-of-plane Electrodes 123 8.6 Design 123 8.7 Fabrication 126 8.8 Experimental Characterization 129 9 Conclusions and Future Trends 133 9.1 Mechanical Trimming of Structural Imperfections 133 9.2 Self-calibration 134 9.3 Integration and Packaging 135 References 137 Index 149

Read more less

Book SynopsisORGANIC REACTIONS CYCLIZATION REACTIONS OF NITROGEN-CENTERED RADICALS Stuart W. McCombie, Béatrice Quiclet-Sire, and Samir Z. Zard TRANSITION-METAL-CATALYZED AMINOOXYGENATION OF ALKENES Sherry R. Chemler, Dake Chen, Shuklendu D. Karyakarte, Jonathan M. Shikora, and Tomasz WdowikTable of ContentsAuthor Biography xix Preface xxi 1 PWM Dc-to-Dc Power Conversion 1 Part I Dc-to-Dc Power Converter Circuits 13 2 Buck Converter 15 3 Dc-to-Dc Power Converter Circuits 63 Part II Modeling and Dynamics of PWM Converters 127 4 Modeling PWM Dc-to-Dc Converters 129 5 Power Stage Transfer Functions 187 6 Dynamic Performance of PWM Dc-to-Dc Converters 241 Part III Control Schemes and Converter Performance 287 7 Feedback Compensation and Closed-Loop Performance – Voltage Mode Control 289 8 Current Mode Control 357 Part IV Dc Power Distribution Systems 465 9 Uncoupled Converter and Extra Element Theorem 467 10 Load-Coupled Converters and Loading Effects 509 11 Source-Coupled Converters and Input Filter Interaction 551 12 Design of Dc Power Distribution Systems 591 Appendix A Answers to End-of-Chapter Problems 665 Index 683

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive overview of the Internet of Things' core concepts, technologies, and applications Internet of Things A to Z offers a holistic approach to the Internet of Things (IoT) model. The Internet of Things refers to uniquely identifiable objects and their virtual representations in an Internet-like structure. Recently, there has been a rapid growth in research on IoT communications and networks, that confirms the scalability and broad reach of the core concepts. With contributions from a panel of international experts, the text offers insight into the ideas, technologies, and applications of this subject. The authors discuss recent developments in the field and the most current and emerging trends in IoT. In addition, the text is filled with examples of innovative applications and real-world case studies. Internet of Things A to Z fills the need for an up-to-date volume on the topic. This important book: Covers in great detail tTable of ContentsPreface xix Acknowledgments xxv Contributors xxvii Part I Concepts and Perspectives 1 1 Introduction to the Internet of Things 3Detlef Schoder 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Internet of Things Concepts 7 1.3 Who Works on the Internet of Things? 11 1.4 Internet of Things Framework 12 1.5 Information and Communication Technology Infrastructure 14 1.6 Derived Qualities of Modern ICT 31 1.7 Potential for Product, Process, and Business Model Innovations 34 1.8 Implications and Challenges 38 1.9 Conclusion 44 2 Environment, People, and Time as Factors in the Internet of Things Technical Revolution 51Jan Sliwa 2.1 Introduction 51 2.2 Technical Revolutions 52 2.3 Cyber–Physical–Social Systems 54 2.4 Environment 56 2.5 Time 58 2.6 People 63 2.7 Cybersecurity 67 2.8 Reasoning from Data 69 2.9 Adaptable Self-Organizing Systems 70 2.10 Moral Things 72 2.11 Conclusion 74 Part II Enablers 77 3 An Overview of Enabling Technologies for the Internet of Things 79Faisal Alsubaei, Abdullah Abuhussein, and Sajjan Shiva 3.1 Introduction 79 3.2 Overview of IoT Architecture 80 3.3 Enabling Technologies 81 3.4 IoT Platforms and Operating Systems 105 3.5 Conclusion 108 4 Cloud and Fog Computing in the Internet of Things 113Daniel Happ 4.1 Introduction 113 4.2 IoT System Requirements 114 4.3 Cloud Computing in IoT 116 4.4 Fog Computing in IoT 122 4.5 Conclusion 131 5 RFID in the Internet of Things 135Akaa Agbaeze Eteng, Sharul Kamal Abdul Rahim, and Chee Yen Leow 5.1 Introduction 135 5.2 Historical Perspective 135 5.3 RFID and the Internet of Things 137 5.4 Emergent Issues 144 5.5 Conclusion 146 6 A Tutorial Introduction to IoT Design and Prototyping with Examples 153Manuel Meruje, Musa Gwani Samaila, Virginia N. L. Franqueira, Mário Marques Freire, and Pedro Ricardo Morais Inácio 6.1 Introduction 153 6.2 Main Features of IoT Hardware Development Platforms 154 6.3 Design and Prototyping of IoT Applications 169 6.4 Projects on IoT Applications 173 6.5 Conclusion 184 7 On Standardizing the Internet of Things and Its Applications 191Kai Jakobs 7.1 Introduction 191 7.2 Current Status 193 7.3 The Standardization Environment 199 7.4 Standardization in Selected Application Areas 201 7.5 Discussion and Some Speculation 210 7.6 Conclusion 213 Part III Security Issues and Solutions 219 8 Security Mechanisms and Technologies for Constrained IoT Devices 221Marco Tiloca and Shahid Raza 8.1 Introduction 221 8.2 Security in IoT Protocols and Technologies 222 8.3 Security Issues and Solutions 234 8.4 Conclusion 247 9 Blockchain-Based Security Solutions for IoT Systems 255Göran Pulkkis, Jonny Karlsson, and Magnus Westerlund 9.1 Introduction 255 9.2 Regulatory Requirements 256 9.3 Blockchain Technology 259 9.4 Blockchains and IoT Systems 261 9.5 Examples of Blockchain-Based Security Solutions for IoT Systems 262 9.6 Challenges and Future Research 270 9.7 Conclusions 270 10 The Internet of Things and IT Auditing 275John Shu, Jason M. Rosenberg, Shambhu Upadhyaya, and Hejamadi Raghav Rao 10.1 Introduction 275 10.2 Risks Associated with IoT 276 10.3 IT Auditing 279 10.4 Use Cases of IoT in IT Auditing 286 10.5 Protecting the Business Network 287 10.6 Conclusion 289 Part IV Application Domains 293 11 The Industrial Internet of Things 295Alexander Willner 11.1 Introduction 295 11.2 Market Overview 296 11.3 Interoperability and Technologies 303 11.4 Alliances 309 11.5 Conclusions 314 12 Internet of Things Applications for Smart Cities 319Daniel Minoli and Benedict Occhiogrosso 12.1 Introduction 319 12.2 IoT Applications for Smart Cities 321 12.3 Specific Smart City Applications 330 12.4 Optimal Enablement of Video and Multimedia Capabilities in IOT 338 12.5 Key Underlying Technologies for Smart Cities IOT Applications 340 12.6 Challenges and Future Research 349 12.7 Conclusion 350 13 Smart Connected Homes 359Joseph Bugeja, Andreas Jacobsson, and Paul Davidsson 13.1 Introduction 359 13.2 The Smart Connected Home Domain 360 13.3 Smart Connected Home Systems 364 13.4 The Smart Connected Home Technologies 367 13.5 Smart Connected Home Architectures 375 13.6 Smart Connected Home Challenges and Research Directions 376 13.7 Conclusions 381 14 The Emerging “Energy Internet of Things” 385Daniel Minoli and Benedict Occhiogrosso 14.1 Introduction 385 14.2 Power Management Trends and EIoT Support 390 14.3 Real-Life Power Management Optimization Approaches 410 14.4 Challenges and Future Directions 415 14.5 Conclusion 417 15 Implementing the Internet of Things for Renewable Energy 425Lucas Finco and Daniel Minoli 15.1 Introduction 425 15.2 Managing the Impact of Sustainable Energy 426 15.3 EIoT Deployment 432 15.4 Industry Standards for EIoT 439 15.5 Security Considerations in EIoT and Clean Energy Environments 441 15.6 Conclusion 442 16 The Internet of Things and People in Health Care 447Nancy L. Russo and Jeanette Eriksson 16.1 Introduction 447 16.2 The Smart Health Care Ecosystem 448 16.3 Dimensions of Internet of Things Applications in Health Care 453 16.4 Examples of IoT-Related Health Care Applications and Their Dimensions 458 16.5 Challenges 469 16.6 Conclusion 471 17 Internet of Things in Smart Ambulance and Emergency Medicine 475Bernard Fong, A. C. M. Fong, and C. K. Li 17.1 Introduction 475 17.2 IoT in Emergency Medicine 477 17.3 Integration and Compatibility 486 17.4 Case Study: Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease 492 17.5 Smart Ambulance Challenges 498 17.6 Conclusions 500 18 Internet of Things Applications for Agriculture 507Lei Zhang, Ibibia K. Dabipi, and Willie L. Brown Jr. 18.1 Introduction 507 18.2 Internet of Things-Based Precision Agriculture 510 18.3 IoT Application in Agriculture Irrigation 512 18.4 IoT Application in Agriculture Fertilization 516 18.5 IoT Application in Crop Disease and Pest Management 518 18.6 IoT Application in Precision Livestock Farming 519 18.7 Conclusion 522 19 The Internet of Flying Things 529Daniel Fernando Pigatto, Mariana Rodrigues, João Vitor de Carvalho Fontes, Alex Sandro Roschildt Pinto, James Smith, and Kalinka Regina Lucas Jaquie Castelo Branco 19.1 Introduction 529 19.2 Flying Things 530 19.3 The Internet of Flying Things 533 19.4 Challenges 542 19.5 Case Studies 549 19.6 Conclusions 557 Part V Relevant Sample Applications 563 20 An Internet of Things Approach to “Read” the Emotion of Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder 565Tiffany Y. Tang and Pinata Winoto 20.1 Introduction 565 20.2 Background 567 20.3 Related Work 568 20.4 The Internet of Things Environment for Emotion Recognition 571 20.5 The Study and Discussions 580 20.6 Conclusions 586 21 A Low-Cost IoT Framework for Landslide Prediction and Risk Communication 593Pratik Chaturvedi, Kamal Kishore Thakur, Naresh Mali, Venkata Uday Kala, Sudhakar Kumar, Srishti Yadav, and Varun Dutt 21.1 Introduction 593 21.2 Background 594 21.3 System Design and Implementation 595 21.4 Testing the IoT Framework 596 21.5 Results 603 21.6 Conclusions 605 Glossary 611 Author’s Biography 625 Index 645

Read more less

Book SynopsisCovers the latest developments in PNT technologies, including integrated satellite navigation, sensor systems, and civil applications Featuring sixty-four chapters that are divided into six parts, this two-volume work provides comprehensive coverage of the state-of-the-art in satellite-based position, navigation, and timing (PNT) technologies and civilian applications. It also examines alternative navigation technologies based on other signals-of-opportunity and sensors and offers a comprehensive treatment on integrated PNT systems for consumer and commercial applications. Volume 1 of Position, Navigation, and Timing Technologies in the 21st Century: Integrated Satellite Navigation, Sensor Systems, and Civil Applications contains three parts and focuses on the satellite navigation systems, technologies, and engineering and scientific applications. It starts with a historical perspective of GPS development and other related PNT development. Current global Table of ContentsPart D: Position, Navigation, and Timing Using Radio Signals-of-Opportunity 35. Overview of Volume 2: Integrated PNT Technologies and ApplicationsJohn F. Raquet, Air Force Institute of Technology, US 36. Non-Linear Recursive Estimation for Integrated Navigation SystemsMichael J. Veth, Veth Research Associates, US 37. Overview of Indoor Navigation TechniquesSudeep Pasricha, Colorado State University, US 38. Navigation with Cellular Signals-of-OpportunityZak Kassas, University of California Irvine, US 39. Navigation with Dedicated Metropolitan Beacon SystemsSubbu Meiyappan, NextNav LLC, USArun Raghupathy, NextNav LLC, USGanesh Pattabiraman, NextNav LLC, US 40. Navigation with Terrestrial Digital Broadcast SignalsChun Yang, SigTem Technology Inc., US 41. Navigation with Low Frequency Radio SignalsWouter Pelgrum, Blue Origin, USCharles Schue, III, Ursa Nav., US 42. Adaptive Radar Navigation SystemKyle Kauffman, Air Force Institute of Technology, US 43. Navigation from Low Earth OrbitTyler G. R. Reid, Stanford University., USTodd Walter, Stanford University, USPer Enge, Stanford University, USDavid Lawrence, Satelles, USH. Stewart Cobb, Satelles, USGreg Gutt, Satelles, USMichael O’Conner, Satelles, USDavid Whelan, University of California San Diego, US Part E: Position, Navigation, and Timing Using Non-Radio Signals-of-Opportunity 44. Inertial Navigation SensorsStephen Smith, Draper Laboratory, US 45. MEMS Inertial SensorsAlissa M. Fitzgerald, A.M. Fitzgerald & Associates, LLC, US 46. GNSS-INS IntegrationAndrey Soloviev, QuNav, USJames L. Farrell, Vigil Inc., USMaarten Uijt de Haag, Ohio University, US 47. Atomic Clock for GNSSLeo Hollberg, Stanford University, US 48. Positioning Using Magnetic FieldsAaron Canciani, Air Force Institute of Technology, USJohn F. Raquet, Air Force Institute of Technology, US 49. Laser-Based NavigationMaarten Uijt de Haag, Ohio UniversityZhen Zhu, East Carolina University, USJacob Campbell, Air Force Research Laboratory, US 50. Image-Aided Navigation - Concept and ApplicationsMichael J. Veth, Veth Research Associates, USJohn F. Raquet, Air Force Institute of Technology, US 51. Digital PhotogrammetryCharles Toth, the Ohio State University, USZoltan Koppanyi, the Ohio State University, US 52. Navigation Using Pulsars and Other Variable Celestial SourcesSuneel Sheikh, ASTER Labs, Inc., US 53. Neuroscience of NavigationMeredith E. Minear, University of Wyoming, USTes K. Sensibaugh, University of Wyoming, US 54. Orientation and Navigation in the Animal WorldGillian Durieux, Max Plank Institute for Evolutionary Biology, GermanyMiriam Liedvogel, Max Plank Institute for Evolutionary Biology, Germany Part F: Position, Navigation, and Timing for Consumer and Commercial Applications 55. GNSS Applications in Surveying and Mobile MappingNaser El-Sheimy, University of Calgary, CanadaZahra Lari, University of Calgary, Canada 56. Precision AgricultureArthur F. Lange, Trimble Navigation, USJohn Peake, Trimble Navigation, US 57. WearablesMark Gretton, TomTom, USPeter Franks Pauwels, TomTom, US 58. Navigation in Advanced Driver-Assisted Systems and Automated DrivingDavid Bevly, Auburn University, USScott Martin, Auburn University, US 59. Train Control and Rail Traffic Management SystemsAlessandro Neri, University of Roma TRE, Italy 60. Commercial Unmanned Aircraft SystemsMaarten Uijt de Haag, Ohio University, USEvan Dill, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, USSteven D. Young, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, USMathieu Joerger, Virginia Tech, US 61. Navigation for AviationSherman Lo, Stanford University, US 62. Orbit Determination with GNSSYoaz Bar-Sever, Jet Propulsion Lab, US 63. Satellite Formation Flying and RendezvousSimone D’Amico, Stanford University, USJ. Russell Carpenter, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, US 64. Navigation in the ArcticTyler G. R. Reid, Stanford University, USTodd Walter, Stanford University, USRobert Guinness, Finnish Geospatial Research Institute, FinlandSarang Thombre, Finnish Geospatial Research Institute, FinlandHeidi Kuusniemi, Finnish Geospatial Research Institute, FinlandNorvald Kjerstad, Norwegian University of Science and Technology, Norway

Read more less